Home

Acer 4736G Laptop User Manual

Contents

1. C5 o E EE l I Q J gt o W 2 QViewfinder Displays the camera image and the playback picture MEMO Set the image format for the viewfinder to RGB compo nent composite or Y signal in VF SIGNAL on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen t See page 92 Eyepiece Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman Eyepiece focus ring You can adjust the focus by turning this ring Eyepiece mounting ring You can adjust the position of the eyepiece forward or backward by loosening this ring Slide mounting ring You can adjust the position of the viewfinder left or right by loosening this ring Oclamp Attach the microphone cable here FOCUS ASSIST Focus assist button When you press this button during shooting the area of focus is displayed in blue red or green making it easy to focus accurately 18 MEMO When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen is set to ACCU FOCUS and this button is pressed ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST This makes depth of field shallower making it easier to focus This button has the same function as the FOCUS ASSIST button in the Right Side Section ts See LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen on page 89 REC REC trigger button start stop recording Start and stop recording using this button This works together
2. 5605 5609 Tape is cut Operation stops Press the EJECT button to take out the DEFECTIVE TAPE cassette If the tape runs out during recording Alarm Indications on LCD Monitor 2 switch the power OFF and then switch Viewfinder Screen TALLY lamp Alarm Sound Condition it back ON press the EJECT button VTR alarm indication Dew formation condensation or error has oc and then take out the cassette Example curred in the VTR 5702 Tape end sensor error Operation stops All opera Switch the power OFF and then switch AANA TAPE END DET ERROR tions are rejected it back ON However the tape may be DROM noe Stine 5802 Tape beginning sensor error damaged depending on the circum TAPE BEGIN DET ERROR stances Please consult the person in ETAPE NEAR END m About 3 min before tape end m charge of professional video equip MIN displayed during recording 7001 Drumirotatlon error ment at your nearest JVC authorized PTUN MO PT al service agent TAPE END WM ES ouri i 7101 Capstan rotation error i MAWANI displayed during recording CAP MOTOR FAILURE om a WU Remaining battery power is low LOW VOLTAGE Mh 7202 7203 Supply reel rotation error SUPPLY REEL FAILURE 7302 7303 Take up reel rotation error Display symbols Blinking once per second Blinking four times per second TAKE UP REEL FAILURE Sound interrupted once per second Continuous sound 7305 Take up re
3. CAM VTR button Screen Size 4 3 16 9 Mode Selection The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen us See page 78 To record using the standard screen set ASPECT to 4 3 To record using the 16 9 screen set ASPECT to 16 9 ASPECT item 4 3 4 3 TV 16 9 TV 16 9 4 3 TV LETTER 16 9 TV In DV mode selection of SQUEEZE and LETTER is not possible The screen display mode becomes SQUEEZE MEMO When you set the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu to HDV format the ASPECT item is fixed at 16 9 and 16 9 is displayed If the above applies you can set to display the image in the style of 4 3 televisions ts See DOWN CON HDV on page 78 In the SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen you can display the safety zone for a standard screen as well as a 16 9 screen in the viewfinder or LCD monitor us See page 89 When the ASPECT item is set to 4 3 the screen that is displayed may differ depending on the 16 9 television you are using 55 SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Audio Input Signal Selec tion The GY HD250 GY HD251 is provided with the INPUT1 con nector and the INPUT2 connector for audio input Select the audio from the INPUT1 connector or the INPUT2 connector using the CH 2 INPUT switch for the audio to be recorded in CH 2 Select
4. 242 3 225 TENS Je PAL oS ove 25 au 203 16 LENS 256 x13 LENS 4 310 for 10x BATT La A DE L SEN ERR 82 3 Design and specifications are subject to change without notice 109 2006 Victor Company of Japan Limited LST0440 001A X3dHX0903H VYJNWY GH LSZAH A9 0SZAH A9 HD CAMERA RECORDER GY HD250 GY HD251 HDV W Thank you for purchasing this JVC product Before operating this device please read the instructions carefully to ensure the best possible performance For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No which is located on the body Retain this information for future reference Model No Serial No INTRODUCTION i CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS PREPARATIONS PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING SHOOTING OPERATION PLAYBACK MODE INSTRUCTIONS USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS MENU SCREENS FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION OTHERS The illustration shows the GY HD250 GY HD251 HD CAMERA RECORDER with the provided lens viewfinder and microphone attached LST0440 001A Important Safeguards NOARONS 10 11 12 13 14 Read all of these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follo
5. recommended that you record and store videotapes in the environment below Storage Recording Short period Long period Up to 10 Over 10 years years Temperature 17 C to 25 C 15 C to 23 C 15 C to 19 C Humidity 30 to 70 40 to55 25 to 35 Hourly tempera Less than can ture change 10 C Hourly humidity Less than _ an change 10 Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period If videotapes are left wound for a long period of time it may result in distortion of the tape Also it may cause tape to tape adhesion known as blocking It is recommended that videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year for refreshing When tapes are not in use store them in cases and on end Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity dust and ultraviolet light Keep tapes in cases and do not store them lying flat When housed in a horizontal position pres sure from other tapes can cause distortions and deforma tions of the tape edges Condensation If this device has been cooled down in a cold place and is then carried to a warm place the moisture contained in the warm air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides and be cooled into water droplets This phenomenon is referred to as condensation dew When this occurs the head drum and tape guides are covered with droplets allowing the tape to be stuck to them leading to tape dam age Condensation occurs in
6. 1 Set the LCD VF item on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen to ON 6 See page 89 2 When the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the LCD monitor is displayed the displayed contents change every time the DISPLAY button is pressed Only image displayed gt Characters shown enlarged Image and characters displayed a Contents Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked to the video signal Time Code Generator Setting Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section Indicator FREE TC GENE switch is set to PRESET FREE RUN MODE RECR TC GENE switch is set to PRESET REC RUN MODE REGN TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE DUPL There is 1394 input in VTR mode and TC DUPLI menu is set to ON Indicates the framing mode of the time code DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode Indication of DR HD100 Oper When a DR HD100 HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements is connected its operation status is displayed ation For details refer to the DR HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL Audio Lock Indicator Drop Non drop Indicator MEMO When characters indicating the status are displayed in magnified size on the LCD monitor the viewfinder display the image 29 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor Alarm Message Display and in the Viewfinder Cont d The following alarm messages are displa
7. Setting Description FRAME RATE NATIVE Outputs the signal being recorded on the tape 60 30 720P Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 720p and outputs it 50 25 10801 Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 1080i and outputs it 24 NTSC Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 480i and outputs it 60 30 24 PAL Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 576i and outputs it 50 25 MEMO Item PB TAPE Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Selects whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format Normally use the AUTO setting AUTO During tape playback the format signal is switched automatically and played back DV During tape playback only the part of the tape recorded in DV format is played back HDV During tape playback only the part of the tape recorded in HDV format is played back DVCAM During tape playback only the part of the tape recorded in DVCAM format is played back MEMO If you play back a tape containing both DV and HDV formats the video signal is disturbed when the signal is switched HD SD SDI OUT Sets whether or not to output SDI Serial Digital Interface signals from the HD SD SDI OUT terminal OFF No output If you convert video recorded in HDV format to DV format and output it the colors may change This item is also applied to EE images when HDV signals ar
8. Recording and Image Out sake Component SDI Out at HDV PB OUTPUT menu item RGB Out Y C Out COMPOSHE IEEE1394 In Out put Formats NATIVE 720P 10801 NTSC 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 480 60i 480 60i This device supports HDV and DV image formats as well as images input from external devices This device also has various 720 30p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 601 480 60 480 60i output terminals Composite analog component HD SD SDI IEEE1394 720 50p bs 1080 50 N A 576 50i 576 50i 576 50i 576 50i Select analog component RGB or Y C signals for images from the Y PB PR terminal in DV format 720 25p 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 50i 576 50i 4 576 50i 576 50i Select in OUTPUT TERM DV on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen 720 24p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 601 480 60i1 480 60 During recording and playback image formats from each of the output terminals are as shown in the table below 480 60p N A NA NA NA NA NA N A Notes about the table 576 50p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Shaded Indicates the setting item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen N A Terminal is not available Same format as the left 480 60i U model 480 60i 24p 576 50 E model 576 m When recording camera images Recording Shooting IEEE Component SDI Out PGB Out Y C o
9. SMOOTH TRANS Smoothens the transition when the GAIN switch on page 15 or WHT BAL switch on page 15 is switched over and achieves gradual change in place of sudden change However the smooth transition function does not function when switching the GAIN switch set in ALC FULL AUTO ON OFF Deactivates the smooth transition function ON Activates the smooth transition function BARS Sets whether or not color bars are output This is fixed at OFF when in FULL AUTO mode OFF Color bars are not output ON Color bars are output PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position 1 REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected 77 MENU SCREENS CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 Menu Screen Menu Screen The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in camera mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings BLACK Changes the gain in dark areas Change this depending on the video signal being shot Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings NORMAL Normal status MASTER BLACK 2 Adjusts the pedestal level master black that serves as the reference black STRETCH Enhances the dark areas of the video so the contrast between light and dark is m
10. Error display PUSH JOG BUTTON Error If there is an error Check items and in Before initializing formatting a card FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION How to Use Skin Detail This function suppresses edge sharpening in the skin color areas of the video signal enabling velvety smooth skin tones Setting the skin detail function color and range SHUTTER dial p e SaaS ERZ USERS a am m IFA JD STATUS button 1 Display the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen In menu setting procedure TOP MENU screen CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 gt CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 Select ADVANCED PRO CESS item CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 BLACK NORMAL STRETCH LEVEL COMPRESS LEVEL WHITE CLIP 108 KNEE AUTO LEVEL a SBEN DNR OFF Cursor gt ADVANCE PROCESS PAGE BACK CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the SKIN COLOR ADJUST item and press the SHUTTER dial The SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen is displayed The entire screen becomes black and white and only the areas recognized by the skin detail function are displayed in color ADVANCED PROCESS CINELIKE OFF COLOR MATRIX STANDARD ADJUST GAMMA STANDARD LEVEL NORMAL COLOR GAIN NORMAL WHITE BALANCE gt SKIN COLOR ADJUST PAGE BACK ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen 3 Move the cursor P to the SKIN COLOR DET item press the S
11. TOP MENU Screen Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether this device is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode In the VTR mode the CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS and SWITCH MODE menu screens are not displayed Item Function VIDEO FORMAT Displays the menu screen for setting the video format for shooting and playing back video Camera mode It consists of two screens VTR mode It consists of one screen The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording CAMERA OPERATION Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting e This item is only displayed in the Camera mode CAMERA PROCESS Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera image It consists of two screens The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen WHITE BALANCE menu screen and SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen can be displayed through the CAMERA PROCESS menu screen This item is only displayed in the Camera mode The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode PLAY STL FWD REV SWITCH MODE Displays the menu screens related to the camera switch functions This item is only displayed when in camera mode AUDIO MIC Displays a menu screen related to audio Camera mode It consists of two screens VTR mode It consists of one screen In VTR mode the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen The cursor
12. 00020 Removing the Battery 000 Precautions for the Battery Operation A y Remaining Battery Power Display Operating Time with Battery Pack Precautions for the Battery Pack Recharging esses acct ieee cot irs ck ey 6 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Turning the Power ON 000 000008 Turning the Power ON Turning the Power OFF 02000 Loading Unloading the Cassette Cassette Loading 00 00004 Unloading the Cassette Setting and Displaying the Date and Time Setting the Date and Time Style Setting the Date and Time 00 Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen 42 Displaying Time Code 0 00008 43 Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector GY HD200U GY HD201E only 43 Presetting and Recording of Time Code 44 SOMING sie abel ested tnt a ik Riker 44 Presetting time code data 00 45 Presetting user s bit data 00 45 Zero resetting the Time Code or User s Bit Data 45 Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen 46 Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time Codes Recorded on Tape 000 005 47 Playing Back Time Code 0000 47 Synchronizing with the Time Code of the IEEE1394 DV Connected
13. authorized service agent Head Cleaning To maintain beautiful pictures and sound be sure to use a head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically ts See Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape If head cleaning is not performed periodically a type of mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture or sound may be interrupted Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC Do not use head cleaning tapes other than specified ts See Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape about how to use the head cleaning tape and precautions for use of the head cleaning tape When dust adheres to the heads the warning message HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder during playback and record ing check using the RET button on the lens section Periodical Maintenance Contents Check or replace the following mechanical parts according to the running time Usage Time Drum assembly includ ing heads Tape guides rollers Belt gears Drive parts O Clean check and adjust Clean and check Replace as required Replace 1 Insert the cleaning tape Press the PLAY STILL button after the cleaning tape is fully loaded The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY mode The tape stops automatically and then this device enters the STOP mode 2 Do not use the tape more than four times at th
14. AUTO WHITE A AUTO WHITE A NG OBJECT ERROR LOW LIGHT Improper object Insufficient illumination AUTO WHITE A ERROR OVER LIGHT Excessive illumination CAUTION Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects such as metal etc as this may result in improper white balance adjustment The FAW Full Auto White balance function cannot pro vide optimum white balance with a subject outside the FAW adjustment range for example when it contains only a single color or not enough white color The accuracy of the FAW Full Auto White balance is inferior to that of the Auto white balance When the power is turned on with the FAW mode selected it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW adjust ment to be completed Do not shoot within this interval Full Auto White Balance FAW The FAW function adjusts the white balance value automati cally as the lighting condition changes This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in and out of places under different lighting conditions m Setting procedure The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen The FAW function can be allocated to one of the white balance switching switches A B or PRESET ts See page 86 White Shading Adjustment Even if white balance is achieved in the middle of the screen it may not be achieved at the top and bottom of the
15. PAGE BACK Camera mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 2 4 menu screen VTR mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 91 MENU SCREENS LCD VF 4 4 Menu Screen 2 2 screen is displayed in the VTR mode This is not displayed in VTR mode Item LCD VF Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display switching method OFF Turns off the viewfinder display when the LCD monitor is opened ON Viewfinder always displayed the image MEMO When this item is set to ON the contents displayed on the LCD monitor can be changed with the DISPLAY button us See page 29 LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 VF CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 BLACK amp WHITE Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display style COLOR Displays the image in color B amp W Displays the image in black and white MEMO Characters are always displayed in color 92 VF SIGNAL Sets the image format output from the Viewfinder connector on page 16 RGB RGB signals Y Y signals Brilliance signals COMPONENT Component signals COMPOSITE Composite signals MEMO Set this to RGB when using th
16. 2006 Victor Company of Japan Limited LST0512 001A HD CAMERA RECORDER GY HD200U CHU GY HD200E CHE GY HD201E CHE FOV D INTRODUCTION ie CONTROLS INDICATORS At CONNECTORS PREPARATIONS PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION SETTING ADJUSTME BEFORE SHOOTING SHOOTING OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS MENU SCREENS FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION OTHERS v pa 6 amp fo Thank you for purchasing this JVC product Before operating this device please read the instructions carefully to ensure the best possible performance For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No which is located on the body Retain this information for future reference Model No Serial No The illustration shows the GY HD200U GY HD200E GY HD201E HD CAMERA RECORDER with the provided lens viewfinder and microphone attached LST0512 001A Important Safeguards SADIE Orne 10 11 12 13 14 Read all of these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accor dance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radia tors heat resisters stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety pu
17. A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be guaranteed if a recording is ended by turning the POWER switch or DC power supply OFF or by removing the battery pack Trial shooting is always recommended before recording important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens iris if the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved abruptly during recording About the QUICK REC START Mode If the REC VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after the videocassette is inserted the mode becomes the QUICK REC START mode that enables quick start of recording However when shooting starts in the middle of the tape a blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked smoothly with the previous image Also the time code does not continue Some overlap may also occur About the Focus Assist Function When you press this button during shooting the area of focus is displayed in blue red or green making it easy to focus accurately ts See LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen on page 86 You can also set this function from the RET button ts See SWITCH MODE Menu Screen on page 83 LENS RET item When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen is set to ACCU FOCUS ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST This makes focusing with shallower depth of field easier ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approxi mately 10 seconds t See
18. CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 Menu Screen CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 Menu Screen ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen 0 SWITCH MODE Menu Screen AUDIO MIC 1 2 Menu Screen 02 00005 AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen 02 000005 LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen 00 2 00 LCD VF 2 4 Menu Screen 00020000 LCD VF 3 4 Menu Screen 000 200004 LCD VF 4 4 Menu Screen 0002 000 TC UB CLOCK Menu Screen 00005 HEADER REC Menu Screen TIME DATE Menu Screen 200000005 OTHERS 1 2 Menu Screen 000000 96 OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen 00000 97 GENLOCK Menu Screen 0 0 2200 0000s 99 FILE MANAGE Menu Screen 0 00 100 Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen 100 Loading a menu settings file Saving settings 0 00 00008 Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings 102 Initializing formatting an SD memory card 102 FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION How to Use Skin Detail Carapa taradi ie niati ART 103 Outputting Color Bars 0 0000000 105 OTHERS Warnings and Responses 0000200 106 Troubleshooting 0st 41 ee Sere te de Melee wrong eee 110 How to Display the Hour Meter
19. Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Sets the image display method when the LCD monitor is in counterview position NORMAL Image is displayed without inverting MIRROR Inverted image is displayed NORMAL MIRROR is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed MEMO MIRROR setting is disabled when color bar is displayed or status is in magnified size ts See Outputting Color Bars on page 101 ts See Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor on page 29 NEXT PAGE When you display the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen 87 MENU SCREENS LCD VF 3 4 Menu Screen 1 2 screen is displayed in the VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings VIDEO FORMAT Selects whether to display the video format in the status display on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen ON Displays the video format OFF Does not display the video format In camera mode Displays the video format set in the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen In VTR mode Displays the video format recorded on the playback tape or the video format input from the IEEE1394 connector TAPE REMAIN Selects whether or not the remaining
20. Item START KEY Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed DISABLE HEADER REC operation is not executed STOP REC HEADER REC operation is executed TC DATA Sets the time code value for the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER REC EXECUTE Confirms the set time code ZERO PRESET Resets all time codes to 0 CANCEL Clears the set time code The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The time code value at the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the val ue set for this item UB DATA Sets the user s bits of the HEADER REC section EXECUTE Confirms the set user s bits ZERO PRESET Resets all user s bits data to 0 CANCEL Clears the set user s bits MEMO The user s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen When the UB REC item is set to OFF is displayed and this cannot be selected BARS TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the color bar signal and test tone 1 kHz is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Settings OSEC 30SEC 99SEC BLACK TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the black signal is recorded d
21. Siemens star chart 1 Set the IRIS mode switch to M Manual 2 Set the zoom mode to M Manual 3 Open the iris by turning the iris ring If the illumination is too strong reduce it or move to a darker place 4 Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum tele photo position 5 Bring the subject into focus 6 Set the lens to maximum wide angle 7 Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob 8 View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for the best possible focus 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 about three times for fine adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the telephoto position and the wide angle position 10 Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the ring 51 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION White Balance Adjustment Since the color of light color temperature varies depending on the light source it is necessary to re adjust the white balance when the main light source illuminating the subject changes White Balance Adjustment Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored in memories AUTO A and AUTO B Adjustment procedure 1 Set the following switches Set the POWER switch to ON Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A Auto Set the FULL AUTO switch to OFF 2 Set the ND filter switch according to the current lighting 3 Set the WHT BAL switch to A or B 4 Place a white object near the center of the screen under the same
22. o_o 1 Tripod mounting holes 2 While pushing the safety lever pull the lock lever toward the front until the front mount clip clicks into place 3 Pin Front mount clip H 2 Safety lever x tt Lock lever 3 Place this device on the tripod base by aligning the rear base mount of this device with the pin on the tripod base 4 Front base mount 3 Rear base mount 4 Hold the camera on the top and slide forward so that the base mount of the camera is locked by the front mount clip of this device as it clicks into place 4 qm F Jo Hg CAUTION The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base mount of this device Therefore after mounting make sure that these parts are engaged properly e When moving this device mounted on a tripod any impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause this device to become detached and to drop from the tri pod Be sure to remove this device from the tripod before transporting it 35 PREPARATIONS AC Operation This device is operable with AC power supply or battery pack Use the AC adapter as the AC power supply 1 After making sure that the power switches of this device and of the AC adapter are se
23. when the SHUTTER dial is rotated the value of the blinking digit changes When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward the value becomes higher When rotated downward the value becomes smaller Repeat the procedure described in and above to set the desired value for all digits After setting the frame digit press the SHUTTER dial to make EXECUTE blink The setting values are con firmed when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again To cancel the setting select CANCEL and press the SHUTTER dial 3 When all the digits are set Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen or Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the PAGE BACK item and then press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen Presetting user s bit data The user s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The method for setting is the same as the method for setting the time code described on the left The user s bit can be specified using numerals or alpha betic letters from 0 to F for each digit To record user s bit data set the UB REC item to ON Only when set to FRAME RATE 50 25 CAUTION It is not possible to set all the digits of the user s bit data to F3 Reading of the data during playback will not be possible for an all F setting Zero resetting the Time Code or User s Bit Data This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the TC UB CLOCK menu sc
24. 0 Savitig Settings soi fo acigase e eid deed Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings 98 Initializing formatting an SD memory card 98 FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION How to Use Skin Detail Outputting Color Bars OTHERS Warnings and Responses 02 0005 102 MrOUDIESHOOHING s iii enan dee art Se ad dese So aa 106 How to Display the Hour Meter 0 107 Specifications EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS INTRODUCTION Precautions for Proper Use Supply voltage Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC If the power voltage is too low abnormal color and increased noise may occur Allowable ambient temperature and humidity Be sure to use this device within the allowable tempera ture range of 0 C to 40 C and a relative humidity of 30 to 80 Using this device at a temperature or humidity out side the allowable ranges could result not only in malfunc tion but the impact on the CCD elements could be serious as small white spots may be generated Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism Noise may appear in the picture or audio and or the colors may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or tele vision transmitting antenna in places where strong mag netic fields are generated by transformers motors etc or near devices emitting radio waves such as transceivers or cellular phones Use of wireless microphone near the camera
25. EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete LOAD FILE EAROR 50 CARD J _ Flashing NO FORMAT Error display PUSH JOG BUTTON Error If there is an error Press the STATUS button Return to the normal screen Press the SHUTTER dial Return to the FILE MAN AGE menu screen To exit the FILE MANAGE screen Move the cursor P to PAGE BACK and press the SHUT TER dial or press the STATUS button 100 Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen Select the FILE MANAGE item on the TOP MENU screen Loading a menu settings file Select the LOAD FILE item on the FILE MANAGE menu screen FILE MANAGE DLOAD FILE STORE FILE RESET FILE FORMAT SD CARD CANCEL PAGE BACK FILE MANAGE menu screen LOAD FILE gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE LOAD CANCEL PAGE BACK 41 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to SELECT and press the SHUTTER dial The file name setting area flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the file to load and press the SHUTTER dial 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor gt to the LOAD item and press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE flashes 4 With EXECUTE selected press the SHUTTER dial to read the menu settings in the selected file If the current menu settings and the menu settings to be loaded have different video format settings REBOOT is displayed for 3 seconds this device turns off automati cally and then turns on
26. Move the cursor P to the EXECUTE item and EXE CUTE flashes 5 Push the SHUTTER dial REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE is displayed on the screen and after a few seconds the system is reboo ted REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE Setting the REC Item Set the REC item using the same steps as for the FRAME RATE item MEMO If you change the FRAME RATE item setting the system is rebooted The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched We recommend the following settings for REC item in HDV format When recording images with a lot of motion Set to HDV60p or HDV50p When recording images with little motion Set to HDV30p or HDV25p 53 SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Camera Settings 1 Set the switch positions A GAIN switch Set to L 0 dB B WHT BAL Auto White Balance switch Set to A or B 2 Set the lens iris mode switch to A Auto iris side 3 Select the ND filter ND FILTER Suitable Location OFF OFF Indoors dark outdoors 1 1 4ND Outdoors under clear sky 2 1 146ND Outdoors under extremely clear sky 4 Set the shutter speed to OFF with the SHUTTER dial k I PEPE Jee Sete 7 o i w Nr a 1a 7 Taa MONITOR SELECT DISPLAY VTR a CAM VTR button Scree
27. REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE Reboot display CAUTION This device cannot load scene files from GY HD100 GY HD110 series devices Saving settings Select the STORE FILE item on the FILE MANAGE menu screen 1 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to SELECT and press the SHUTTER dial The file name setting area flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the file to save to and press the SHUTTER dial STORE FILE CAM1 SCENE gt SELECT EDIT SUB NAME SCENE STORE OVERWRITE PAGE BACK m Setting a SUB NAME If you do not want to set a SUB NAME go to Step 5 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor gt to SUB NAME and press the SHUTTER dial The first character in the file name flashes STORE FILE SELECT CAM1 SCENE EDIT gt SUB NAME SCENE STORE OVERWR TE PAGE BACK Settable Characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890 Space 4 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the character and press the SHUTTER dial The second character in the file name flashes Repeat Step 4 up through the eighth character 5 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the STORE item and press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE if the file already exists OVERWRITE flashes STORE FILE SELECT CAM1 SCENE EDIT SUB NAME SCENE DSTORE OVERWRITE PAGE BACK 6 With EXECUTE selected turn the SHUTTER dial to save the menu settings to the selected fi
28. Remove the battery pack when the GY HD250 GY HD251 is not going to be used Remaining Battery Power Display LCD monitor Viewfinder LOW VOLTAGE 12 0V When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted the following warnings will be generated m Viewfinder screen or LCD monitor When a Status screen is displayed excluding the STATUS 2 3 screen in the Camera mode Alarm indication LOW VOLTAGE displayed m FRONT and BACK TALLY lamp on camera Blinks m Monitoring loudspeaker and PHONES jack Alarm sound MEMO After the remaining battery power warnings appear the GY HD250 GY HD251 automatically stops operation if the battery power operation is continued 38 When you use an Anton Bauer battery the remaining battery capacity or time can be displayed in the STA TUS 1 screen of the LCD screen or viewfinder Set BAT TERY INFO on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen to CAPA or TIME to display the remaining battery When using the IDX Endura battery the remaining capacity can be displayed See page 91 Operating Time with Battery Pack When a fully charged battery pack is attached the approxi mate continuous operating time is as follows Battery Pack Continuous Operating Time at 25 C 77 F Dionic 90 Approx 3 2 hours U model Endura 7 Approx 2 5 hours E model Battery operating time may differ depending on the age oi the battery pack charging conditions and the operating environment etc
29. Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the TC or UB PRESET item and then press the SHUTTER dial Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the setting value and then press the SHUTTER dial MEMO When a menu screen is not being displayed you can zero reset the time code data by simultaneously holding down the USER2 button and the STOP button for about 1 sec ond 45 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen The time code can be preset directly from the LCD screen without opening the TC UB CLOCK menu screen CAUTION PRESET mode is not available in the following TCG SOURCE item in the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to EXTERNAL TC GENE switch is set to REGEN TC DUPLI item in the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to ON Menu screen is displayed RECORDING mode is active Switching to CAM VTR mode When VTR indicator is blinking Setting m TC UB CLOCK menu screen Set TCG SOURCE to INTERNAL Set framing of the time code generator in DROP FRAME When set to FRAME RATE 60 30 Set to enable disable user s bit recording in UB REC When set to FRAME RATE 50 25 m Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE MEMO See page 44 for details on the above settings m Set the TC DISPLAY switch Set to TC to preset time code and UB to preset user s bit Operation This section describes presetting of the time code USER 2 button US
30. Selects whether or not to output camera images in HDV1080i signals HDV1080i signals are output from component output of the Y Ps PR terminal or HD SD SDI output terminal However they are not recorded on this device OFF No HDV1080i signal is output Output setting of camera images is based on the REC settings below ON HDV1080i signal is output 60 30 Frame rate 1080 60i 50 25 Frame rate 1080 50i 480 60i or 576 50i signals are output from the VIDEO OUT terminal ON OFF is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed MEMO Tape recording and IEEE1394 output are not available when this is ON REC item cannot be set when this is ON The cursor is positioned on 10801 CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen when this is ON When the FRAME RATE is set to 24 this is fixed to OFF Sets the video format for shooting Can only be displayed and set in camera mode You can set the following according to the FRAME RATE Setting Description FRAME RATE DV 60I DV format Shoots using a 480 60i signal U model Only HDV HD60P HDV format Shoots using a 720 60p signal 60 30 HDV HD30P_ HDV format Shoots using a 720 30p signal HDV HD50P HDV format Shoots using a 720 50p signal HDV HD25P HDV format Shoots using a 720 25p signal DV 501 DV format Shoots using a 576 50i signal DV 25P DV format Shoots using a 576 25p signal DV 24P DV format Shoots at 480 24p 2 3 2 3 pulldown DV 24PA DV format Shoots at 480 24p 2 3 3 2 pull
31. The GY HD250 GY HD251 incorporates precision mechani cal parts which will collect dirt wear out and deteriorate as this device is used After this device has been used for a long period even in a normal environment the heads drums and cost please contact the person in charge of professional tape transport mechanisms also collect dirt Especially dust video equipment at your nearest JVC authorized service which penetrates the inside of the VTR section during out agent door use will promote the wear and deterioration of mechani cal parts by causing poor contact between tape and heads or failing to maintain the video and audio quality at high levels To prevent wear and deterioration clean the mechanical parts using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance Supply voltage Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC If the power voltage is too low abnormal color and increased noise may occur Allowable ambient temperature and humidity Be sure to use this device within the allowable tempera ture range of 0 C to 40 C and a relative humidity of 30 to 80 Using this device at a temperature or humidity out side the allowable ranges could result not only in malfunc tion but the impact on the CCD elements could be serious as small white spots may be generated For consultations related to the maintenance planning or Precautions for Use of Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism detergent However cleani
32. Warning Warning Indications for VTR Abnormalities Should malfunctions occur during VTR operation this device self diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnose together with an error code on the LCD monitor or in the m Alarm Sound When remaining battery power becomes low a warning sound is output from the monitoring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack In Camera mode only When an irregularity occurs in the VTR a warning sound is also output Whether or not alarm sound should be output and the vol ume level are selected with the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen m Depending on the alarm conditions the warning indicators viewfinder i i on the LCD monitor viewfinder screen the TALLY lamp and alarm sounds appear as shown in the following table Error Code Error Details GY HD250 GY HD251 Remedy Operation 0201 Indicates dew formation condensa Operation stops All opera Leave this device with the power ON CONDENSATION ON DRUM tion tions are rejected until the indication disappears 3200 Tape cannot be loaded Switch the power OFF and then switch LOADING FAILURE it back ON However the tape may be 3300 Tape cannot be unloaded damaged depending on the circum UNLOADING FAILURE stances Please consult the person in 4100 Irregularity with eject operation charge of professional video equip CASSETTE EJECT FAILURE ment at your nearest JVC authorized service agent
33. m GY HD200E GY HD201E Use an IDX Endura battery Attaching the Battery 1 Face the battery terminals down and align the battery V mount with the battery adapter V mount attachment V mount attachment 2 Slide the battery down until it clicks and locks The battery is attached Removing the Batte Slide the battery up while holding down the lock release but ton to remove the battery Release button 37 PREPARATIONS Battery Operation Cont d Precautions for the Battery Opera tion Do not detach the battery pack while recording is taking place Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operat ing with a battery pack The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is con nected or disconnected while operating with a battery pack The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is disconnected Noise to the video and audio signals occurs Audio sig nal are muted When operation is continued with DC input after the bat tery pack capacity has been used up set the POWER switch to OFF after the DC power is applied Then switch ON again If this device is left with the battery pack attached a small amount of power is consumed even if the POWER switch on this device is set to OFF Remove the battery pack when this device is not going to be used Remaining Battery Power Display LCD monitor Viewfinder LOW VOLTAGE 12 0V When the remaining battery po
34. Characters shown enlarged Image and characters displayed Audio Lock Indicator Contents Displayed during recording and playback when the audio signal is locked to the video signal Time Code Generator Setting Indicator Indicates the set status of the TC GENE switch on the side section FREE TC GENE switch is set to PRESET FREE RUN MODE RECR TC GENE switch is set to PRESET REC RUN MODE REGN TC GENE switch is set to REGEN MODE DUPL There is 1394 input in VTR mode and TC DUPLI menu is set to ON EXT Displays when time code is input to the TC IN terminal When TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to EXTERNAL Drop Non drop Indicator Indicates the framing mode of the time code DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode Synchronized display with an external time code generator Lights up when the time code generator of this device synchronizes with the time code input from the TC IN terminal Blinks when synchronization is unsuccessful Turns off If there is no input signal Indication of DR HD100 Oper ation MEMO When characters indicating the status are displayed in magnified size on the LCD monitor the viewfinder display the image When a DR HD100 HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements is connected its operation status is displayed For details refer to the DR HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 29 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor
35. Cont d m VTR Mode IEEE1394 Input Mode VIDEO FORMAT FRAME RATE 60 30 p e POV PB OUTPUT NATIVE DOWN CON HDV LETTER PB TAPE AUTO HD SD SDI OUT OFF OUTPUT TERM DV Y Po Pr SET UP 0 0 PAGE BACK AUDIO DTEST TONE OFF gt AUDIO REF LEVEL 2098 AUDIO MONITOR MIX SEARCH AUDIO DV ON PB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK MENU T LoD vF Ita T LODIVE 2 2 VIDEO FORMAT video FORMAT On DLco vE ore Aupiouwic TAPE REMAIN oN LCD CONTRAST NORMAL Potent Te uB OFF VE CONTRAST NORMAL Terier AUDIO OFF VE SIGNAL RGB FILE MANAGE BATTERY INFO VOLTAGE PAGE BACK SHUTTER DISP SEG Z HEADER REG EXIT NEXT PAGE ll I gt START KEY DISABLE PAGE BACK TC DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB DATA o0 o0 00 00 EXECUTE BARS TIME 30SEC TOP MENU screen VTR BLACK TIME 30SEC PAGE BACK 2 Te7UB GLOCK f e gt TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE TIME DATE aS T LOCK ADJUST DROP FRAME DROP DDISPLAY OFF I gt DATE MM DDIYY 06 06 06 TC DUPLI OFF DISPLAY MODE TIME 09 33 HEADER REC DISPLAY STYLE PAGE BACK TIME DATE E 9 32hav sf PAGE BACK TIME STYLE SEC DISPLAY TIME SHIFT Uar REG on CLOCK ADJUST Te DUPLI OFF crock ADs LL OTHERS 1 2 OTHERS 2 2 1 2 GENLOGK PANALOG OUT CHAR ON MENU ALL R
36. DV Lights when the format is DV HDV DV Turns off when the format is 1080i MEMO During a system error HDV DV flash alternately ts See page 104 Select whether or not to have this light in the FORMAT LED item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen ts See page 93 LCD door lock and release knob To open the LCD door move this knob on the direction toward the rear section LCD door LCD monitor door The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened The door can be turned to change the orientation of the LCD monitor and it can be rotated so that it can be accommodated in the main body of the camera t See page 49 15 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Left Side Section Q Viewfinder connector 6 pin Connect the cable from the viewfinder here I CH 2 INPUT CH 2 audio input connector selector switch Selects the CH 2 audio input connector INPUT1 Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector into CH 2 INPUT2 Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector into CH 2 MEMO The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH 1 regardless of the setting AUDIO INPUT Audio input signal selector switch This switch is used to select the input sound signal from INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector LINE Set to this position when connected to audio equipment etc The referen
37. Depending on the ambient temperature if still image play back mode continues for between 30 seconds and 3 min utes it stops automatically Tape protect mode During still picture playback and search mode press this button to return to the normal playback mode If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play mode is entered the playback video will be interfered with digital noise IFF Fast forward button Press this button to fast forward the tape Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates the fast forward mode Only for VTR mode Pressing this button during playback still picture play back or reverse search initiates forward search Screw holes for mounting accessories You can mount lights and other accessories 19 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Recording and Image Out put Formats This device supports HDV and DV image formats This device also has various output terminals Composite analog component IEEE1394 During recording and playback image formats from each of the output terminals are as shown in the table below Notes about the table Shaded Indicates the setting item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen N A Terminal is not available Same format as the left m When recording camera images Recording Shooting Rec on Tape IEEE1394 Out Component Out Composite Out REC menu item Format EE Out EE Out
38. HDV HD60P 720 60p 480 60i HDV HD30P 720 30p 720 60p 480 60i iy HDV HD50P 720 50p E E pa 576 501 HDV HD25P 720 25p e 720 50p 576 50i HDV HD24P 720 24p 720 60p 480 60i DV 601 480 60i aa U model only DV 24P 480 60i 24p DV DV 24PA 480 60i 24p ra ja pe DV 501 576 501 E model only DV 25P 576 50i 25p ma Dene Frame rate Rec on Tape IEEE1394 Out Component Out Composite Out Hp ON 60 30 N A N A 1080 60i 480 60i 50 25 N A N A 1080 50i 576 50i Em In PLAY mode Component Out Playback IEEE1394 Out HDV PB OUTPUT menu item Composite Out NATIVE 720P 10801 NTSC PAL 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 720 30p 720 60p e 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 50i 576 50i HDV 720 25p 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 50i 576 50i 720 24p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 480 60p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 576 50p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A modal 480 60i By 480 60i 24p r 576 50i E model 576 50i 25p ra MEMO Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the playback signal 20 m When Recording HDV or DV Images from the IEEE1394 Terminal Only with the GY HD200U and GY HD201E Component Out Recordin EEA hj Rec on Tap
39. MIDDLE Alarm sound is normal HIGH Alarm sound is loud FRONT TALLY Selects the lighting method of the FRONT TALLY lamp during recording BLINK The lamp blinks from when the REC VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts The lamp lights steadily during recording ON The lamp lights only during recording OFF The lamp is always off BACK TALLY Selects the lighting method of the BACK TALLY lamp during recording BLINK The lamp blinks from when the REC VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts The lamp lights steadily during recording ON The lamp lights only during recording OFF The lamp is always off FORMAT LED Sets whether or not the HDV DV LED on page 15 lights for HDV format or DV format ON Lights OFF Does not light GENLOCK Calls up the GENLOCK menu screen Adjusts the H PHASE or SC PHASE of image signals of this device according to the external synchronization signal input to the GENLOCK IN terminal t See page 99 NEXT PAGE To display the OTHERS 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position 96 OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings 1394 REC TRIGGER Sets how to control the REC trigger command output from the IEEE1394 connector Can be displ
40. circumstances the tape may also be damaged Vibrations Colors may fail to appear and or the image and sound may be disturbed during VTR playback in locations sub jected to strong vibrations Precautions for transportation Do not drop or hit this device against a hard object Remove the videocassette before transporting this device 6 Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the cassette insertion slot Be sure to close the cassette cover when this device is not to be used for a long period Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the power cable during recording or playback Otherwise the tape may be damaged The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set lower than the reference input 60 dBs setting When this device is not in use be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF in order to reduce power consumption Cleaning the body Wipe body with a dry soft cloth To prevent deformation of the body etc and to avoid opera tion hazards do not allow volatile liquids such as benzine and thinner to touch the body and do not wipe it with a cloth soaked in such a liquid When it is extremely dirty soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent wipe the body with it and then use a clean cloth to remove the detergent The camera may not show stable pictures in the period immediately after the power is turned on but this is not a malfunction A sound occurs when the built in head cleaner that ru
41. 111 Specifications EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS INTRODUCTION The maintenance contents vary depending on the operat ing environment and method Therefore the data in the chart should be considered as a reference Time management The accumulated running time of this device can be con firmed with the hour meter display which shows the accu mulated drum and fan motor running time 1 See How to Display the Hour Meter on page 111 Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the H cassette insertion slot Be sure to close the cassette cover Precautions for Proper when this device is not to be used for a long period Use Do not set the POWER switch to OFF or remove the power cable during recording or playback Otherwise the tape may be damaged The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set lower than the reference input 60 dBs setting When this device is not in use be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF in order to reduce power consumption Cleaning the body Wipe body with a dry soft cloth To prevent deformation of the body etc and to avoid opera tion hazards do not allow volatile liquids such as benzine and thinner to touch the body and do not wipe it with a cloth soaked in such a liquid When it is extremely dirty soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent wipe the body with it and then use a clean cloth to remove the Routine and Periodical Maintenance
42. Alarm Message Display and in the Viewfinder Cont d The following alarm messages are displayed while the STA TUS 0 1 4 screen is shown in the Camera mode or a STA TUS screen is shown in the VTR mode If an alarm is generated while the STATUS 2 3 screen is shown the STATUS 0 screen returns to display the alarm ts See page 106 When an abnormality occurs in the VTR a warning message with an error code is displayed tsr See pages 106 108 Auto White Balance Indication Camera mode only The AUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are dis played during the auto white balance adjustment operation ts See White Balance Adjustment on page 52 AUTO WHITE A 01 02 03 M01 23 45 OPERATION Alarm display area Menu Setting Screen Screen used for making various settings The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or more ts See Setting Menu Screens on page 75 MENU DVIDEO FORMAT CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS SWITCH MODE AUDIO MIC LCD VF TC UB CLOCK OTHERS FILE MANAGE EXIT TOP MENU screen Camera mode Safety Zone Indication Camera mode only The indication of the following safety zone and center mark indications can be turned ON OFF with the SAFETY ZONE item and CEN TER MARK item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen 0 See page 89 In addition the safety zone display is on or off d
43. F is the ideal temperature range for charging If the environment is too cold charging may not complete PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Turning the Power ON Turning the Power ON 1 Set the POWER switch to ON This device turns on in Camera mode m The operation differs according to whether this device is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode The mode switches each time you press the CAM VTR button When the mode is switched the VTR indicator displays the following statuses While the mode is being switched Flashing In VTR mode Lit In Camera mode Off _ 2 HOE C um 1 mm CHT BOTH nr T T oF WONITOR SELECT pista vrr FULCAUTO VTR indicator CAMI VTR button POWER switch Camera mode The GY HD250 GY HD251 enters the Camera mode The camera image is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor When a recordable videocassette is loaded the GY HD250 GY HD251 enters the record standby mode automatically STBY is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication area of the LCD monitor and or in the viewfinder In this condition press the REC VTR trigger button to start recording Playback is also possible in the Camera mode Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP button is pressed to set the VTR operation mod
44. FULL AUTO switch on page 19 itor or in the viewfinder STATUS 1 screen SEARCH AUDIO DV Selects whether to output audio when searching a tape recorded in DV format This also includes slow playback OFF F number and iris level mark is not displayed ON Audio is output F NO F number is displayed OFF Audio is not output F NO IND F number and iris level mark is displayed PB AUDIO CH DV Selects which channel audio to output when playing back a DV tape with the audio signal recorded in 4 channels FILTER Selects whether or not the FILTER position of this device is displayed in the status display on the LCD monitor or in Can only be set in VTR mode the viewfinder STATUS 1 screen CH1 2 Outputs the CH 1 and CH 2 channel audio OFF FILTER position is not displayed GY HD250 GY HD251 records the audio in CH 1 and CH 2 while shooting ON FILTER position is displayed MIX Outputs all 4 channels of audio at the same time SAFETY ZONE Selects whether or not the safety zone is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder together with the form of CH3 4 Outputs the CH 3 and CH 4 channel audio the safety zone indication MEMO OFF Not displayed GY HD250 GY HD251 does not have a function for dubbing to the CH 3 and CH 4 channels 43 4 3 zone is displayed 14 9 14 9 zone is displayed PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen 16 9 16 9 zone ls displayed f
45. If this device has been cooled down in a cold place and is then carried to a warm place the moisture contained in the warm air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides and be cooled into water droplets This phenomenon is referred to as condensation dew When this occurs the head drum and tape guides are covered with droplets allowing the tape to be stuck to them leading to tape dam age Condensation occurs in the following cases e When this device is suddenly moved from a cold place to a ja drum warm place e When a room heater has just COS started or when this device is exposed directly to cold air from z an air conditioner When this device is placed in a very humid place Video tape Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the camera under conditions where the temperature environ ment changes After moving this device do not use until the internal parts have stabilized CONDENSATION ON DRUM is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs in this device WARNING 0201 CONDENSATION ON DRUM Keep the power on until the warning message disappears If the power is turned off while the warning message is dis played condensation may remain in the device even if the warning message is not displayed Wait until this device is completely dry before using Pay attention to condensation even before the condensa tion indication appears As conde
46. LOAD FILE Flashing OR SD_CARD NO FORMAT PUSH JOG BUTTON Error display Error If there is an error Press the STATUS button Return to the normal screen Press the SHUTTER dial gt Return to the FILE MAN AGE menu screen To exit the FILE MANAGE screen Move the cursor P to PAGE BACK and press the SHUT TER dial or press the STATUS button 96 Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen Select the FILE MANAGE item on the TOP MENU screen Loading a menu settings file Select the LOAD FILE item on the FILE MANAGE menu screen FILE MANAGE DLOAD FILE STORE FILE RESET FILE FORMAT SD CARD CANCEL PAGE BACK FILE MANAGE menu screen LOAD FILE gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE LOAD CANCEL PAGE BACK 41 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to SELECT and press the SHUTTER dial The file name setting area flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the file to load and press the SHUTTER dial 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the LOAD item and press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE flashes 4 With EXECUTE selected press the SHUTTER dial to read the menu settings in the selected file If the current menu settings and the menu settings to be loaded have different video format settings REBOOT is displayed for 3 seconds this device turns off automati cally and then turns on REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE Reboot display
47. Outputting Audio Setting Confirm that this device is in the VTR mode VTR indicator On de SOS pE C O 1 W an e MONITOR VTR indicator SELECT switch SHUTTER dial STATUS button CAM VTR button AUDIO menu screen AUDIO TEST TONE ON AUDIO REF LEVEL 20dB AUDIO MONITOR MIX SEARCH AUDIO DV ON DPB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK m Earphone terminal output audio Audio output is as shown in the table below depending on the MONITOR SELECT switch and AUDIO MONITOR and PB AUDIO CH DV settings on the AUDIO menu screen 1 Display the AUDIO menu screen Select the AUDIO item on the TOP MENU screen 2 Set the AUDIO menu screen PB AUDIO CH DV Items CH1 2 To reproduce the sound CH 1 CH 2 recorded during shooting MIX To reproduce the sound recorded during shooting CH 1 CH 2 and the after recorded sound on CH 3 and CH 4 simultaneously CH3 4 To reproduce the sound after recorded on CH 3 and CH 4 AUDIO OUT connector PB AUDIO CH DV CH 1 CH 2 CH1 2 CH1 CH2 MIX CH1 CH3 CH2 CH4 CH3 4 CH3 CH4 For HDV format audio is output to CH1 and CH2 no matter the settings 3 Either of the following operations returns you to the nor mal screen Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen select the EXIT item and press the SHUTTER dial MEMO The DV format is cap
48. PEAKING Contour adjustment To adjust the contours of the LCD monitor and viewfinder image When the Focus Assist function is running this control does not operate us See page 50 FOCUS ASSIST Focus assist button When you press this button during shooting the area of focus is displayed in blue red or green making it easy to focus accurately MEMO When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen is set to ACCU FOCUS and this button is pressed ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST This makes depth of field shallower making it easier to focus This button has the same function as the FOCUS ASSIST button in the Top Section ts See LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen on page 89 14 Clamp Attach the cable from the viewfinder here USER1 2 3 User buttons You can assign camera functions to the USER1 3 but tons Use them to switch shooting conditions depending upon the subject Set them using the USER1 3 items in the SWITCH MODE menu screen ts See page 86 Use this button to preset the time code us See page 46 MEMO The USER buttons work together with the menu settings When a menu screen is being displayed they also func tion as menu operation buttons 1 See Setting Menu Screens on page 75 O SHUTTER Shutter Menu dial Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal screen mode when the menu screen is not displayed the shutter speed switches between on off When th
49. WHITE BALANCE IDWHITE PAINT lt R gt NORMAL WHITE PAINT lt B gt NORMAL SHADING PRESET LEVEL R LEVEL G LEVEL B PAGE BACK SKIN COLOR ADJUST IbskIN COLOR DET STOP SKIN COLOR RANGE NORMAL PAGE BACK LOD VF 3 4 VIDEO FORMAT ON TAPE REMAIN ON Torus OFF AUDIO OFF BATTERY INFO VOLTAGE SHUTTER DISP SEC NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK LODIVF 4 PL oo ve OFF LCD CONTRAST NORMAL VF CONTRAST NORMAL BLACKAWHI TE COLOR VF SIGNAL RGB PAGE BACK OTHERS 1 PANALOG OUT CHAR SDI OUT CHAR LONG PAUSE TIME ALARM VR LEVEL FRONT TALLY Er O Cali ScEnE FORMAT LED PseLect CAMI SCENE GenLock LOAD EXECUTE E PAGE BACK NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK 2 STORE FILE SELECT CAMI SCENE EDIT SUB NAME SCENE STORE OVER WRITE PAGE BACK FORMAT SD CARD PAGE BACK gt SELECT RESET EXECUTE PAGE BACK CANCEL GENLOCK PSD H PHASE HD H PHASE SC COARCE SC FINE PAGE BACK OTHERS 2 2 L gt i394 REC TRIG OFF BACK SPACE HDV P 1394 DR HD100 A OFF OFF MENU ALL RESET CANCEL PAGE BACK DRUM HOUR 000000H FAN HOUR 000000H HEADER REC START KEY DISABLE TC DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE BARS TIME 30SEC BLACK TIME 30SEC PAGE BACK CLOCK ADJUST Le poaTe wM O0 Y 06 06 06 TIME 09 33 PAGE BACK 73 MENU SCREENS Menu Screen Configuration
50. ZOOM x FOCUS lt X HI RESO OFF ON X MASTER BLACK LEVEL lt O GAMMA OFF ON X GAMMA MASTER LEVEL X KNEE MASTER LEVEL X TITLE OFF ON X TITLE POSITION X TITLE CLEAR x H PHASE O SC COARSE 0 90 180 270 lt 72 1 Only when frame rate is 60p 60i 30p or 24p 3 Only when frame rate is 50p 50i or 25p SC FINE O RANDOM SHUTTER X VARIABLE SHUTTER LEVEL l x SLOW SHUTTER LEVEL l x Same as RM LP55 O Available None X Not available MENU SCREENS Menu Screen Configura tion The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below The menu screen to be set is selected from the TOP MENU in accordance with the function or purpose The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode The contents of set items are stored in the GY HD250 GY HD251 s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents on the GY HD250 GY HD251 or SD memory card m Camera Mode VIDEO FORMAT FRAME RATE 10801 CAMERA PREC ASPECT HDV PB OUTPUT DOWN CON HDV NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK LETTER VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 PPs TAPE AUTO HD SD SDI OUT OFF OUTPUT TERM DV Y Pb Pi 0 0 SET UP PAGE BACK V FREQUENCY SKIN DETECT LEVEL NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK SWITCH MO SHUTTER FAW GAIN L GAIN M GAIN H USER1 US
51. and then press the SHUT TER dial ts See HEADER REC Menu Screen on page 91 TIME DATE To make settings related to the date and time align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial ts See TIME DATE Menu Screen on page 92 PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 1 This can be displayed and selected when 60 30 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen When 24 is set this is fixed at NON DROP and NON DROP is displayed 2 This can be displayed and selected when 50 25 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen 90 HEADER REC Menu Screen The HEADER REC menu screen is used for settings related to the HEADER REC function 1 See page 59 Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings START KEY Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed DISABLE HEADER REC operation is not executed STOP REC HEADER REC operation is executed TC DATA Sets the time code value for the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER REC EXECUTE Confirms the set time code ZERO PRESET Resets all time codes to 0 CANCEL Clears the set time code The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC UB
52. e g offices or theatres urban outdoors In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electro magnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding the following length Camera DC IN Exclusive Cable VIDEO Coaxial Cable Y PB PR Coaxial Cable WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE This unit should be used with 12V DC only CAUTION To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards do NOT use any other power source NOTE The rating plate serial number plate is on the bottom of the unit CAUTION To prevent electric shock do not open the cabinet No user ser viceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service person nel Due to design modifications data given in this instruction book are subject to possible change without prior notice The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed close to the apparatus Worded CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type AUDIO INPUT1 Shielded Cable INPUT2 AUDIO OUT CH1 Shielded Cable CH2 Phones1 2 Exclusive Cable IEEE1394 HDV DV Exclusive Cable GENLOCK AUX IN Coaxial Cable HD SD SDI Coaxial Cable REMOTE Exclusive Cable STUDIO Exclusive Cable 1m Ca
53. f a 16 9 4 3 16 9 zone and 4 3 zone are display mixed This cannot be selected when DV format is set 2 35 1 CE Displays 2 35 1 zone in the middle of the screen Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode 2 35 1 CH Displays 2 35 1 zone at the top of the screen Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode CENTER MARK Sets whether or not a center mark is displayed when the safety zone is displayed ON Center mark is displayed OFF Center mark is not displayed MEMO When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected FOCUS ASSIST Sets the FOCUS ASSIST function Press the FOCUS ASSIST button on page 14 or page 18 to operate the FOCUS ASSIST function NORMAL Only the FOCUS ASSIST function operates The focus area becomes blue red or green making it easier to focus ACCU FOCUS The FOCUS ASSIST function and ACCU FOCUS forced focus function operates This makes the depth of field shallower making it easier to focus ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approximately 10 seconds COLOR Sets the display color for focusing when running the FOCUS ASSIST function BLUE Displays the area of focus in blue RED Displays the area of focus in red GREEN Displays the area of focus in green LEVEL Sets the display range of the focal area when the FOCUS ASSIST function is in use LOW Displays the focal area narrower than MIDDLE MIDDLE Displays the focal area in normal setting
54. mea AUDIO DTEST TONE OFF 2048 AUDIO MONITOR MIX SEARCH AUDIO DV ON PB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK FORMATS TTT LODFVF 1 2 LOD VF 2 2 VIDEO FORMAT vioza roaMaT ON ia 22 top ve TAPE REMAIN ON LCD CONTRAST NORMAL Te UB CLOCK Telus ON VE CONTRAST NORMAL OTHERS AUDIA ON PAGE BACK PLE MANAGE BATTERY INFO VOLTAGE SHUTTER DISP SEC SET NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK TOP MENU screen VTR Te TUB CLOCK 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRN DROP Te DUPLI OFF Seta ce HEADER REG DISPLAY MODE DATE DISPLAY STYLE DATE STYLE TIME STYLE s sec Display TIME SHIFT GFF Te ouPLI ore Lock ADJUST eae STERE ITE OTHERS 2 2 ANALOG OUT CHAR ON LONG PAUSE TIME 3MIN MENU ALL RESET CANCEL PAGE BACK ALARM VR LEVEL HIGH FRONT TALLY BLINK BACK TALLY BLINK FORMAT LED ON NEXT PAGE DRUM HOUR PAGE BACK FAN HOUR FILE MANAGE LOAD FILE LOAD FILE lt PSeLecT CAMI SCENE gt STORE FILE LOAD EXECUTE RESET FILE PAGE BACK FORMAT SD CARD CANCEL RAGE ARR STORE FILE DSELECT CAMI SCENE EDIT SUB NAME SCENE STORE OVERWRITE PAGE BACK RESET FILE DSELECT CAMI SCENE RESET EXECUTE PAGE BACK IbSTART KEY TC DATA UB DATA BARS TI BLACK TIME PAGE BACK CLOCK AD gt DATE MM DD YY TIME PAGE BACK REC D
55. the Y PB PR OUT and VIDEO OUT terminals Status Screens Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed to show one of the status screens STATUS button 22 The contents of the status display are divided into those for the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera mode one of 5 status screens is displayed STATUS 0 1 2 3 4 One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode CAMERA MODE display example HDV HD30P fJ00 00 00 00 20min SKIN AREA SKIN AREA FAS FAS si 6B FAY FAW I 80 Fob a sTBY 01 02 03 01 23 45 STBY STATUS 0 STATUS 1 FILE CAMI SCENE FULL AUTO ON GAIN 9dB L 0M 6H 9 SHUTTER 1 1000 WHT BAL A 3200K AE LEVEL NORMAL FILTER OFF ZEBRA 70 80 REMAIN 60min AUDIO 32k CH1MI CH2 Stay Uan IENE E STBY 01 02 03 MO1 23 45 STATUS 4 STATUS 2 VTR MODE display example B COMPRESS HDV HD30P Jo0 0 PRESET TEMP 01 02 03 MO1 23 45 STATUS 3 STATUS MEMO When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or longer the menu setting screen is displayed To display the Status screen while the menu setting screen is displayed press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2 seconds When the LCD VF item on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen is set to
56. 000 64 HDV DV Dubbing 2 22 240822 se setae Siat ARA 65 Backup Recording 0 000 0 e eee 67 Connect a Remote Control Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 68 MENU SCREENS Menu Screen Configuration 2 005 Setting Menu Screens 0 000000 e eee TOP MENU Screen ii cscs sce inate bea Seen VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 Menu Screen VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 Menu Screen CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 Menu Screen CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 Menu Screen ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen 81 SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen 81 WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen 7 gt 82 SWITCH MODE Menu Screen 0 0005 83 AUDIO MIC 1 2 Menu Screen 02 2 04 84 AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen 02 05 85 LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen 000 0005 86 LCD VF 2 4 Menu Screen 000 0005 87 LCD VF 3 4 Menu Screen 0222 0008 88 LCD VF 4 4 Menu Screen 0022 0008 89 TC UB CLOCK Menu Screen siiri ra erein iea 90 HEADER REC Menu Screen 0 00005 91 TIME DATE Menu Screen 00 00000 e eee 92 OTHERS 1 2 Menu Screen 0005 93 OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen 0005 94 FILE MANAGE Menu Screen 0005 Displaying the FILE MANAGE menu screen f Loading a menu settings fille
57. 1 48 When H PHASE adjustment is performed with the remote control unit only H PHASE of SD signal operates When adjusting H PHASE of SD signal with the remote control unit it cannot be set outside the range of SD H PHASE in the GENLOCK menu screen ts See page 99 AUTO WHITE Function When the device is in VTR mode or during playback or HEADER REC the AUTO WHITE function does not work even if the auto white operation is performed with the RM LP55 and RM LP57 In the case of the RM LP55 LOW LIGHT ERROR is dis played on the LCD screen of the RM LP55 71 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Connect a Remote Control Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 Cont d Remote Control Unit Functions List Function E RM LP55 RM LP57 Arion BARS OFF ON lt CONTOUR OFF ON lt 0 CONTOUR V H LEVEL lt 0 IRIS MANU AUTO 0 IRIS LEVEL 0 IRIS DETECT X WHT BAL AUTO1 0 AUTO2 lt 0 FAW lt 0 PRESET O MANU AUTO WHITE lt 0 MANUAL WHITE BALANCE R B o LEVEL PAINT R B LEVEL lt GAIN 0dB lt 6dB lt 9dB lt 12dB lt LOLUX x 3dB x 6dB x ALC EEI ALC m x NEGA OFF ON X SHUTTER NORMAL lt 1 100 ON 1 120 lt O 1 250 O 1 500 O 1 1000 lt 0 1 2000 lt 0 1 4000 0 1 10000 O EEI lt X V SCAN x
58. 1 kHz sine wave recorded in the color bar section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the TEST TONE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen The time code preset on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording is performed The user s bits following completion of HEADER REC recording will be the user s bits value set on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The running of the time code following completion of HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the setting of the TC GENE switch FREE RUN Continuous running REC RUN or REGEN Runs only during REC Camera images are not output to the LCD monitor view finder or video output during REW mode when the HEADER REC operation begins PLAYBACK MODE Playback Procedure Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor or on the monitor connected to the video output connector STOP button PLAY STILL button REW button FF button MEMO This device can play back the following two types of video cassettes MiniDV videocassette DVCAM videocassette Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Set this device to the VTR mode Press the CAM VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator Playback is also possible in the Camera mode Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indi cator to indicate STO
59. 25p 0 85 to 359 4 White balance value was changed Example WHITE BAL A 3200K Numeric value Any of 2300 2500 2800 3000 3200 3400 3700 4300 5200 5600 6500 8000 FILTER value was changed FILTER OFF FILTER ND 1 1 4ND FILTER ND 2 1 16ND AE LEVEL value was changed f AE LEVEL 3 2 1 NORMAL 1 2 3 BLACK gain value was changed 2 BLACK NORMAL BLACK STRETCH 1 2 3 4 5 BLACK COMPRESS 1 2 3 4 5 PRESET TEMP value was changed 2 3 WHITE BAL PRST 3200K WHITE BAL PRST 5600K HEADER REC is running HEADER REC FOCUS ASSIST was turned ON OFF FOCUS ASSIST ON FOCUS ASSIST OFF Time code was set to zero reset TC ZERO PRESET t See page 45 REC LOCK switch was turned ON OFF REC SWITCH LOCKED REC SWITCH UNLOCKED 1 See page 18 REC LOCK switch A REC command was sent from the IEEE1394 connector TRIGGER TO HDV TRIGGER TO DV 23 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder Cont d Setting Status Contents of Indications mode FF REW button was pressed in CAMERA SWITCH TO VTR MODE menu REC VTR trigger button was pressed when 10801 REC INVALID 10801 CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 screen was set to ON Other ESN Displays ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on pages 96 98 ts See Warnings and Responses on page 102 The range
60. 3 SQUEEZE Image that is squeezed horizontally is displayed LETTER Wide image with the top and bottom blackened is displayed MEMO This setting is only valid in HDV mode In DV mode the style becomes SQUEEZE regardless of the setting of this item NEXT PAGE To display the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position 75 MENU SCREENS VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 Menu Screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings PB TAPE Selects whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format Normally use the AUTO setting AUTO During tape playback the format signal is switched automatically and played back DV During tape playback only the part of the tape recorded in DV format is played back HDV During tape playback only the part of the tape recorded in HDV format is played back DVCAM During tape playback only the part of the tape recorded in DVCAM format is played back MEMO If you play back a tape containing both DV and HDV formats the video signal is disturbed when the signal is switched SET UP Selects whether to add a setup signal to the composite signal from the VIDEO OUT terminal In DV format a setup signa
61. 56 Selecting the CH 2 channel input connector 56 Selecting the audio signal input 56 Adjusting Audio during Recording 56 Monitoring Audio during Recording 57 SHOOTING OPERATION Basic Recording Operation 0 00 58 If the Record Standby Mode Continues 59 Checking Recorded Contents in Record Standby Mode Recording Check Function 59 HEADER REC Function 0 000000 60 PLAYBACK MODE Playback Procedure 0 0 c cee eee eee 62 Fast Forward Rewind 0 000 cee eeuee 62 OAM v 88 2 Pain Seine SEARS TE OH Malan ant ecole ei a ah 62 QUTPUttINGAUGIO 2 02 sc 22 cred e Slee sian Satire ersten 63 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Connecting the Video Signal Cables 64 Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable 64 Recording Composite Video Signals from an Extemal Device a a eaa oE 65 Using GENLOCK Functions 00 66 Dubbing with AV Devices A A 67 ADV DV Dubbing ere etek Lc ees bite 68 Backup Recording 0 000 eee eee 70 Connect a Remote Control Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 71 MENU SCREENS Menu Screen Configuration 0 00 Setting Menu Screens osre easa redia eaea TOP MENU Screen a ae henaa a VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 Menu Screen VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 Menu Screen CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen
62. 97 frames but per time code 30 frames are processed To compensate for this differ ence the mode called drop mode drops frame 00 and 01 for every minute not divisible by 10 The non drop frame mode is when no frames are dropped and the actual time shift neglected m TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 50 25 Whether or not user s bit data should be recorded can be selected with the UB REC item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 50 25 TC UB CLOCK TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 EXECUTE TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK Presetting time code data The time code and user s bit data are preset on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen 1 Display the TC UB CLOCK menu screen Select the TC UB CLOCK item on the TOP MENU screen TC UB CLOCK TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK Time code hour min sec frame 2 Set the time code hours minutes seconds frames Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with TC PRESET and then press the SHUTTER dial The first digit of the time code blinks The blinking digit is the one to be set When the SHUTTER dial is pressed the blinking digit changes When the SHUTTER dial is rotated the value of the blinking digit c
63. AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen is set to STEREO only the audio of CH 1 is output from the monitoring speaker The volume of the alarm tone is set with the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen OFF LOW MIDDLE HIGH SHOOTING OPERATION Basic Recording Opera tion 1 Set the POWER switch to ON e This device turns on in camera mode 2 Start recording Press the REC VTR trigger button on this device to start recording Once recording has started the FRONT TALLY lamp and BACK TALLY lamp light red FOCUS ASSIST button FRONT TALLY lamp REC trigger button POWER switch REC trigger button FOCUS ASSIST BACK TALLY lamp RET button VTR trigger button MEMO The way the FRONT TALLY and the BACK TALLY lamps flash differ depending on what you set in the FRONT TALLY and BACK TALLY items on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen t See page 93 CAUTION This device enters the stop mode automatically at TAPE END If this mode continues for 3 minutes the mode switches to the tape protect mode ts See OTHERS 1 2 Menu Screen on page 93 LONG PAUSE TIME item If the REC VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly and repeatedly or the POWER switch is moved immedi ately after the trigger button is pressed this device may not enter the record mode To remedy this condition set the POWER switch to OFF and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power on again
64. AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio selector switch Selects the method of adjusting the CH 1 and CH 2 audio channel audio levels AUTO The audio level is automatically adjusted according to the input level When excessive audio is input the limiter works to suppress the audio level The AUTO LED in the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO LEVEL area on page 15 lights MANU Allows you to adjust the audio levels using the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO LEVEL volume con trols on page 15 Set AUDIO LIMITER on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen to use limiter functions when excessive audio is input ts See AUDIO LIMITER on page 84 ITC DISPLAY TC UB display switch Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder This switch works when the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen is set to ON TC _ Set to this position to display time code values UB _ Set to this position to display the user s bits values O TC GENE Time code generator setting switch Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode or regeneration mode It is also used to select the time code run mode when the preset mode is selected FREE The preset mode is selected and the time code run mode becomes the FREE run mode Set to this position to record with the time code or user s bits set anew preset In this setting the time code always operates in the run mode If this setting is used when recording sc
65. BATTERY INFO on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen 0 See page 88 Anton Bauer battery Voltage remaining capacity remaining time IDX Endura battery Voltage remaining capacity 25 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor FILE CAM1 SCENE USER1 B COMPRESS i A FULL AUTO ON USER2 PRESET TEMP and in the Viewfinder Cont d GAIN Sd B Lr0 Mie H 8 USERS NONE SHUTTER 1 1000 LENS RET FOCUS ASSIST WHT BAL A 3200K AE LEVEL NORMAL FILTER OFF ZEBRA 70 80 No Item Contents REMAIN 60min Audio sampling frequency in 32K Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen is set to 32 K Audio AUDIO 32k CH1M CH2M dication is recorded with 12 bit 32 kHz sampling A STBY 01 02 03 M01 23 45 STBY 01 02 03 M01 23 45 48 K Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen is set to 48 K Audio A SIS 53S is recorded with 16 bit 48 kHz sampling When HDV format is set 48K is displayed TATUS 2 Sareen ATUS 3 Sorsan t See page 84 STATUS 2 Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu This screen displays the camera setup statuses Audio level meter indication Displays the CH 1 CH 2 audio level meters Event display is not available while this screen is displayed Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu Indication Ind
66. CAUTION This device cannot load scene files from GY HD100 GY HD110 series devices Saving settings Select the STORE FILE item on the FILE MANAGE menu screen 1 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to SELECT and press the SHUTTER dial The file name setting area flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the file to save to and press the SHUTTER dial STORE FILE gt SELECT CAMI SCENE f EDIT SUB NAME SCENE STORE OVERWRITE PAGE BACK m Setting a SUB NAME If you do not want to set a SUB NAME go to Step 5 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to SUB NAME and press the SHUTTER dial The first character in the file name flashes STORE FILE SELECT CAM1 SCENE EDIT gt SUB NAME SCENE STORE OVERWRITE PAGE BACK Settable Characters ABCDEFGHI 123456789 MNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Space 4 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the character and press the SHUTTER dial The second character in the file name flashes Repeat Step 4 up through the eighth character 5 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the STORE item and press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE if the file already exists OVERWRITE flashes STORE FILE SELECT CAM1 SCENE EDIT SUB NAME SCENE PSTORE OVERWRITE PAGE BACK 6 With EXECUTE selected turn the SHUTTER dial to save the menu settings to the selected file STORE FILE 2 2 STORE FILE E
67. CLOCK menu screen The time code value at the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the val ue set for this item UB DATA Sets the user s bits of the HEADER REC section EXECUTE Confirms the set user s bits ZERO PRESET Resets all user s bits data to 0 CANCEL Clears the set user s bits MEMO The user s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen When the UB REC item is set to OF is displayed and this cannot be selected BARS TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the color bar signal and test tone 1 kHz is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Settings OSEC 30SEC 99SEC BLACK TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Settings OSEC 30SEC 99SEC PAGE BACK The TC UB CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed 91 MENU SCREENS TIME DATE Menu Screen Item DISPLAY Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Sets whether the date and time are shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder OFF Not displayed ON Displayed When a tape with time and date not recorded is played back there will be no display of time and date even when this item is set to ON DISPLAY MODE In the Camera mode the date and time are displayed in accordance with the following settings The date an
68. Decrease the number Increases bluishness of red color and greenishness of cyan color Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 G GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the G axis of the color matrix green and magenta Increase the number Enhances green and magenta Decrease the number Reduces green and magenta Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 G ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the G axis of the color matrix green and magenta Increase the number Increases bluishness of green color and reddishness of magenta color Decrease the number Increases yellowishness of green color and bluishness of magenta color Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 B GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the B axis of the color matrix blue and yellow Increase the number Enhances blue and yellow Decrease the number Reduces blue and yellow Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 B ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the B axis of the color matrix blue and yellow Increase the number Increases reddishness of blue color and greenishness of yellow color Decrease the number Increases greenishness of blue color and reddishness of yellow color Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen Item WHITE PAINT lt R gt Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Adjusts the R red co
69. EEATT AN RNa Miele eet he Mente 13 Right Side Section 0 00000 cece eee 14 Left Side Sectlon a arr rada kae EEN p KEAR 16 TOP SOGE rrera inara Ae tae EEE N i 18 Recording and Image Output Formats 20 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder 22 Status Screens ce ee eee ae 22 Status Screens in the Camera Mode 23 Status Screen in VTR MODE 28 Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor 29 Auto White Balance Indication Camera mode only 0022 0008 30 Menu Setting Screen 0 00005 30 Alarm Message Display 000 30 Safety Zone Indication Camera mode only 30 Switching between the LCD Screen and Viewfinder DISPLAY 526 5 i0cyencts estsPeten cy hope cathe oh ciey eb esas 31 PREPARATIONS Basic SYStOM 5 2s teach HERES on he ES Ade ele Baye 32 Attaching the Zoom Lens 002200 33 Attaching the Microphone Provided 33 How to Attach the Viewfinder 33 Inserting an SD Memory Card 22 05 34 Inserting an SD Memory Card 0 34 Taking out the SD memory card 34 About SD Memory Cards 000 34 4 Attaching the Tripod Base Optional 35 AC Operation Charging the Built in Battery Battery Operations occa kee tds whee ao wee Attaching the Battery
70. Each time you press this button the mode switches between camera mode and VTR mode When you do this the VTR indicator on page 19 dis plays the following statuses While the mode is being switched Flashing In VTR mode Lit In camera mode Off Select the Camera mode to record the camera image Select the VTR mode to playback VTR or to input the HDV DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector on page 16 When the power is turned on the mode becomes the Camera mode 13 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Right Side Section Monitoring speaker Cheek pad In the Camera mode the input sound can be EE moni tored In the VTR mode the speaker outputs the VTR play back sound In the VTR mode the HDV DV input sound can be EE monitored The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR SELECT switch on page 19 The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound level volume This speaker also outputs various warning sounds superimposed on other sound ts See Alarm Sound on page 109 Cheek pad set screw Screw for adjusting the height of the cheek pad MONITOR Audio monitor volume control Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and ear phone OJVF BRIGHT Viewfinder brightness adjustment To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder us See page 50
71. FOCUS enhancements is connected its operation status is displayed 24 ation 0 DR HD100 is connected displays white 29 Recording with DR HD100 displays red For details refer to the DR HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL AUX display Displays when in external image input mode AUX IN mode HDV HD30P External Image Input Mode AUX IN __ P00 00 00 00 DV 601 AUX Boo 00 00 o0 20ming 20min FAS 3qB FAW STATUS 1 Screen STATUS 1 ition to the information on the STATUS 0 screen this screen displays the following items In add Item ie 45 STBY oto l 8D B 3K H 12 27 7 0 STATUS 1 Screen Contents VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the currently selected video format Allows you to select the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen t See page 77 You can switch this display ON OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen ts See page 91 Time Code TC User s Bits UB indication Indicates the time code h m s frame or user s bits data Example Time code TC 00 00 00 00 Colon when non drop frame mode Dot when drop frame mode User s bits UB FF EE DD 20 Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen ts See page 91 Whether the time code or user s bits should be shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the LCD d
72. GY HD251 s power switch to OFF before the zoom lens is attached or detached Attaching the Microphone Provided Connect the provided microphone to the microphone holder Provided microphone is a phantom microphone 1 Turn the knob on the microphone holder anticlockwise to loosen it and open the microphone holder 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Place the microphone toward the front to prevent it from interfering with the cassette cover 3 Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to secure the microphone 4 Connect the microphone cable to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 input connector on the GY HD250 GY HD251 5 Attach the microphone cable to the clamp 6 Make sure to perform the correct setting for use of a phantom microphone us See page 56 2 Microphone Microphone holder 5 Clamp How to Attach the View finder 1 To attach the viewfinder slide it in the direction of the arrow 2 Set the viewfinder to a comfortable position and then turn the slide mounting ring and mount m To take off the viewfinder pull the knob in the direction of the arrow as you slide the viewfinder Knob Taking off the viewfinder 33 PREPARATIONS About the Viewfinder Cable Attach the viewfinder cable to the clamp on page 14 To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided core filter as shown in the figure below Attach the core filter black a
73. HD50 is used set the Backup Recording function to OFF Also set REM SEL HDV DV in the REMOTE 1 2 menu of the BR HD50 to ON or LOC REM Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PAUSE status CAUTION Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV or DV Start recording after making sure that both devices are properly connected If the RET button is pressed during backup recording output from the IEEE1394 terminal is stopped the image is switched to the image recorded on this device inter rupting the backup recording image Operation Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in accordance with the operation of the REC VTR trigger button on the master unit Depending on the GY HD250 GY HD251 or the backup unit the image audio and or time code may deviate from what they should be at the points where the recording is started or stopped MEMO When the backup recording is started the TRIGGER TO DV or TRIGGER TO HDV indication is shown on the LCD or in the viewfinder for approx 3 seconds When the Series Recording function of BR HD50 is used the GY HD250 GY HD251 s 1394 REC TRIG item should be set to OFF If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record time codes input from the IEEE1394 connector TC DUPLICATE feature time code data the same as on the master side can be recorded If the master unit tape is paused or stopped when the master unit time code
74. INPUT2 AUDIO OUT CH1 Shielded Cable CH2 Length 2m 3m Phones1 2 Exclusive Cable IEEE1394 HDV DV Exclusive Cable REMOTE Exclusive Cable Caution Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or mag netism for example near a radio or TV transmitter transformer motor etc the picture and the sound may be disturbed In such case please keep the apparatus away from the sources of the dis turbance Dear Customer This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European direc tives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety European representative of Victor Company of Japan Limited is JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH P O Box 10 05 52 61145 Friedberg Germany II WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE This unit should be used with 12V DC only CAUTION To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards do NOT use any other power source NOT The rating plate serial number plate is on the bottom of the unit CAUTION To prevent electric shock do not open the cabinet No user ser viceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service person nel Due to design modifications data given in this instruction book are subject to possible change without prior notice The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no
75. MIC 48 50dB Sets the reference audio input level at 50 dB 60dB Sets the reference audio input level at 60 dB AUDIO MODE Selects the audio sampling frequency for recording Both CH 1 and CH 2 When HDV format is set this is fixed at 48K and 48K is displayed 32K Digitally records with a 12 bit 32 kHz sampling frequency 48K Digitally records with a 16 bit 48 kHz sampling frequency If the DV format is 12 bit 32 kHz up to 4 recording track channels are available Of those GY HD250 GY HD251 records on the CH 1 and CH 2 channels GY HD250 GY HD251 is not capable of dubbing AUDIO LIMITER Sets whether or not AUDIO LIMITER functions when the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 is set to MANU OFF AUDIO LIMITER is turned off ON AUDIO LIMITER is turned on Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input NEXT PAGE To display the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 87 MENU SCREENS AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen Screen In VTR mode the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen The LCD VF menu screen consists of four screens 1 4 screen 2 4 screen 3 4 screen 4 4 screen The LCD VF 1 4 menu screen can
76. NORMAL WHITE PAINT lt B gt NORMAL DSHADING PRESET LEVEL RBS o LEVEL G00 Pore REVEL Bie a manim PAGE BACK 52 Setting in the WHITE BALANCE screen is performed as fol lows m Selecting an item Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor p gt with the desired item and press the SHUTTER dial The item is selected and the setting value blinks m Changing the setting value Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking value When the SHUTTER dial is pressed the value stops blinking and the setting is changed Perform the above steps to set SHADING to MANUAL Select LEVEL R LEVEL G LEVEL B and press the SHUTTER dial The setting value for the selected LEVEL blinks and becomes available for changing 4 Change the setting values for LEVEL R LEVEL G and LEVEL B with the SHUTTER dial while referring to the monitor When setting values are increased colors at the bottom of the screen are suppressed and the top is enhanced LEVEL R Adjusts reds LEVEL G Adjusts greens LEVEL B Adjusts blues lt Range 128 to 127 gt Press the SHUTTER dial after changing the setting val ues to save in the memory Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen 8 When white shading adjustment is completed adjust white balance again ts See White Balance Adjustment on page 51 CAUTION If the lens setup is incorrect the white shading adjust ment might result in over compensation
77. OFF Status Screens in the Camera Mode o Ko SKIN STBY 01 02 03 M01 23 45 STATUS 0 Screen STATUS 0 Event Indication When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the change is made Set the shutter display method to seconds or angle in SHUTTER DISP on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen Only when frame rate is 24p or 25p mode Setting Status Contents of Indications Gain value was changed GAIN 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 18 dB Gain value reached the ALC GAIN ALC FULL AUTO was turned ON OFF FULL AUTO ON FULL AUTO OFF ZEBRA was turned ON OFF ZEBRA ON ZEBRA OFF Shutter speed value was changed J When SHUTTER DISP is set to SEC SHUTTER 1 6 1 6 25 1 7 5 1 12 1 12 5 1 15 1 24 1 25 1 30 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 10000 Variable shutter speed value was changed yi When SHUTTER DISP is set to SEC V SHUTTER 1 24 01 to 1 10489 5 Shutter was turned OFF SHUTTER OFF 1 Shutter speed value was changed When SHUTTER DISP is set to DEG SHUTTER 360 0 180 0 172 8 150 0 144 0 135 0 120 0 105 0 90 0 75 0 60 0 45 0 30 0 22 5 11 2 Variable shutter speed value was changed When SHUTTER DISP is set to DEG 24p 0 82 to 359 4
78. OFF with this device MEMO The mark is displayed at the upper right of the LCD monitor and viewfinder when the DR HD100 is con nected If this device is turned OFF before the mark is displayed power does not turn OFF even if this setting is ON e This setting is canceled and the DR HD100 does not turn OFF in the following instances 1394 REC TRIGGER item is set to OFF VTR mode is set When the DR HD100 power turns off and this device is turned ON again after 12 seconds DR HD100 power appears on the LCD monitor for 7 seconds MENU ALL RESET Selects whether to reset the menu screen settings to initial settings The camera mode and VTR mode menu settings are reset The TC PRESET UB PRESET and CLOCK ADJUST settings are not reset CANCEL The settings are not reset EXECUTE The settings are reset MEMO The cursor P does not move to this item when the VTR is activated If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different FRAME RATE settings REBOOT is dis played for 3 seconds this device automatically turns off and then turns on 98 PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen DRUM HOUR Displays the drum usage time Use as an estimate for regular maintenance The cursor P does not move to this item FAN HOUR Displays the fan motor usage time Use as an estimate for regular mainte
79. PAGE BACK The TOP MENU screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position 93 MENU SCREENS OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings 1394 REC TRIGGER Sets how to control the REC trigger command output from the IEEE1394 connector Can be displayed and set in camera mode Set this when recording a backup of the HDV DV signal from this device onto another device OFF Does not control the backup device SYNCRO Controls the backup device in conjunction with the recording start stop mode status on this device and if there is no videocassette or if no tape remains for recording controls the backup device in conjunction with the REC trigger button and the lens VTR button on this device SPLIT The REC trigger button on the right panel of this device controls the backup device recording start stop Set this when you want to control the timing of the recording on this device and the backup device sep arately SERIES Automatically starts recording on a backup device that is on Pause when the tape on this device has less than 3 minutes remaining during shooting MEMO If you use the backup recording function on the BR HD50 set this item to OFF The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording BACK SPACE HDV 94 This function control
80. REC or FREE REC The data preset in the time code generator runs only during recording Use this setting if it is necessary to record continual time codes across different scenes However approximately 1 frame varia tions may occur in scene accuracy FREE The time code starts to run from the time it is preset in the time code generator m Set the TCG SOURCE item in the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to INTERNAL TC UB CLOCK I gt TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK 44 m TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 60 30 Use the DROP FRAME item to select the framing mode for the time code generator DROP The time code generator s running method is set the drop frame mode Use this setting when placing emphasis on the recording time NON The time code generator s running method is DROP set to the non drop frame mode Use this setting when placing emphasis on the number of frames TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 60 30 TC UB CLOCK TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE Framing mode gt DROP_FRAME DROP Drop frame TC DUPLI OFF Non drop setting HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK MEMO Drop frame Non drop frame mode In the NTSC system the actual number of frames per 1 second is approximately 29
81. SD60P A tape recorded in HDV SD60P format was played back or This device cannot play back or input an HDV SD60P INVALID input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode HDV SD5OP signal HDV SD50P A tape recorded in HDV SD50P format was played back or INVALID input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode INVALID TAPE A computer data tape or a DVC PRO cassette was used Use a MiniDV videocassette LP TAPE INVALID Tried to play back a tape recorded in LP mode This device cannot record or play back in LP mode NO DV SIGNAL DV signal was not input Set the IEEE1394 switch to DV and input a DV signal NO HDV SIGNAL HDV signal was not input Set the IEEE1394 switch to HDV and input an HDV signal COPY INHIBIT Tried to record a copyguarded signal Cannot record a copyguarded signal REC INHIBIT A tape that cannot be recorded back switch is set to SAVE Set the switch on the back of the cassette tape to REC was inserted NO TAPE No videocassette tape is inserted Insert a cassette tape 102 Display Status Action CHANGE PB TAPE FORMAT Image format which is different from the one set in the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen is be ing played back Check the setting for the PB TAPE item 1 See page 76 LOW VOLTAGE Battery is low Charge the battery pack or replace it TAPE NEAR END There are less than 3 minutes remaining on the
82. See page 89 If the Record Standby Mode Contin ues Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from the record standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 min utes with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS 1 2 screen menu See page 96 When the record standby mode has continued for about 5 minutes or 3 minutes the GY HD250 GY HD251 automati cally stops drum rotation in order to protect the tape Tape protect mode In the tape protect mode STOP is shown as the VTR mode indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder screen STATUS 1 screen B00 00 00 00 20min on 8K STOP 01 02 03 MO1 23 45 VTR mode indication m To start recording from the tape protect mode press the REC VTR trigger button The drum starts rotating and recording starts after about 3 seconds m To return to the record standby mode from the tape protect mode press the RET button CAUTION This function does not work when using RET button is used as FOCUS ASSIST button Checking Recorded Contents in Record Standby Mode Recording Check Function This function is available only when the GY HD250 GY HD251 is in the standby mode In standby mode about 5 seconds of the last part of the con tent recorded in DV format can be played back and about 7 seconds when the content was recorded in HDV format can be played back The r
83. Set from the TC UB CLOCK menu screen Set in the LCD screen without opening the menu screen This section explains how to set from the TC UB CLOCK menu screen See page 46 for instructions of setting from the LCD screen Menu and switch settings to set the time code preset are the same as the settings below Setting To preset the Time Code make the following settings m TC GENE switch Set to REC or FREE REC The data preset in the time code generator runs only during recording Use this setting if it is necessary to record continual time codes across different scenes However approximately 1 frame varia tions may occur in scene accuracy FREE The time code starts to run from the time it is preset in the time code generator 44 m TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 60 30 Use the DROP FRAME item to select the framing mode for the time code generator DROP The time code generator s running method is set the drop frame mode Use this setting when placing emphasis on the recording time NON The time code generator s running method is DROP set to the non drop frame mode Use this setting when placing emphasis on the number of frames TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 60 30 TC UB CLOCK TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE Framing mode DROP FRAME DROP gt Drop framel TC DUPLI OFF Non drop setting HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK MEMO Drop
84. Set the IEEE1394 switch to HDV and input an HDV signal COPY INHIBIT Tried to record a copyguarded signal Cannot record a copyguarded signal REC INHIBIT A tape that cannot be recorded back switch is set to SAVE Set the switch on the back of the cassette tape to REC was inserted NO TAPE No videocassette tape is inserted Insert a cassette tape 106 Display Status Action CHANGE PB TAPE Image format which is different from the one set in the PB Check the setting for the PB TAPE item FORMAT TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen is be 1 See page 79 ing played back LOW VOLTAGE Battery is low Charge the battery pack or replace it TAPE NEAR END There are less than 3 minutes remaining on the tape flash es only when recording To continue shooting find a new tape or replace the tape TAPE END Displayed when the tape ends Replace the tape CHANGE 1394 Recording or playback video format and the IEEE1394 set Set the IEEE1394 switch correctly turn the power off and SWITCH ting is different when connected to the IEEE1394 port then on again SWITCH TO VTR MODE Tried to use the FF or REW button in camera mode Press the CAM VTR button to set VTR mode HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED Displayed when the video head is dirty Head clogging was detected during an edit search in shooting mode as well as during playback and displayed Clean with a special
85. Set the IRIS mode switch to M Manual 2 Set the zoom mode to M Manual 3 Open the iris by turning the iris ring If the illumination is too strong reduce it or move to a darker place 4 Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum tele photo position 5 Bring the subject into focus 6 Set the lens to maximum wide angle 7 Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob 8 View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for the best possible focus 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 about three times for fine adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the telephoto position and the wide angle position 1 O Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the ring White Balance Adjustment Since the color of light color temperature varies depending on the light source it is necessary to re adjust the white balance when the main light source illuminating the subject changes White Balance Adjustment Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored in memories AUTO A and AUTO B Adjustment procedure 1 Set the following switches Set the POWER switch to ON Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A Auto Set the FULL AUTO switch to OFF 2 Set the ND filter switch according to the current lighting 3 Set the WHT BAL switch to A or B 4 Place a white object near the center of the screen under the same lighting conditions as the target subject and zoom in to fill the
86. Use the values in the table on the above for approximate reference times Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environ ment Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens and LCD are used frequently Precautions for the Battery Pack When the battery pack is not in use it must be stored in a cool dry place Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be subject to a high temperature under direct sunlight in a car etc this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten service life When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty the operating time will be shortened If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even imme diately after recharging the service life of the battery pack is nearly finished Purchase a new battery pack Recharging Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could result in reduced battery capacity If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete recharging or recharging without discharging once dis charge the battery pack completely then recharge it to restore the battery capacity If the battery pack is recharged with its internal tempera ture raised immediately after use recharging may not be performed completely Perform charging in an environment where the tempera ture is between 10 C 50 F and 35 C 95 F 20 C 68 F to 25 C 77
87. VTR mode Press the CAM VTR button The VTR indicator lights 1 IEEE1394 switch Recording unit Signal flow 1EEE1394 cable CAUTION Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV or DV Start recording after making sure that both devices are properly connected 5 Set the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen t See page 76 Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format Normally use the AUTO setting VIDEO FORMAT menu screen VIDEO FORMAT FRAME RATE 60 30 HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE DOWN CON HDV LETTER DPB TAPE AUTO SET UP 0 0 PAGE BACK 6 Insert a videocassette tape This device Recorded videocassette tape Recording unit Videocassette you want to dub 7 Press the PLAY STILL button on this device to start play back 8 start recording on the recording device See the recording device user manual for more informa tion 9 When dubbing is finished stop recording on the record ing device press the STOP button on this device and stop the playback MEMO Switch the IEEE1394 switch when this device is OFF When you dub still images they are low resolution images Noise may also enter the audio Operations may differ depending on the features and specifications of the connected device and operations or data exchange may not be possible even if the devices ar
88. and play back SD Standard Definition video on Mini DV videocassettes HDV format can record and play back HD High Definition video on Mini DV videocassettes There are two types of recording formats within HDV format HDV 720p 720 effective scan lines progressive scan HDV 1080i 1080 effective scan lines interlaced scan This device supports HDV 720p format HDV 720p HDV and DV are trademarks of Sony Corporation and Victor Company of Japan Limited 24p mode shooting function In HDV format it records in 24p mode It uses a 2 3 2 3 pulldown when recording to tape and con verts the images to 60 frames Component output is con verted to 60 frames during playback as well 24p DV format video uses a 2 3 2 3 pulldown 24p Mode A 2 3 3 2 pulldown 24p Advanced Mode is also supported It can shoot with the same number of frames as movie film Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played back simple playback Recording in the DVCAM format is not possible DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation 60 Hz 50 Hz HD or HDTV signals Supports both 60 Hz 50 Hz HD or HDTV signals You can select this in a menu screen Cross convert video output You can output converted video from the video output con nectors You can select this in a menu screen Focus assist function Enables easy and accurate focusing during shooting User buttons added Enables you to switch camera settings instantly to suit the shoot
89. area of the selected item starts blinking Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area stops blinking and the setting is entered MEMO The TIME STYLE SEC DISPLAY DATE STYLE and TIME SHIFT items can also be set and changed after the date and time have been set 41 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Setting and Displaying the Date and Time Cont d Setting the Date and Time 1 Display the CLOCK ADJUST menu screen Select the CLOCK ADJUST item on the TIME DATE menu screen TIME DATE menu screen TIME DATE DISPLAY ON DISPLAY MODE BARS CAM DISPLAY STYLE DATE TIME DATE STYLE MM DD YY TIME STYLE 24HOUR SEC DISPLAY ON TIME SHIFT OFF DCLOCK ADJUST PAGE BACK 2 Set the date and time The blinking digit is the one to be set CLOCK ADJUST menu screen Date CLOCK ADJUST lt L_JODATE MM DD YY 064067406 TIME 09 7313 PAGE BACK Time Hour Min When the SHUTTER dial is pressed the blinking digit moves to the next digit When the SHUTTER dial is rotated the value of the blinking digit changes When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward the value becomes higher When rotated downward the value becomes smaller Repeat the procedure described in and above to set the day month year hours minutes The digits indicating seconds cannot be set Press the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to enter the date an
90. authorized service agent Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC Adhere to the following precautions when using the head cleaning tape 1 Insert the cleaning tape Press the PLAY STILL button after the cleaning tape is fully loaded The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY mode The tape stops automatically and then this device enters the STOP mode 2 Do not use the tape more than four times at the most for each cleaning m Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head cleaning Low Room High Running temperature temperature temperature Operating envi 0 C to 10 C 10 C to 35 C 35 C to 40 C ronment Yardstick for 1 to 2 times ev 1 to 2 times ev 1 to 2 times ev use of cleaning ery 5 hours ery 20 to 30 ery 5 hours tape hours Note 1 When used in a low humidity environment head cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of those given in the chart above Note 2 If an M DV80 tape is used immediately after head cleaning the HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED indicator may remain on In this case let the tape run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has run for a while Note 3 Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature 10 C to 35 C Note 4 The cleaning tape case contains instructions for use of the cleaning tape However some of these instructions differ from the contents of this sheet When us
91. battery E model IDX battery ts See Battery Operation on page 37 MONITOR SELECT Audio monitor selector switch This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and playback sound output from the monitoring speaker on page 14 or the PHONES jack on page 12 CH 1 The CH 1 channel audio is output BOTH CH 1 and CH 2 channel audio are output mixed When this setting is selected the menu screen can be used to select whether the mixed sound or stereo sound should be output via the PHONES jack AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen is set to STEREO only the audio of CH 1 is output from the monitoring speaker CH 2 The CH 2 channel audio is output ts See Outputting Audio on page 63 ts See AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen on page 88 CAUTION Make sure to move switches all the way Do not leave a switch stopped in a midway position Noise will be gener ated and operation irregularities will occur JDISPLAY Display button When LCD VF in the LCD VF 4 4 menu display is set to OFF press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch between the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen When LCD VF in the LCD VF 4 4 menu display is set to ON press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the LCD screen ON and OFF Press the DIS PLAY button briefly to change the display mode for the LCD screen as follows Only image
92. be clogged with dirt Clean head with the special head clean ing tape t See Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape on page 7 Sound is not output during playback Is the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO menu screen set to CH3 4 To output the sound of the recording set to CH1 2 Noise appears when playing back a tape recorded on another unit The transient section between scenes recorded on other units and those recorded on this device may appear disturbed When a tape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording this phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors The front section s audio level control doesn t work Is the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch set to AUTO Is the FULL AUTO switch set to ON Cannot initialize format the SD memory card Is the SD memory card write protected tr See page 34 Battery alarm is displayed even if a fully charged battery pack is put in Is the battery pack old Cassette cannot be ejected after the power is turned ON The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient Check the power volt age Time code or user s bits data not displayed Is the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen set to OFF If so set to ON The date and time are not displayed or recorded Is the DISPLAY item on the TIME DATE menu screen set to OFF Set to ON when the data should be displayed and recorded
93. black compress settings are other than NORMAL Indication of skin tone detail SD Indicated when skin tone detail is ON color operation Indication of Iris level opera 1 Displayed when the AE LEVEL setting is other than NORMAL tion Indication of FAW operation FAW Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON Gain operation indication dB Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB and ALC Indication of various function FOCUS Displayed when the Focus Assist function is ON operations SKIN AREA Blinks while the skin detail color area is displayed ALC Displayed when ALC function alone is ON FAS Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON S Displayed when the shutter speed is a setting other than the default setting 1 See page 83 Indication of DR HD100 Oper When a DR HD100 HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements is connected its operation status is displayed 69 DR HD100 is connected displays white 09 Recording with DR HD100 displays red For details refer to the DR HD100 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 24 HDV HD30P 102 03 B00 00 00 00 2 0nin O FAS 308 FAW I 3 a ak 12 21 O Ts 45 STATUS 1 Screen STATUS 1 In addition to the information on the STATUS 0 screen this screen displays the following items No Item VIDEO FORMAT display Contents Displays the currently selected video format Al
94. cannot be recorded How to charge the built in battery 1 Connect the AC adapter to this device and an AC outlet or mount a charged battery on this device 2 Set the POWER switch on this device to ON or OFF charging takes places with the POWER switch set to either of the positions 3 Leave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours The built in battery will remain charged for about 3 months after being charged for about 4 hours Battery Operation The attachable battery varies depending on location Recommended batteries U model Dionic 90 Anton Bauer E model Endura 7 IDX CAUTION Use only the recommended batteries If a heavy battery is used the battery may fall out depend ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used m GY HD200U Use an Anton Bauer battery Attaching the Battery 1 Align the battery guide pins three places with the bat tery adapter guide holes and insert straight Battery will not be properly attached if guide pins are not straight Cassette cover Guide Ovide pins side panel holes 3 Release lever Battery pack trim pack LCD screen side panel 2 Slide the battery towards the Cassette cover side panel until it clicks The battery is attached Removing the Battery Slide the battery towards you LCD screen side panel while holding down the release lever and pull away from the device to remove the battery Release lever
95. command was sent from the IEEE1394 connector TRIGGER TO HDV TRIGGER TO DV 23 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder Cont d Setting Status Contents of Indications FF REW button was pressed in CAMERA SWITCH TO VTR MODE mode REC VTR trigger button was pressed when 1080 REC INVALID 10801 CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen was set to ON Other Displays 1 See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on pages 100 102 1 See Warnings and Responses on page 106 The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format setting See page 86 Displayed if functions were assigned to the USER1 3 buttons ts See page 86 Displayed when the WHT BAL white balance selector switch on page 15 is set to PRST PRESET 2 3 AL Rae depends on the video format No Item VTR mode indication Contents STBY In record standby mode record pause mode REC During recording PLAY During playback FF During fast forward REW During rewind STL During still picture playback mode FWD During playback in forward direction FWD1 About x2 speed FWD2 About x5 speed FWD3 About x10 speed REV During playback in reverse direction REV1 About x2 speed REV2 About x5 speed REV3 About x10 speed STOP Stop mode Tape protect mode EJECT Cassette being ejected No tape loaded Indication
96. depending on the REC item setting and the ASPECT item setting in the VIDEO FOR MAT 1 2 menu screen as shown below SAFETY ZONE OFF 4 3 14 9 16 9 16 9 4 3 CENTER MARK OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON REC ASPECT DV 601 a A TN rose ca ar r a et 4 3 is _ 7 g y roA E H 1 l 4 k ch 4 Cannot be selected DV 24PA DV 25P 16 9 HDV HD60P HDV HD50P ES hae ee EE a HDV HD30P 16 9 ete el l l s a HDV HD25P C i b ii it bii HDV HD24P aay a ee ee ER 30 SAFETY ZONE 2 35 1CE 2 35 1CH CENTER MARK OFF ON OFF Cannot be selected ON HDV HD60P HDV HD50P HDV HD30P 16 9 HDV HD25P HDV HD24P Switching between the LCD Screen and Viewfinder Display m When the LCD VF item in the LCD VF 4 4 menu is set to OFF the LCD monitor and viewfinder VF displays are as shown below LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display LCD Closed Normal LCD OFF ON Inverted LCD ON OFF LCD Open Normal LCD ON OFF Inverted LCD ON OFF MEMO You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2 seconds After you set up the function that switches the display between the LCD monitor and the viewfinder by holding down the DISPLAY button the display mode is cancelled by the LCD monitor open close and normal inverted operations If the LCD monitor is closed inside this
97. device cannot function If this happens firmly push the videocassette cover in again as far as it will go to lock it The videocassette cover does not open during recording even if you slide the EJECT switch Do not leave the videocassette cover open for a long time Dust or dirt may enter the inside and cause damage Do not touch the videocassette cover or interfere with the eject operation while ejecting is in progress This will cause damage When you close the videocassette cover do not press the black area of the inner cover Setting and Displaying the Date and Time The date and time of the built in clock should be set Pow ered by the built in backup battery the set date and time data continue to count even when the power is switched off The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD mon itor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accor dance with the settings made on the menu screen Setting the Date and Time Style The date and time are set on the menu screen When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the connector set the ANALOG OUT CHAR item on the OTH ERS 1 2 menu screen to ON 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to dis play the TOP MENU screen 3 sero ose SHUTTER dial woruter D A 7 2 ZA Jai STATUS button 1 POWER switch 3 Rotate the S
98. device is recording This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings DR HD100 A OFF Selects whether or not to turn OFF the DR HD100 HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements when this device is turned OFF OFF Power does not turn OFF ON Power turns OFF with this device MEMO The mark is displayed at the upper right of the LCD monitor and viewfinder when the DR HD100 is con nected If this device is turned OFF before the mark is displayed power does not turn OFF even if this setting is ON This setting is canceled and the DR HD100 does not turn OFF in the following instances 1394 REC TRIGGER item is set to OFF VTR mode is set When the DR HD100 power turns off and this device is turned ON again after 12 seconds DR HD100 power appears on the LCD monitor for 7 seconds MENU ALL RESET Selects whether to reset the menu screen settings to initial settings The camera mode and VTR mode menu settings are reset The TC PRESET UB PRESET and CLOCK ADJUST settings are not reset CANCEL The settings are not reset EXECUTE The settings are reset MEMO The cursor P does not move to this item when the VTR is activated If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different FRAME RATE settings REBOOT is dis played for 3 seconds this device automatically turns off and then turns on PAGE BACK When t
99. device with the screen in the normal display orientation holding down the DISPLAY button does not work m When the LCD VF item in the LCD VF 4 4 menu is set to ON the LCD monitor and viewfinder VF displays are as shown below LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display LCD Closed Normal LCD OFF ON Inverted LCD ON ON LCD Open Normal LCD ON ON Inverted LCD ON ON MEMO Press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the LCD screen display ON and OFF The viewfinder screen is always displayed dq CHT BOTH CHET MONITOR SELECT DISPLAY DISPLAY button Inverted LCD LCD open 40 or more A LCD close less than 40 31 PREPARATIONS Basic System Shoulder Belt rou roa ou 2 B Microphone yi ap cps Earphone pea td a n Focus Manual Unit 1 HZ FM13 FUJINON HZ FM15 CANON sp tet SEIREN STEPEN ENERE ENE Microphone UA 4 3 Zoom Lens Th13 x 3 5BRMU FUJINON Wide Converter WCV 82SC 1 3 Zoom Lens Th16 x 5 5BRMU FUJINON T Excluding the CHU CHE model Focus Manual Unit i e a _ Zoom Servo Unit HZ ZS13B SD Memory Card i GY HD200U GY HD200E GY HD201E E dard Pe Mount Converter 1 2173 ACM 12 23 1 3 ACM 17 1 2 Zoom Lens 14 x 7 3B12U FUJINON S17 x 6 6BRM FUJINON S20 x 6
100. dur ing HEADER REC recording HEADER REC operation is accepted even during load ing of the cassette tape The test tone 1 kHz sine wave recorded in the color bar section will be recorded unrelated to the setting for the TEST TONE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen The time code preset on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen becomes invalid when HEADER REC recording is performed The user s bits following completion of HEADER REC recording will be the user s bits value set on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The running of the time code following completion of HEADER REC recording will be in accordance with the setting of the TC GENE switch FREE RUN Continuous running REC RUN or REGEN Runs only during REC Camera images are not output to the LCD monitor view finder or video output during REW mode when the HEADER REC operation begins 61 PLAYBACK MODE Playback Procedure Recorded pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor or on the monitor connected to the video output connector STOP button PLAY STILL button REW button FF button a fa MEMO The GY HD250 GY HD251 can play back the following two types of videocassettes MiniDV videocassette DVCAM videocassette Tapes recorded in the LP mode cannot be played back 11 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Set this device to the VTR mode Press the CAM VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator Playback is also
101. era settings m Auto white display only displayed in the Camera mode m Menu setting screens m Alarm message display m Safety zone display only displayed in the Camera mode MEMO When ANALOG OUT CHAR on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen is ON characters are also shown on images from the Y PB PR OUT and VIDEO OUT terminals Characters are also shown on images from the HD SD SDI OUT terminal when the SDI OUT CHAR is ON Status Screens Press the STATUS button while normal screen is displayed to show one of the status screens lt C STATUS button 22 The contents of the status display are divided into those for the Camera mode and those for the VTR mode Each time the STATUS button is pressed in the Camera mode one of 5 status screens is displayed STATUS 0 1 2 3 4 One type of screen is displayed in the VTR mode CAMERA MODE display example HDV HD30P fJ00 00 00 00 20min SKIN AREA SKIN AREA FAS FAS 603 348 Fal FAN l 0 so 3 FILI ide 8 F56 A e 12 00 sTBY 01 02 03 01 23 45 STBY 01 02 03 01 23 45 STATUS 0 STATUS 1 FILE CAM1 SCENE FULL AUTO ON GAIN 9dB L 0M 6H 9 SHUTTER 1 1000 WHT BAL A 3200K AE LEVEL NORMAL FILTER OFF ZEBRA 70 80 REMAIN 60min AUDIO 32k CH1MCH2M sTBY 01 02 03 01 23 45 STBY 01 02 03 MO1 23 45 STATUS STATUS 2 t VTR MODE display example USER1 B COMPRESS HDV HD30P E o0 00 00 00 USER2 PRESET TEMP 20mi
102. frame Non drop frame mode In the NTSC system the actual number of frames per 1 second is approximately 29 97 frames but per time code 30 frames are processed To compensate for this differ ence the mode called drop mode drops frame 00 and 01 for every minute not divisible by 10 The non drop frame mode is when no frames are dropped and the actual time shift neglected m TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 50 25 Whether or not user s bit data should be recorded can be selected with the UB REC item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK menu screen FRAME RATE 50 25 TC UB CLOCK TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK Presetting time code data The time code and user s bit data are preset on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen 1 Display the TC UB CLOCK menu screen Select the TC UB CLOCK item on the TOP MENU screen TC UB CLOCK DTC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK Time code hour min sec frame 2 Set the time code hours minutes seconds frames Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with TC PRESET and then press the SHUTTER dial The first digit of the time code blinks The blinking digit is the one to be set When the SHUTTER dial is pressed the blinking digit changes
103. held down only OJ S IRIS speed adjusting control For adjusting the iris operation speed MEMO If the speed becomes too fast hunting may occur To avoid the phenomena described above perform adjustment again FILTER thread Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the front Other filters can be used for various effects ZOOM servo connector Connect an optional zoom servo unit here ZOOM ZOOM mode knob S Servo zoom mode Allows operation by the zoom servo control lever M Manual zoom mode Allows zoom control by the zoom lever ring BACK FOCUS ring fixing screw For back focus adjustment only Secure with the screw knob after adjustment t See Back Focus Adjustment on page 51 Macro focusing ring for close up shooting By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow close up shooting of very small objects becomes possible Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in the macro mode To shoot images in the macro mode set the focus ring to the infinite position 00 and the zoom ring to the max imum wide angle position To adjust the focus of the macro image rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow until the object is focused CAUTION The back focus knob is located close to the macro ring be careful not to mistake the back focus knob for the macro ring After the required operation be
104. if white balance is achieved in the middle of the screen it may not be achieved at the top and bottom of the screen Greens and magentas may be colored This is due to char acteristics of the lens Correcting this phenomenon is called White Shading Adjustment Perform this after adjusting white balance White shading adjustment is performed on the WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen Adjustment procedure 1 White balance the camera 2 Set the camera s lens controls as follows a Set the IRIS opening to F4 or higher number b In the case of a zoom lens set the ZOOM at the center of its range 3 Shoot a uniformly lit white sheet of paper and fill the mon itor screen with it 4 Set the monitor CHROMA level to maximum 5 Check the color of the monitor screen If the top and the bottom of the monitor screen are white then no adjust ment is necessary If the top of the monitor screen is greenish and the bottom is reddish or if the top is reddish and the bottom is greenish then continue with this adjust ment 6 Adjust the LEVEL G in the SHADING menu item to mini mize the color difference between the top and bottom of the screen 7 It is recommended that only LEVEL G be adjusted Display the WHITE BALANCE menu screen Follow the steps in Setting Menu Screens on page 72 and proceed as follows MENU CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 CAMERA PRO CESS 2 2 ADVANCE PROCESS WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE WHITE PAINT lt R gt
105. is ON The cursor is positioned on 1080 CAMERA in the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen when this is ON When the FRAME RATE is set to 24 this is fixed to OFF REC Sets the video format for shooting Can only be displayed and set in camera mode You can set the following according to the FRAME RATE Setting Description FRAME RATE DV 60I DV format Shoots using a 480 60i signal U model Only HDV HD60P HDV format Shoots using a 720 60p signal 60 30 HDV HD30P HDV format Shoots using a 720 30p signal HDV HD50P HDV format Shoots using a 720 50p signal HDV HD25P_ HDV format Shoots using a 720 25p signal 50 25 DV 501 DV format Shoots using a 576 50i signal E model Only DV 25P DV format Shoots using a 576 25p signal E model Only DV 24P DV format Shoots at 480 24p 2 3 2 3 pulldown U model Only DV 24PA DV format Shoots at 480 24p 2 3 3 2 pulldown U model Only 24 HDV HD24P HDV format Shoots using a 720 24p signal CANCEL Cancels the settings EXECUTE Executes the settings MEMO The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched On the E model the video format is fixed at HDV HD24P when the FRAME RATE item is set to 24 HDV HD24P is displayed 74 This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings ASPECT Sets th
106. is indicated and this item cannot be selected TIME SHIFT Sets the clock OFFSET time 1H steps Adds time to the built in clock time compensation and displays it The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape Settings 23H 1H OFF 1H 23H CLOCK ADJUST To adjust the date and time align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST screen ts See Setting the Date and Time on page 42 PAGE BACK 92 The TC UB CLOCK menu returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position OTHERS 1 2 Menu Screen The OTHERS menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings ANALOG OUT CHAR Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and menus on the screen for the Y Ps PR and VIDEO OUT terminals ON On screen display OFF No on screen display MEMO When ANALOG OUT CHAR item is set to ON the content displayed on the viewfinder is also displayed in the video from the video output terminal During VTR recording the mode is displayed in red on the viewfinder How ever color is not applied for the following video outputs Component output of recording or playback in DV format Composite output LONG PAUSE TIME Selects the time minutes before the tape protect mode drum head rotation stopped is e
107. is set at a luminance level of 108 ecrease the number Sharpens V direction 100 The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 100 If the screen is too white at Settings H MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 H MAX 5 108 set it to 100 H FREQUENCY Sanges the horizontal contour compensation frequency for the contours details Set this as appropriate for the KNEE Sets whether to run the knee function which compresses video signals over a certain level to render the tonality subject in the highlight areas automatically or manually Set MANUAL when you want to check the bright areas and adjust LOW Enhances low frequency bands the knee point manually MIDDLE ne vs aay Pecsa largeipaltams AUTO Adjusts the knee point automatically according to the luminance level Enhances middle trequency bands MANUAL You can change the luminance level in the LEVEL item HIGH Enhances high frequency bands T 7 i Use this when shooting subjects with small patterns LEVEL Fa the Soy ek for pjs eit iaee Dis Pan V FREQUENCY Use this when shooting subjects with finely detailed patterns EEE E E E DE EE Decrease the number Lowers the knee point level Settings 80 85 90 95 100 MEMO Changes the vertical contour compensation frequency for the contours details Compensates for distortion when outputting progressive video to an interlaced monitor HIGH Enhances high f
108. lighting conditions as the target subject and zoom in to fill the screen with white 5 Press the AWB Auto White Balance button AUTO WHITE A B OPERATION is displayed in the view finder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit operates When correct white balance is obtained the approximate color temperature is displayed together with AUTO WHITE A B OK for about 5 seconds Iris mode switch on page 10 ND filter oe 8 lt WHT BAL switch AWB button POWER switch MEMO Fine tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in white balance in WHITE PAINT lt R gt lt B gt on the WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen 0 See page 85 Error messages If the adjustment ends abnormally an error message as described below blinks for about 5 seconds NG OBJECT Improper object Displayed when there is not enough white color on an object or the color temperature is not suitable Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use another white object and re adjust the white balance 52 ERROR LOW LIGHT Insufficient illumination Displayed when the illumination is dim Increase the illumi nation and then re adjust the white balance ERROR OVER LIGHT Excessive illumination Displayed when the light is excessively bright Decrease the illumination and then re adjust the white balance AUTO WHITE A AUTO WHITE A OPERATION OK lt 3200K gt During operation Result message
109. microphone is not connected increasing the audio level could cause noise from the input connector to be recorded on the tape When the microphone is not con nected to the INPUT1 2 connector set the AUDIO INPUT switch to LINE or turn down the audio level control In the FULL AUTO mode the audio level volume cannot be adjusted with the audio level controls on the CH 1 and CH 2 Monitoring Audio during Recording The audio input during recording in record pause or stop mode can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or earphone PHONES jack Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONI TOR SELECT switch CH 1 The sound input to the CH 1 channel is output BOTH The sound input to the CH 1 and CH 2 chan nels is output mixed CH 2 The sound input to the CH 2 channel is output The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring vol ume 56 The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the case of an abnormal condition occurring in this device An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached or when the battery is running down Do not increase the audio monitoring volume exces sively otherwise howling with the camera microphone may occur MEMO When connecting a stereotype earphone make the fol lowing settings to output stereo sound Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to BOTH Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen to STEREO When
110. mode m VTR mode IEEE1394 input mode TC UB CLOCK menu Playing Back Time Code This device features a time code reader During playback the time code or user s bit data recorded on the tape is dis played on the LCD screen or viewfinder status screen When the Ps PR TC switch is set to TC the playback time code is output from the PB TC OUT terminal Only in VTR mode When HD SD SDI OUT of the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen is set to ON the playback time code is output from the HD SD SDI terminal MEMO During playback if a portion of tape without recording time code runs through the time code stops running Playback continues When a tape with a time code that is longer than two hours is played on home use DV equipment time code may not be played properly on some models TC GENE switch TCG SOURCE item TC DUPLI item INTERNAL REC IEEE1394 TC TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode SLAVE mode IEEE1394 TC DUPLI mode EXTERNAL EXT TC mode EEE1394 TC SLAVE mode is performed with special operations See page 48 47 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Synchronizing with the Time Code of the IEEE1394 DV Connected Master Unit You can synchronize the time code when performing multi camera recording The internal time code generator will be synchro nized with the time code in the signal input from the IEEE1394 terminal After synchronization slave lock the internal ti
111. not set to FREE The slave unit is GY HD200E HDV format m If slave lock is performed in DV format and is then switched to HDV format frame digit may deviate If power is turned off slave lock is disabled Perform slave lock operation again m Slave lock cannot be performed for UB User s bit m If the frame rate for the master unit and slave unit is not synchronized it will not run properly Synchronize frame rate before using Em If DROP NON DROP is not synchronized it will not run properly Synchronize DROP NON DROP before using Screen Adjustment LCD monitor direction angle screen brightness etc can be adjusted Adjusting the Direction and Angle of the LCD monitor With the LCD door in the open condition rotate the LCD door Itcan be turned 180 in upward direction and 90 in down ward direction When turned 180 upward direction the LCD monitor can be viewed from the lens side vertically inverted image LCD BRIGHT button LCD lock release lever Adjusting the LCD monitor PEAKING Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor LCD BRIGHT Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor Adjustments are made on the LCD VF 2 4 menu screen t See page 87 LCD MIRROR MODE Sets the LCD monitor to display mirrored images when shooting facing the subject Adjustments are made on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen t See page 89 LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD m
112. of date and time Indicates the date and time Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display style are set on the TIME DATE menu LCD BRIGHT indication When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT button the date and time indications and the VTR mode indication are turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed Example BRIGHT 5 teoeceell Numeric value Any of 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Indication of Black operation B Displayed when the black stretch or black compress settings are other than NORMAL color operation Indication of skin tone detail SD Indicated when skin tone detail is ON Indication of Iris level opera tion Displayed when the AE LEVEL setting is other than NORMAL Indication of FAW operation FAW Indicated when Full Auto White Balance is ON Gain operation indication dB Indicates gain value when gain is other modes than 0 dB and ALC Indication of various function operations FOCUS Displayed when the Focus Assist function is ON SKIN AREA Blinks while the skin detail color area is displayed ALC Displayed when ALC function alone is ON FAS Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting function is ON S Displayed when the shutter speed is a setting other than the default setting ts See page 86 Indication of DR HD100 Oper When a DR HD100 HDD unit by
113. only be set in camera mode item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings In VTR mode this screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen AUDIO MONITOR Selects whether stereo or mixed audio is output from the PHONES jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set to BOTH Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings STEREO Stereo audio CH 1 audio is output to L and CH 2 audio is output to R ZEBRA Switches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra pattern is displayed Outputs only the CH 1 audio from the monitor speaker 60 70 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 60 and 70 MIX Mixed audio CH 1 and CH 2 mixed audio is output to L and R 70 80 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 70 and 80 FAS AUDIO Selects the recording level adjusting method for FAS Full Auto Shooting CH 1 CH 2 85 95 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 85 and 95 AUTO Sets to AUTO OVER95 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 95 SW SET Follows settings for the AUDIO SELECT switch OVER100 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 100 tr See CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 F NO IRIS IND Selects whether or not the F number of the lens iris iris level mark is displayed in the status display on the LCD mon t See
114. or backward by loosening this ring Slide mounting ring You can adjust the position of the viewfinder left or right by loosening this ring Oclamp Attach the microphone cable here FOCUS ASSIST Focus assist button When you press this button during shooting the area of focus is displayed in blue red or green making it easy to focus accurately 18 MEMO When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen is set to ACCU FOCUS and this button is pressed ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST This makes depth of field shallower making it easier to focus This button has the same function as the FOCUS ASSIST button in the Right Side Section ts See LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen on page 86 O REC REC trigger button start stop recording Start and stop recording using this button This works together with the REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens VTR trigger button OJ REC LOCK REC LOCK switch Slide this switch in the direction of the arrow to lock the REC trigger button Use this to prevent unwanted recording The REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens VTR trigger button are not locked SD memory card cover When you open this cover you can insert and remove the SD memory card ts See Inserting an SD Memory Card on page 34 When an SD memory card is loaded You can save call up and reset the menu settings on this device You can initialize format an SD memory ca
115. or not the lamp should light and the lighting pattern ts See page 93 JLENS Lens control connector Connect 12 pin lens control cable from lens here a Function rp Function 1 Return switch 7 Iris position 2 VTR trigger 8 IRIS A R INPUT 3 GND 9 EXTENDER position 4 Lens AUTO MANU con 10 ZOOM position trol 5 IRIS control 11 6 12V DC 12 QIZEBRA Zebra switch When this switch is ON a zebra pattern is imposed on the viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in accor dance with the menu settings made for the video signal This pattern can be used as a reference for manual adjust ment of the lens iris Zebra patterns are also displayed during color bar display when this switch is set to ON The default value is 70 80 The luminance level can be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen ts See page 86 While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side the color tone areas specified with the SKINCOLOR ADJUST item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in the viewfinder The switch returns to the OFF position when released t See How to Use Skin Detail on pages 99 and 100 The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while the color bar or VTR playback picture is shown in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor AWB Auto white balance button When the WHT BAL switch on page 15 is set to A or B and you press t
116. page 86 57 SHOOTING OPERATION Basic Recording Operation Cont d If the Record Standby Mode Contin ues Setting the time before the tape protection mode is engaged The time before the tape protection mode is engaged from the record standby mode can be set to 5 minutes or 3 min utes with the LONG PAUSE TIME item on the OTHERS 1 2 screen menu amp See page 93 When the record standby mode has continued for about 5 minutes or 3 minutes this device automatically stops drum rotation in order to protect the tape Tape protect mode In the tape protect mode STOP is shown as the VTR mode indication on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder screen STATUS 1 screen BB00 00 00 00 20min STOP 23 45 VTR mode indication m To start recording from the tape protect mode press the REC VTR trigger button The drum starts rotating and recording starts after about 3 seconds m To return to the record standby mode from the tape protect mode press the RET button CAUTION This function does not work when using RET button is used as FOCUS ASSIST button Checking Recorded Contents in Record Standby Mode Recording Check Function This function is available only when this device is in the standby mode In standby mode about 5 seconds of the last part of the con tent recorded in DV format can be played back and about 7 seconds when the content was recorded in HDV format can be played b
117. possible in the Camera mode Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indi cator to indicate STOP 3 Load the recorded videocassette correctly When the videocassette is loaded this device enters the Stop mode 4 Open the operation cover on the upper section of this device Slide the operation cover to the side to open 5 Press the PLAY STILL button Playback starts 6 Press the PLAY STILL button to stop playback tempo rarily This device enters the still mode 7 To re start playback press the PLAY STILL button 8 To stop playback or the still mode press the STOP but ton MEMO Inthe VTR mode the camera image is not output on the LCD monitor in the viewfinder or through the video out put connector When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued for a while this device automatically switches to the tape protect mode Tape protect mode Drum rotation is stopped in order to protect the tape Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode 62 When the automatic tracking function is activated at the start of the playback mode digital noise may appear in the playback image This device does not allow manual tracking adjustment When playing back a tape that was recorded on another unit digital noise may appear during playback Following loading of the tape the built in head cleaner will emit a sound while operating This do
118. reference black Increase the number Raises the pedestal level Decrease the number Lowers the pedestal level Settings MIN 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 MAX 10 DETAIL Adjusts the contour detail sharpness level Increase the number Sharpens the contour Decrease the number Softens the contour OFF Does not function Settings OFF MIN 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 MAX 10 When this item is set to OFF is displayed for the following menu items and they cannot be selected V H BALANCE Sets which contours details to sharpen those in the horizontal H direction or those in the vertical V direction Increase the number Sharpens H direction Decrease the number Sharpens V direction Settings H MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 H MAX 5 H FREQUENCY Changes the horizontal contour compensation frequency for the contours details Set this as appropriate for the subject LOW Enhances low frequency bands Use this when shooting subjects with large patterns MIDDLE Enhances middle frequency bands HIGH Enhances high frequency bands Use this when shooting subjects with small patterns V FREQUENCY Use this when shooting subjects with finely detailed patterns Changes the vertical contour compensation frequency for the contours details Compensates for distortion when outputting progressive video to an interlaced monitor HIGH Enhances high frequency ba
119. setting and push the SHUTTER dial The setting stops flashing and is temporarily set Move the cursor P to the EXECUTE item and EXE CUTE flashes 5 Push the SHUTTER dial REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE is displayed on the screen and after a few seconds the system is reboo ted REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE Setting the REC Item Set the REC item using the same steps as for the FRAME RATE item MEMO If you change the FRAME RATE item setting the system is rebooted The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched We recommend the following settings for REC item in HDV format When recording images with a lot of motion Set to HDV60p or HDV50p When recording images with little motion Set to HDV30p or HDV25p Camera Settings 1 Set the switch positions A GAIN switch Set to L 0 dB B WHT BAL Auto White Balance switch Set to A or B 2 Set the lens iris mode switch to A Auto iris side 3 Select the ND filter ND FILTER Suitable Location OFF OFF Indoors dark outdoors 1 1 4ND Outdoors under clear sky 2 1 16ND Outdoors under extremely clear sky 4 Set the shutter speed to OFF with the SHUTTER dial k i L JI Cw D D HH BOTH enr T D o MomiToR SELECT oIsPLay vrk FULLAUTO VTR indicator
120. settings ANALOG OUT CHAR Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and menus on the screen for the Y PB PrR and VIDEO OUT terminals ON On screen display OFF No on screen display MEMO When ANALOG OUT CHAR item is set to ON the content displayed on the viewfinder is also displayed in the video from the video output terminal During VTR recording the mode is displayed in red on the viewfinder How ever color is not applied for the following video outputs Component output of recording or playback in DV format Composite output SDI OUT CHAR Sets whether or not to display characters such as status and menus on the screen for the HD SD SDI terminal ON On screen display OFF No on screen display LONG PAUSE TIME Selects the time minutes before the tape protect mode drum head rotation stopped is engaged when the record standby condition continues 3MIN 3 minutes 5MIN 5 minutes When used in a cold environment or when the stopped or STILL status continues the setting will be 3 minutes or less regardless of the setting on the menu Normally set 3MIN and use this to prevent head clogging and tape damage ALARM VR LEVEL Selects whether or not alarm sound is emitted and the volume of the alarm sound The alarm sound is output through the monitoring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack OFF Sound is not output LOW Alarm sound is soft
121. side Remove any the tape slack before loading 1 Turn the POWER switch ON 2 Slide the EJECT switch on the top panel of this device to the side The videocassette cover opens automatically and a vid eocassette tape can be inserted 3 Insert a videocassette tape into the videocassette holder With the tape window facing out move the switch on the back of the videocassette up and firmly push the center back of the videocassette straight in as far as it will go 4 Carefully push the center Push here sticker of the vid eocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it After the cover is closed it takes about 10 seconds until recording can begin or this device can enter STOP mode REC SAVE switch Tape window EJECT switch Cassette holder Inner cover m f the power is on the modes are as shown below REC SAVE switch MODE REC SAVE Camera Record standby mode STOP mode REC INHIBIT is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder VTR STOP mode 40 Unloading the Cassette 1 Turn the POWER switch to ON 2 When this device is in shooting standby mode or stop mode slide the EJECT switch to the side and wait until the videocassette cover opens completely The LED next to the EJECT switch flashes A few seconds pass before the videocassette tape is ejected 3 The LED turns off and the videocassette cover opens Take out the v
122. signal Synchronization signal generator Synchronization signal LTC time code External time code generator Connection Input external synchronization signal to the external time code generator and the GENLOCK AUX IN terminal of this device Use BB signals or Tri sync HD signals as the external syn chronization signals CAUTION When the power switch is turned on while the external syn chronization signal is input a vertical vibration occurs for a few seconds This is not a malfunction E Input SMPTE EBU compliant LTC time code signal to the Ps TC IN terminal Settin m Set the GENLOCK AUX IN switch to GENLOCK m Set the PBPR TC switch to TC m Set TCG SOURCE in the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to EXTERNAL m Set the LCD screen or viewfinder to STATUS 1 screen dis play Or set the LCD screen to enlarged status display screen us See page 29 Operation 1 Set the external time code generator and operate it The built in time code generator synchronizes with the input external time code data L lights up in the STATUS 1 screen of LCD screen or viewfinder L also lights up when the LCD screen is in enlarged character display STATUS 1 screen Enlarged display screen WA o0 00 00 00 SF 1 2 34 34 1 07 STOP SP 20 mn 12 0 gt Lights up Lights up L blinks when the time code cannot be synchronized 2 The built in time code gene
123. subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface also do not leave this device for long hours in a parked car under direct sunlight or near room heating equip ment Do not leave this device where it is subject to radiation or X rays or where corrosive gasses occur Protect this device from being splashed with water espe cially when shooting in the rain Protect this device from being wet when shooting on a beach In addition salt and sand may adhere to the camera body Be sure to clean the camera after use Protect this device against penetration of dust when using it in a place subject to sandy dust Optical performance of lens Due to the optical performance of the lens color diver gence phenomena magnification chromatic aberration may occur at the periphery of the image This is not a camera malfunction Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching between the playback picture and the EE picture Use this device in an upright position If placed on its side heat release efficiency will deterio rate adversely affecting the tape transport Depending on circumstances the tape may also be damaged Vibrations Colors may fail to appear and or the image and sound may be disturbed during VTR playback in locations sub jected to strong vibrations Precautions for transportation Do not drop or hit this device against a hard object Remove the videocassette before transporting this devic
124. sure to return the macro focusing ring to the normal position ts See Attaching the Zoom Lens on page 33 ts See Back Focus Adjustment on page 51 Front Section Shoe Makes it possible to mount separately sold lights and accessories knob This is the mounting knob for the microphone holder Microphone holder Makes it possible to attach the provided microphone or a separately sold microphone ts See Attaching the Microphone Provided on page 33 OFront tally lamp This lamp lights up when the GY HD250 GY HD251 enters the record mode It blinks during the transition to the record mode When the tape has run out or the VTR enters the warning mode it blinks quickly Use the FRONT TALLY item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to select whether or not the lamp should light and the lighting pattern us See page 96 J LENS Lens control connector Connect 12 pin lens control cable from lens here Function Function Return switch Iris position VTR trigger IRIS A R INPUT GND EXTENDER position Lens AUTO MANU con ZOOM position trol IRIS control 12V DC ZEBRA Zebra switch When this switch is ON a zebra pattern is imposed on the viewfinder or LCD areas having luminance levels in accor dance with the menu settings made for the video signal This pattern can be used as a reference for manual adjust ment of the lens iris Zebra patterns
125. tape has run out or the VTR enters the warning mode it blinks quickly Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to select whether or not the lamp should light and the lighting pattern us See page 96 PHONES Earphone jack This is a stereo mini jack for connecting an earphone for audio monitoring Plug in an earphone or headphone with a 3 5 mm diameter plug The earphone can also be used to monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circum stances The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen and MONITOR SELECT switch on page 19 The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor volume control on page 14 MEMO The volume of the alarm sound is set with the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound should be output the following setting should be performed Set the MONITOR SELECT switch on page 19 to BOTH Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen to STEREO 12 Shoulder belt hooks Allows you to attach a separately sold shoulder belt OLCD monitor Shows a color camera image or the VTR playback picture It is also used for displaying the following Menu Setting screens Characters showing the whether the GY HD250 GY HD251 is set to shooting mode or VTR playback mode Date and time and time code Audio level meter Warning indications etc
126. tape time minutes is shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen ON Displayed OFF Not displayed TC UB Selects whether or not the time code or user s bits data should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen ON Displayed OFF Not displayed Whether the time code or user s bits data is shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch AUDIO Selects whether the audio level meters should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen ON Displayed OFF Not displayed BATTERY INFO For setting the status display method when loading the Anton Bauer Battery The status will be displayed on the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen In camera mode only displayed when in STATUS 1 screen VOLTAGE Indicates battery voltage in 0 1 V steps V CAPA Remaining battery is shown in percentage TIME Remaining battery is shown in minutes min VOLTAGE and CAPA can be selected when using an IDX Endura battery When TIME is set VOLTAGE is dis played MEMO When TIME or CAPA is selected the battery indicator displayed before the value changes depending on the remaining battery level 0 12 or less M 12 to less than 50 ff 50 or more When remaining battery level b
127. terminals Outputs serial digital HD and SD signals Focus assist function Enables easy and accurate focusing during shooting User buttons added Enables you to switch camera settings instantly to suit the shooting conditions External video signal input enabled Records composite video signals from an external source GENLOCK input terminal Input BB Black Burst or HD Tri sync signals SC phase and HD SD H phase adjustments can be performed Time code reader generator The built in time code reader generator can be used to record the time code and user s bits Time code input output terminal and slave lock function Slave lock to an external time code generator connected to the time code input terminal The time code output terminal outputs built in time code generator data Built in large 3 5 color LCD display In addition to displaying the camera image and the play back image the LCD monitor shows the status screens menu screens for settings and alarm indications Built in monitor speaker for audio checking The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode The playback sound can be monitored in the playback mode The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an abnormal condition occurs in this device Recording check function for convenient recording review function Camera section designed with 3 CCD system for high quality picture 1 3 3 CCD with 1 110 000 effective pixels employed Dig ital signa
128. the bottom is enhanced Settings MIN 127 to 1 NORMAL 1 to 126 MAX LEVEL G When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL adjusts the greens of white shading Increase the number Green at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced Decrease the number Green at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced Settings MIN 127 to 1 NORMAL 1 to 126 MAX LEVEL B When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL adjusts the blues of white shading Increase the number Blue at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced Decrease the number Blue at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced Settings MIN 127 to 1 NORMAL 1 to 126 MAX PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen 1 REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected 85 MENU SCREENS SWITCH MODE Menu Screen The SWITCH MODE menu screen is only displayed in camera mode Item Function Setting bold character 86 SHUTTER Sets the fixed value STEP for values that can change using the SHUTTER dial on the right panel or the VARIABLE used when shooting computer monitors STEP Switches the shutter speed using fixed values VARIABLE Set when shooting a comp
129. the camera settings NTSC standard Outputs color bars compliant with the SMPTE standard PAL standard Outputs color bars compliant with the EBU standard 16 9 screen Outputs multi format color bars To output color bars make the following settings 1 Turn the FULL AUTO switch to OFF 2 Set the BARS item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen to ON t See page 80 Color bars are output FULL AUTO switch USER button m Outputting color bars using the USER buttons 1 Turn the FULL AUTO switch to OFF 2 Assign BARS to one of the USER1 2 or 3 buttons ts See SWITCH MODE Menu Screen on page 86 3 Press the USER button to which BARS was assigned Color bars are output MEMO You can select whether to output an audio test signal during color bar output using the TEST TONE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen t See page 87 Color bars are not output when FULL AUTO mode is ON or in VTR mode OTHERS Warnings and Responses Warnings are displayed on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder if there was a mistaken operation if the battery or tape is low or if there is a problem on the VTR In addition if the tape or battery is low or the VTR has a problem the tally lamp flashes or lights and an alarm is output from the monitor speaker or PHONES jack MEMO GY HD250 GY HD251 uses microcomputers It may not operate properly if there is external static or interfer
130. the color camera image BARS CAM Date and time are always displayed DISPLAY Sets the style in which the date and STYLE item time are displayed DATE TIME Date and time are displayed DATE Date only is displayed TIME Time only is displayed m Display of date and time in the various operation modes In Camera mode The date and time of the internal clock are displayed In VTR playback mode The date and time recorded on the tape are displayed The last read date and time values are displayed When an HDV DV sig The date and time of the DV input nal is input from the are displayed in DV format The IEEE1394 connector date and time of the internal clock are displayed in HDV format In VTR stop mode Displaying Time Code The GY HD250 GY HD251_ records SMPTE standard NTSC or EBU standard PAL time codes and user s bits In the play mode or the record mode the reproduced time codes or user s bits are shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder Time code generator data is output from the TC OUT ter minal or HD SD SDI terminal The time codes or user s bits can be shown on the LCD mon itor or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as fol lows Status screen Setting 1 Set the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen to ON Time codes or user s bit data are displayed on the STATUS screen Time code indication Example 00 00 00 00 Time code indication
131. the cursor P to the RESET item and press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE flashes 4 With EXECUTE selected press the SHUTTER dial to reset the settings RESET FILE gt RESET FILE EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different video format settings REBOOT is displayed for 3 seconds this device turns off automatically and then turns on REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE Reboot display When this happens the SUB NAME initial value SCENEJ is displayed I8 MEMO Even if CAM1 CAM2 CAM3 or CAM4 are reset the cur rent settings are not reset To reset the currently set values select CURRENT Initializing formatting an SD mem ory card Before initializing formatting a card insert and remove the SD memory card with the power to this device OFF Q Disable write protection on the SD memory card Check that an SD memory card has been inserted into this device 1 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the FOR MAT SD CARD item and press the SHUTTER dial CANCEL flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial and when EXECUTE flashes press the SHUTTER dial to initialize format the card FILE MANAGE gt FILE MANAGE FORMAT SD CARD FORMAT SD CARD EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete FILE MANAGE ERROR SD CARD Flashing C moca 1 Error display PUSH JOG BUTT
132. the video signal output connector In DV format a setup signal can be added to COMPONENT output and Y C output When Y Ps PR or Y C is set for OUTPUT TERM DV You can also select a setup signal in the IEEE1394 signal input mode 0 0 No setup signal is added 7 5 A setup signal is added Initial settings U model 7 5 E model 0 0 MEMO When recording composite video signals from an external device set this item according to whether the input signals include a setup signal ts See Recording Composite Video Signals from an External Device on page 65 When the FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 this item is not displayed PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen 79 MENU SCREENS CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings AE LEVEL For adjusting the image level when using auto iris ALC or EEI Increase value Increases level Decrease value Decreases level Settings 3 2 NORMAL 0 2 3 ALC MAX Sets the maximum ALC value to automatically change the signal intensity level depending on the brightness Setting 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB PRESET TEMP Sets the basic color temperature when the WHT BAL white balance selector switch on page 15 is in the PRST PRESET posi
133. two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen In VTR mode this screen consists of one screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings FRAME RATE Sets the frame rate for shooting U model 60 30 Shoots at 480 60i 720 60p 720 30p 50 25 Shoots at 720 50p 720 25p 24 Shoots at 480 24p 2 3 2 3 pulldown 480 24p advance mode 2 3 3 2 pulldown 720 24p E model 60 30 Shoots at 720 60p 720 30p 50 25 hoots at 576 50i 720 50p 576 25p 720 25p 24 Shoots at 720 24p CANCEL Cancels the settings EXECUTE Executes the settings MEMO If you change the FRAME RATE item setting the system is rebooted ts See page 53 The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode or is ejecting a tape 10801 CAMERA Selects whether or not to output camera images in HDV1080i signals HDV1080i signals are output from component output of the Y PB PR terminal However they are not recorded on this device OFF No HDV1080i signal is output Output setting of camera images is based on the REC settings below ON HDV1080i signal is output 60 30 Frame rate 1080 60i 50 25 Frame rate 1080 50i 480 60i or 576 50i signals are output from the VIDEO OUT terminal Composite signal ON OFF is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed MEMO Tape recording and IEEE1394 output are not available when this is ON REC item cannot be set when this
134. whether or not indication of seconds should be displayed on the screen ME SHIFT Adds time to the built in clock time compensation and displays it The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the item to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area of the selected item starts blinking Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area stops blinking and the setting is entered 4 n 4 MEMO The TIME STYLE SEC DISPLAY DATE STYLE and TIME SHIFT items can also be set and changed after the date and time have been set 41 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Setting and Displaying the Date and Time Cont d Setting the Date and Time 1 Display the CLOCK ADJUST menu screen Select the CLOCK ADJUST item on the TIME DATE menu screen TIME DATE menu screen TIME DATE DISPLAY ON DISPLAY MODE BARS CAM DISPLAY STYLE DATE TIME DATE STYLE MM DD YY TIME STYLE 24HOUR SEC DISPLAY ON TIME SHIFT OFF gt CLOCK ADJUST PAGE BACK 2 Set the date and time The blinking digit is the one to be set CLOCK ADJUST menu screen Date CLOCK ADJUST lt 4 7 gt DATE MM DD YY 06706706 m TIME 097343 PAGE BACK Time Hour Min When the SHUTTER dial is pressed the blinking digit moves to the next digit When the SHUTTER dial is rotated the value of the blinking di
135. with the REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens VTR trigger button REC LOCK REC LOCK switch Slide this switch in the direction of the arrow to lock the REC trigger button Use this to prevent unwanted recording The REC trigger button on the right panel and the lens VTR trigger button are not locked SD memory card cover When you open this cover you can insert and remove the SD memory card ts See Inserting an SD Memory Card on page 34 When an SD memory card is loaded You can save call up and reset the menu settings on GY HD250 GY HD251 You can initialize format an SD memory card ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 100 EJECT Eject switch and LED Slide this switch to the side to insert or eject a videocas sette tape The LED lights while ejecting is in progress MEMO It takes a few seconds before the videocassette is ejected Do not close the cassette cover during the eject operation Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette dur ing the eject operation This could result in damage Operation cover Open this cover when operating in the playback mode Otherwise keep this cover closed This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side MEMO When the STOP button is pressed in the Camera mode to set the VTR operation mode indicator to indicate STOP playback operations become possible Battery adapter Attach the battery U model Anton Bauer
136. 00 00 00 00 User s bits indication FF EE DD 20 REC 01 02 03 01 23 45 STATUS 1 screen 2 Whether time codes or user s bit data should be dis played is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the LCD door TC Time codes are displayed UB User s bit data is displayed Ol CAMIVIR TC o oOo AUDIO SELECT EEE TC DISPLAY switch TC GENE switch Displayed Time Code User s Bit When TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL values from the built in time code generator is displayed When TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to EXTERNAL values from the external time code generator connected to the TC IN terminal is displayed When TC DUPLI on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to ON in IEEE1394 input mode values input in the IEEE1394 terminal is displayed Values recorded on the tape are displayed for PLAY mode Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop mode displays the DV input time code data or user s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector on the STATUS screen DTCG The time code data from the IEEE1394 connector DUBG The user s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector To return to display of the original time code or user s bit press the STOP button Display of the normal time code or user s bit is also restored by performing VTR operation MEMO To use input ti
137. 2 Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the nor mal screen mode displays the menu screen in the view finder or on the LCD monitor Pressing this button while the menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor makes the menu screen disappear ts See Setting Menu Screens on page 75 IGAIN Sensitivity selector switch Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is insufficient illumination on the subject The boosting level differs depending on the switch position as follows Factory presets L 0 dB no boosting is applied M 9 GB boosted to approximately 3 times the original H 18 dB boosted to approximately 8 times the original The boosting level for each switch position can be changed with the SWITCH MODE menu screen us See page 86 The more the boosting level is increased the more the resulting image will be noisy When the FULL AUTO switch on page 19 is ON this is fixed at ALC WHT BAL White balance switch Three white balance modes are selectable with this switch B Switch into white balance mode memorized in B If white balance is performed with the switch in this position it will be memorized into B A Switch into white balance mode memorized in A If white balance is performed with the switch in this position it will be memorized into A PRST Switch into white balance mode 3200K or PRESET 5600K set in PRESET TEMP item o
138. 4 connector GY HD200U GY HD201E only Pressing the STOP button for 1 second in the EJECT or stop mode displays the DV input time code data or user s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector on the STATUS screen DTCG The time code data from the IEEE1394 connector DUBG The user s bit data from the IEEE1394 connector To return to display of the original time code or user s bit press the STOP button Display of the normal time code or user s bit is also restored by performing VTR operation MEMO To record HDV DV input time code and user s bit from the IEEE1394 connector set the TC DUPLI item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to ON ts See page 90 To maintain the continuity of time code data use with the TC GENE switch set to REGEN mode when recording HDV DV input signal from the IEEE1394 connector There is no time code display for HDV input CAUTION A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not be displayed correctly by DV components for general con sumer use as some of these lack the capability to display longer time codes 43 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Presetting and Recording of Time Code The time codes from the internal time code generator can be recorded at the time of recording scenes The TC UB CLOCK menu screen differs depending on whether the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen is 60 30 or 50 25 There are two ways to preset the time code
139. 46ND The indication can be switched ON OFF with the FILTER item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen ts See page 89 Audio Lock Indication Displayed when the audio signal is locked to the video signal AUX display Displays when in external image input mode AUX IN mode 26 FILE FULL GAIN SHUTT WHT B AE LE FILTE ZEBRA REMA AUDIO STBY STATUS 2 CAM1 SCENE USER1 B COMPRESS AUTO ON USER2 PRESET TEMP 9dB L 0M 6H 9 USER3 NONE ER 1 1000 LENS RET FOCUS ASSIST AL A 3200K VEL NORMAL R OFF 70 80 N 60min 32k CH1M CH2 01 02 03 M01 23 45 STBY 01 02 03 MO01 23 45 STATUS 3 Screen STATUS 2 Screen This screen displays the camera setup statuses Event display is not available while this screen is displayed Indication Indication Contents FILE CAM1 CAM2 4 and EXT1 4 indicates SUB NAME ts See pages 100 102 FILE A symbol is displayed when a menu setting read from LOAD FILE was changed The display disappears when the setting is saved using STORE FILE FULL AUTO ON OFF GAIN OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB ALC SHUTTER When STEP is selected OFF 1 6 1 6 25 1 7 5 1 12 1 12 5 1 15 1 24 1 25 1 30 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 10000 When VARIABLE is selected 1 24 01 1 10489 5 Displayed when FAS or ALC mode is selected EEI The range for
140. 4B12U FUJINON YH16 x 7K12U CANON YH19 x 6 7K12U CANON 2 3 Zoom Lens ISEN 1 1 1 1 sL ls Carrying Case Component Cable BNC Composite Cable oS rea pin Audio Cable RCA pin A E DV VTR Monitor r HDD Unit IEEE1394 Cable DR HD100 6P 6P For GY HD200U Anton Bauer Anton Bauer Battery Ch l n Ba attery Charger i BR HD50 se aama For GY HD200E GY HD201E GY HD200E V Mount Non linear Editing System GY HD201E V Mount i aes 10x Endura Batter Zrargr _ tery c S ln 4P o 9 AC Adapter Remote Control Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 1 An HZ FM13 cannot be used with a Th16 x 5 5BRMU or 14 x 7 3B12 U zoom lens Use a FUJINON focus manual unit FMM 8 CFH 3 CFC 12 990 For details please consult your JVC authorized dealer 32 Attaching the Zoom Lens 1 Loosen the mount ring 2 Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the mount 3 Tighten the mount ring 4 Connect the cable connector 5 Clamp the lens cable CAUTION Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely Incomplete tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed back focus Set this device s power switch to OFF before the zoom lens is attached or detached Attachi
141. 50 Macro focusing ring for close up shooting By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow close up shooting of very small objects becomes possible Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in the macro mode To shoot images in the macro mode set the focus ring to the infinite position 00 and the zoom ring to the max imum wide angle position To adjust the focus of the macro image rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow until the object is focused CAUTION The back focus knob is located close to the macro ring be careful not to mistake the back focus knob for the macro ring After the required operation be sure to return the macro focusing ring to the normal position ts See Attaching the Zoom Lens on page 33 ts See Back Focus Adjustment on page 50 Front Section Shoe Makes it possible to mount separately sold lights and accessories Knob This is the mounting knob for the microphone holder Microphone holder Makes it possible to attach the provided microphone or a separately sold microphone ts See Attaching the Microphone Provided on page 33 Front tally lamp This lamp lights up when this device enters the record mode It blinks during the transition to the record mode When the tape has run out or the VTR enters the warning mode it blinks quickly Use the FRONT TALLY item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to select whether
142. 85 90 95 100 MEMO When the KNEE item is set to AUTO is displayed and this cannot be selected REVERSE PICTURE When the lens image is inverted and flipped set ROTATE to record properly OFF No inversion ROTATE Invert lens image MEMO When the REVERSE PICTURE item is set to ROTATE skin detail function is available but the detection area is not displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen DNR Selects whether or not to set the noise reduction The DNR Digital Noise Reduction function is applied to the tape recording signal HD component output signal and the IEEE1394 output signal in CAMERA mode When camcorder s picture is noisy because of low light conditions you can improve picture s S N by turning DNR on OFF Noise reduction is not performed ON Sets noise reduction MEMO DNR is not applied in VTR mode AUX IN mode or during playback DNR is not applied to composite output signals in CAMERA mode When the DNR is set to ON the camcorder s S N ratio becomes better but the blurring of moving objects will increase ADVANCED PROCESS Calls up the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen ts See ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen on page 83 PAGE BACK i 82 When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 menu screen REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote cont
143. 9 WIDE 10 MEMO When the COLOR GAIN item is OFF on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen only the areas where the skin detail function is running are displayed using skin colors PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen 84 WHITE PAINT lt B gt Adjusts the B blue component when in AWB Auto White Balance mode Increase the number Strengthens the blue Decrease the number Weakens the blue Settings MIN 32 31 NORMAL 0 30 MAX 31 MEMO You can select this when A or B is set for the WHT BAL switch on the right panel of this device uss See page 15 Settings can be made for A and B individually When PRESET is set is displayed and this cannot be selected When you press the AWB Auto White Balance button and readjust the white balance WHITE PAINT lt B gt becomes NORMAL Adjusts white shading PRESET No white shading adjustment MANUAL Enables white shading adjustment ts See White Shading Adjustment on page 53 MEMO When the SHADING item is set to PRESET the LEVEL R LEVEL G and LEVEL B items cannot be selected LEVEL R When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL adjusts the reds of white shading Increase the number Red at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced Decrease the number Red at the top of the screen is suppressed and
144. AR item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to ON 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer to dis play the TOP MENU screen z Sse N SHUTTER dial 2 STATUS button 1 POWER switch 3 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the TC UB CLOCK item and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the camera body The TC UB CLOCK menu screen appears 4 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the TIME DATE item and then press the SHUTTER dial The TIME DATE menu screen appears Set the DISPLAY item on the TIME DATE menu screen to ON TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC DTIME DATE PAGE BACK 5 Make settings on the TIME DATE menu screen This Z includes display style etc TIME DATE menu screen TIME DATE DISPLAY ON DISPLAY MODE BARS CAM DISPLAY STYLE SDBATETIME gt DATE STYLE MM DD YY gt TIME STYLE 24HOUR SEC DISPLAY ON TIME SHIFT OFF CLOCK ADJUST PAGE BACK DATE STYLE Selects the style for displaying the date YY MMIDD Year month day MM DD YY Month day year DD MM YY Day month year ME STYLE The time can be set to display as a 12 hour or 24 hour clock system EC DISPLAY To select
145. About 0 2 speed SLOW 3 About x0 5 speed During variable playback in reverse direction Displayed when using non linear editing software SLOW 1 About x 0 1 speed SLOW 2 About x 0 2 speed SLOW 3 About x 0 5 speed Item Contents Time Date indication Recorded data are displayed during playback fast forward and rewind During recording in DV format the data from the IEEE1394 connector is displayed During recording in HDV format the data of internal clock is displayed HDV DV signal input is possible with the GY HD200U GY HD201E Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME DATE menu screen ts See page 92 When the date and time have not been set the following indication appears fee Example 12 2V Indicates remaining battery level in 0 1V steps Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed Select the display method in BATTERY INFO on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen t See page 88 Anton Bauer battery Voltage remaining capacity remaining time IDX Endura battery Voltage remaining capacity Voltage indication Audio Lock indication Displayed when the audio signal from DV recording or playback is locked to the video signal Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor The characters on the status screens can be showed alone in magnified size on the LCD monitor 12 34 34 10 2668 DDO Bebe 63 rin 12 2V
146. BLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of suffi cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of AN important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Cet appareil num rique de la Classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada INFORMATION FOR CANADA RENSEIGNEMENT POUR CANADA This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELEC TRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE This unit should be used with 12V DC only CAUTION To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards do NOT use any other power source NOTE The rating plate serial number plate is on the bottom of the unit CAUTION To prevent electric shock do not open the cabinet No user ser viceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service person nel INFORMATION FOR USA INFORMATION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limit
147. Bauer E model Endura 7 IDX CAUTION Use only the recommended batteries If a heavy battery is used the battery may fall out depend ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used Videocassette to be Used Use JVC s videocassette tapes marked with the DV symbol Mini DV videocassette M DV63HD M DV63PROHD Do not use M DV80 Videocassettes cannot be used upside down Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being com pletely wound as this may damage the tape Rewind it to the beginning before placing a cassette into storage Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and good ventilation where mould does not form After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly it becomes unable to maintain full performance due to an increase in noise caused by dropouts etc Do not continue to use a dirty or damaged tape as this will reduce the rotary head life Videocassette tapes with the DW symbol are provided with a switch on the back to prevent accidental erasure Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording in the tape from being overwritten To record on the tape slide the switch to REC Switch REC SAVE HH For recording and storing videotapes in the best con dition Observe the following instructions for the best recording and storage of videotapes Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes It is
148. C Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 60 30 or Input supported external synchronization signals 24 and signals not supported by GENLOCK are input ts See page 66 Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 and signals not supported by GENLOCK are input DV 60 INVALID A tape recorded in DV 60I DV 24P or DV 24PA format The E model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV 60I DV 24P or DV 24PA format or input into the IEEE1394 con nector in VTR mode DV 501 INVALID DV 25P INVALID A tape recorded in DV 50 or DV 25P format was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on the U model The U model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV 50I or DV 25P format or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode HDV SD60P A tape recorded in HDV SD60P format was played back or GY HD250 GY HD251 cannot play back or input an HDV INVALID input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode SD60P HDV SD50P signal HDV SD50P A tape recorded in HDV SD50P format was played back or INVALID input into IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode INVALID TAPE A computer data tape or a DVC PRO cassette was used Use a MiniDV videocassette LP TAPE INVALID Tried to play back a tape recorded in LP mode GY HD250 GY HD251 cannot record or play back in LP mode NO DV SIGNAL DV signal was not input Set the IEEE1394 switch to DV and input a DV signal NO HDV SIGNAL HDV signal was not input
149. C menu screen Select the TC UB CLOCK item on the TOP MENU screen Select the HEADER REC item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF DHEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK HEADER REC menu screen 2 Setting the HEADER REC menu screen Select the menu item Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the item to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area of the selected item starts blinking Changing the setting value Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting and then press the SHUTTER dial HEADER REC START KEY STOP REC TC DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE BARS TIME 30SEC BLACK TIME 30SEC PAGE BACK Cursor Item Set value E In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA item the blinking digit position moves when the SHUT TER dial is pressed When the SHUTTER dial is rotated the value of the blinking digit changes After all the digits have been set and the SHUTTER dial is pressed EXECUTE starts blinking Press the SHUT TER dial once more to confirm the set value 3 To terminate the setting press the STATUS button BARS TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the color bar signal and test tone 1 kHz is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Initial Sett
150. CD VF 4 4 menu screen t See page 92 CH 2 INPUT CH 2 audio input connector selector switch Selects the CH 2 audio input connector INPUT1 Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector into CH 2 INPUT2 Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector into CH 2 MEMO The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH 1 regardless of the setting AUDIO INPUT Audio input signal selector switch This switch is used to select the input sound signal from INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector LINE Set to this position when connected to audio equipment etc The reference input level is 4 dBs MIC Set to this position when the dynamic micro phone is connected MIC 48V Set to this position when a microphone requiring 48 V power supply phantom microphone etc is connected CAUTION When connecting a component that does not require 48 V power supply make sure that the switch is not set to MIC 48V before the component is connected MEMO You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC 48V in the INPUT1 2 MIC REF item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen us See page 87 16 O INPUT4 INPUT2 INPUT1 INPUT2 audio input connec tors These are audio input connectors for connecting to an external audio device or microphone Set the AUDIO INPUT switch according to the device to be connected Set the CH 2 audio input connector using the CH 2 INPUT switch The CH 2 audio from the set con
151. CU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST This makes depth of field shallower making it easier to focus This button has the same function as the FOCUS ASSIST button in the Top Section 14 ts See LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen on page 86 clamp Attach the cable from the viewfinder here O USER1 2 3 User buttons You can assign camera functions to the USER1 3 but tons Use them to switch shooting conditions depending upon the subject Set them using the USER1 3 items in the SWITCH MODE menu screen ts See page 83 Use this button to preset the time code ts See page 46 MEMO The USER buttons work together with the menu settings When a menu screen is being displayed they also func tion as menu operation buttons 1 See Setting Menu Screens on page 72 OJ SHUTTER Shutter Menu dial Every time this dial is pressed while in the normal screen mode when the menu screen is not displayed the shutter speed switches between on off When this dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal screen mode the shutter speed indicator is shown for about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the view finder The shutter speed is changed when this dial is turned while the shutter speed indicator is shown ts See page 83 When this dial turned upward or downward while the menu screen is displayed the cursor gt also moves upward or downward to allow selection of items in the menu To change the setting val
152. CUS ring Manual focus ring ZOOM lever ring This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever To adjust the zoom manually turn the zoom mode knob to position M OIRIS ring Manual iris ring To activate the auto iris feature set the Iris Mode switch to A O VTR VTR trigger button To start stop shooting RET Return video button You can only monitor the return video signal from the VTR from the viewfinder LCD monitor and video signal connec tor while this button is pressed When the camera control unit is connected you can moni tor the return video signal on the viewfinder while this but ton is pressed You cannot monitor from the LCD monitor or video output terminal When you set the LENS RET item to FOCUS ASSIST in the SWITCH MODE menu screen you can use this button as the FOCUS ASSIST button us See page 86 10 ZOOM servo control lever To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever set the ZOOM knob to S Pressing the W section of this lever increases the angle of the lens for a wider shooting angle Pressing the T section of this lever narrows the lens angle perspective for telephoto shots Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom IRIS mode switch A Activates the auto iris feature M Allows manual iris control Momentary auto iris button When the IRIS mode switch is at M pushing this but ton activates the Auto Iris Function while it is
153. DIO SELECT switch set to AUTO Is the FULL AUTO switch set to ON Cannot initialize format the SD memory card Is the SD memory card write protected ts See page 34 Battery alarm is displayed even if a fully charged battery pack is put in Is the battery pack old Cassette cannot be ejected after the power is turned ON The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient Check the power volt age Time code or user s bits data not displayed Is the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen set to OFF If so set to ON The date and time are not displayed or recorded Is the DISPLAY item on the TIME DATE menu screen set to OFF Set to ON when the data should be displayed and recorded Is the date and time setting made 1 See Setting and Displaying the Date and Time on pages 41 42 Video is not output from the Y Ps PR terminal Is VF SIGNAL on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen set to Y or COMPOSITE Viewfinder is not displayed properly 110 Is VF SIGNAL on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen set to a setting other than RGB How to Display the Hour Meter The drum and fan motor usage times are displayed in the DRUM HOUR item and the FAN HOUR items on the OTH ERS 2 2 menu screen as the hour meters on GY HD250 GY HD251 Use as an estimate for regular maintenance t See page 7 1 Turn the POWER switch ON 2 Press the STATUS button for at le
154. ECT switch on page 13 to MANU When the FULL AUTO switch on page 19 or the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 is set to AUTO AUTO LED lights The audio level controls do not work HDV DV LED In camera mode this lights according to the setting for the video format being shot In VTR mode it lights according to the video format being recorded on tape or the IEEE1394 input video for mat HDV Lights when the format is HDV DV Lights when the format is DV HDV DV Turns off when the format is 1080i MEMO During a system error HDV DV flash alternately us See page 108 Select whether or not to have this light in the FORMAT LED item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen us See page 96 LCD door lock and release knob To open the LCD door move this knob on the direction toward the rear section LCD door LCD monitor door The LCD monitor is located on the inner side of the door The LCD monitor can be viewed when this door is opened The door can be turned to change the orientation of the LCD monitor and it can be rotated so that it can be accommodated in the main body of the camera us See page 50 15 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Left Side Section Q Viewfinder connector 6 pin Connect the cable from the viewfinder here Set the image format for this terminal in VF SIGNAL on the L
155. EE 1394 terminal Slide the IEEE1394 switch to the DV side IEEE1394 cable Status display DTCG 00 00 00 00 TC SLAVE LOCK EXECUTE gt USERI CANCEL gt USER3 9 Check that the time code that is synchronized with the master unit is running 10 Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable 11 The slave unit finally returns to Camera mode MEMO Slave lock cannot be performed in the following instances Slave unit is in CAMERA mode Slave unit is in VTR mode and there is no DV signal The TC GENE switch on the slave unit is not set to FREE HDV format m If slave lock is performed in DV format and is then switched to HDV format frame digit may deviate m If power is turned off slave lock is disabled Perform slave lock operation again m Slave lock cannot be performed for UB User s bit m If the frame rate for the master unit and slave unit is not synchronized it will not run properly Synchronize frame rate before using m If DROP NON DROP is not synchronized it will not run roperly Synchronize DROP NON DROP before using Synchronizing with an Exter nal Time Code Generator Synchronize the built in time code generator with the SMPTE EBU compliant LTC time code which is input from the TC IN terminal After synchronization slave lock the built in time code generator continues to run even if external time code are not input PsPrITC switch GENLOCK AUX IN switch Synchronization
156. EE1394 connector IEEE1394 connector 6 pin provided Enables transfer of digital data to other equipment provided with IEEE1394 connector such as a non linear editing system Power cannot be supplied 1 3 bayonet type lens Built in color bars ARIB multi format color bars SMPTE EBU type Shutter speeds and menus can be selected using a dial making it very easy to use Variable scan shutter There is no flicker when shooting computer screens and other non NTSC PAL format screens Slow shutter Makes it possible to brightly shoot video of dark subjects with little motion by accumulating the images Backup recording function Continuous extended recording is possible by connecting to HDV DV devices CONTENTS ACCESSORIES xrar cide atenshong i n aa ace a aa 2 MAIN FEATURES aiani ma eene aha EnA 3 INTRODUCTION Precautions for Proper Use 0 2 005 Routine and Periodical Maintenance Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape Battery Pack to be Used 0 00 e eee 8 Videocassette to be Used For recording and storing videotapes in the best CONIEON 322 sys Boe eta ae Seth eis Wate ee 8 Condensation AEA A ARNA e eee 9 Characteristic CCD Phenomena 9 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS ZOOM LENS 0140530 BALE Shae Ha En 10 Front Section s 5203 28 r a cba dete Sen ete 11 Rear Section in eos ta Bah oak aiad ena sene ste 12 ECD DOOM EAEE
157. EEE1394 switch Clamp filter CAUTION When connecting the IEEE1394 cable from to Camcorder VCR and other IEEE1394 device make sure the following instructions otherwise the IEEE1394 circuit device may be destroyed Turn the power of both devices OFF and connect the IEEE 1394 cable Do not insert incorrectly in reverse the IEEE1394 cable end to IEEE1394 port of both devices 4p lt D x Do not connect the IEEE1394 cable under the condition of static electricity Turn the power of both devices OFF when changing the IEEE1394 switch from to HDV DV eee 04 EEE 1304 64 Displaying Alarms CHANGE 1394 SWITCH Displayed when the setting for the input output video format from the IEEE1394 connector and the setting for the IEEE1394 switch are different Set the IEEE1394 switch so it matches the video format CHANGE 1394 SWITCH Recording Composite Video Signals from an External Device This device features an AUX IN terminal and can record composite video signals from external devices GENLOCK AUX IN switch GENLOCK AUX IN terminal Connection E Input analog composite video signals from an external device to the GENLOCK AUX IN terminal MEMO Input composite video signals with no jitter Input level 1 0V 0 3V p p Setting m Set this device to camera mode If the VTR indicator is lit press the CAM VTR button and turn off the indicator m Set the GENLOCK AUX IN switc
158. ENT current set tings 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the RESET item and press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE flashes 4 With EXECUTE selected press the SHUTTER dial to reset the settings ZLI RESET FILE RESET FILE EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete If the current menu settings and the factory settings have different video format settings REBOOT is displayed for 3 seconds this device turns off automatically and then turns on REBOOT SYSTEM CHANGE Reboot display When this happens the SUB NAME initial value SCENE is displayed 102 MEMO Even if CAM1 CAM2 CAM3 or CAM4 are reset the cur rent settings are not reset To reset the currently set values select CURRENT Initializing formatting an SD mem ory card Before initializing formatting a card insert and remove the SD memory card with the power to this device OFF Disable write protection on the SD memory card Check that an SD memory card has been inserted into this device 1 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor gt to the FOR MAT SD CARD item and press the SHUTTER dial CANCEL flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial and when EXECUTE flashes press the SHUTTER dial to initialize format the card FILE MANAGE FILE MANAGE FORMAT SD CARD FORMAT SD CARD EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete FILE MANAGE Flashing ERROR SD CARD
159. ER 1 button USER 3 button m SHUTTER dial STATUS button STATUS 1 In Standby or Stop mode press the USER1 button for about 2 seconds while holding down the STATUS button The current time code generator data is displayed in enlarged display mode on the LCD screen The hour digit starts blinking 46 XL M1 2 34 34 10 7X Blink 2 Press the USER2 button to reset all data Data becomes 00 00 00 00 and the hour digit starts blinking 3 Set the time code hour minute second and frame The blinking digit can be set Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the value of the blinking digit Turn the SHUTTER dial up to increase the value and down to decrease the value Press the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking digit Repeat steps and and continue setting for each row 4 Press the USER3 button to confirm the setting data The LCD screen returns to the original screen Presetting User s Bit You can specify the user s bit with a number or character between 0 F CAUTION All digits of user s bit cannot be set to F If all digits are set to F and read user s bit is deemed as undefined during playback Aborting Preset Operation While presetting press the USER1 button while holding down the STATUS button Preset operation stops and the LCD screen returns to the original screen CAUTION m Preset operation is terminated
160. ER LEVEL x TITLE OFF ON x TITLE POSITION x TITLE CLEAR x H PHASE c x SC COARSE 0 90 180 270 x 69 MENU SCREENS Menu Screen Configura tion The Menu Screen consists of multiple layers of menu screens as shown below The menu screen to be set is selected from the TOP MENU in accordance with the function or purpose The items on the menu screens differ with the Camera mode and the VTR mode The contents of set items are stored in this device s memory and are retained even when the power is turned off The FILE MANAGE menu screen can be used to store the menu setting contents on this device or SD memory card m Camera Mode MENU IbviDEO FORMAT CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS SWITCH MODE AUDIOIMIC LCD VF TC UB CLOCK OTHERS FILE MANAGE EXIT TOP MENU screen CAM VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 Z CAMERA OPERATION FRAME RATE 60 30 DPB TAPE AUTO DAE LEVEL NORMAL 10801 CAMERA OFF SET UP 7 5 ALC MAX 188 Prec HDV HD60P PAGE BACK PRESET TEMP 3200K EXECUTE SMOOTH TRANS OFF ASPECT 16 8 BARS HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE PAGE BACK DOWN CON HDV LETTER rf NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 COLOR MATRIX ADJUST MASTER BLACK NORMAL gt a LACK NORMAL PR GAIN NORMAL DETAIL NORMAL STRETCH LEVEL R ROTATION NORMAL VIH BALANCE NORMAL COMPRESS LEVEL G GAIN NORMAL H FREQUENCY MIDDLE WHITE CLIP G ROTATION NOR
161. ER2 USERS LENS RET PAGE BACK Z GAMERA PROCESS 1 2 K NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL MIDDLE HIGH DE CAMERA PROCE PeLack STRETCH LEVEL COMPRESS LEVEL WHITE CLIP KNEE LEVEL REVERSE PICTURE DNR ADVANCED PROCESS PAGE BACK MA OFF COLOR MATRIX STANDARD GAMMA STANDARD LEVEL NORMAL COLOR GAIN NORMAL WHITE BALANCE SKIN COLOR ADJUST PAGE BACK TOP MENU screen CAM AUDIO MIC TEST TONE MIC WIND CUT AUDIO REF LEVEL INPUT MIC REF INPUT2 MIC REF AUDIO MODE AUDIO LIMITER NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK LODIVF 1 4 DZEBRA F NO IRIS IND FILTER SAFETY ZONE CENTER MARK FOCUS ASSIST COLOR LEVEL NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK mia OFF OFF 2098 504B 504B 48K ON NORMAL BLUE MIDDLE ERNAL 00 00 00 CUTE 00 00 00 CUTE INT TC PRESET 00 EXE UB PRESET o0 EXE UB REC ON DROP FRAME DRO To DUPLI OFF TC DUPLI OFF F HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK AUDIOIMIC 2 2 SEARCH AUDIO DV ON PB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK LODIVF 2 4 I gt LCD MIRROR MODE NORMAL NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK 2 2 TIME DATE OFF DATE STYLE TIME STYLE SEC DISPLAY TIME SHIFT OFF CLOCK ADJUST PAGE BACK CAMERA OPERATION NORMAL 1808 3200K SMOOTH TRANS BARS PAGE BACK COLOR MATRIX ADJUST PR GAIN NORMAL R NORMAL 6 NORMAL 6 NORMAL 3 3 NORMAL NORMAL AGE BACK
162. ESET CANCEL l gt sb H PHASE o j e SDI OUT CHAR ON PAGE BACK HD H PHASE o LONG PAUSE TIME SMIN DRUM HOUR ooooooH SC COARCE o ALARM VR LEVEL HIGH FAN HOUR 000000H SC FINE o FRONT TALLY BLINK PAQE BACK BACK TALLY BLINK FORMAT LED ow GENLOCK NEXT page ft PAGE BACK FILE MANAGE LOAD FILE DLOAD FILE gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE 1 L store FILE H LOAD EXECUTE RESET FILE PAGE BACK FORMAT SD CARD CANCEL PAGE BACK STORE FILE gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE 1 EDIT SUB NAME SCENE 1 STORE OVER WRITE PAGE BACK ne RESET FILE oer DSELECT CAMI SCENE 1 RESET EXECUTE PAGE BACK 74 Setting Menu Screens Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the viewfinder screen If the ANALOG OUT CHAR item or SDI OUT CHAR item on the OTHERS 1 2 screen is set to ON the menu screen can also be viewed on a monitor connected to the video signal output connector 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Set the mode of the GY HD250 GY HD251 with the CAM VTR button Camera mode or VTR mode 3 Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer The TOP MENU screen appears USER1 USER2 USER3 button Ca a Ps oe an z SHUTTER dial Nosen usenz So mn Mili an A S ME YILG 0 stilus g ON STATUS button Cursor Menu screen f MENU DWIDEO FORMAT CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS SWITCH MODE AUDIO MIC LCD VF TC
163. EXECUTE starts blinking Press the SHUT TER dial once more to confirm the set value 3 To terminate the setting press the STATUS button Executing the HEADER REC Function The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen should be set to STOP REC 1 Load the cassette and engage the Record Standby mode or the Stop mode 60 2 While pressing the STOP button press the REC VTR trigger button The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of the tape After HEADER REC recording is performed for the specified duration only the Record Standby mode is engaged automatically During HEADER REC recording HEADER REC is shown blinking on the LCD monitor and in the view finder SALAATTI J HEADER REC ZIPTLLVVANN During HEADER REC The menu screen is not displayed during HEADER REC recording 3 After HEADER REC recording is completed and the Record Standby mode is engaged normal recording starts when you press the REC VTR trigger button When the TC GENE switch is set to either REC or REGEN the time code value at the start of the HEADER REC menu screen MEMO To stop during HEADER REC operation press the REC VTR trigger button or the STOP button The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened dur ing HEADER REC recording HEADER REC operation is accepted even during load ing of the cassette tape The test tone
164. FF STANDARD Sets a normal color matrix CINEMA Sets a color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen ADJUST When STANDARD or CINEMA is set for the COLOR MATRIX item a color matrix can be set individually Press the SHUTTER dial to call up the COLOR MATRIX ADJUST menu screen ts See COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen on page 81 GAMMA Adjusts the gamma curve to determine how black is rendered OFF No gamma curve correction STANDARD Sets a normal gamma curve CINEMA Sets to appear movie like when viewing on a TV screen FILM OUT Sets to a setting for recording onto film MEMO When this item is set to OFI is displayed for the LEVEL item and it cannot be selected LEVEL When STANDARD CINEMA or FILM OUT is set for the GAMMA item a gamma curve can be set individually Increase the number Enhances the tonality of the black However the tonality in the bright areas deteriorates Decrease the number Enhances the tonality in the bright areas However the tonality in the black areas deterio rates Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 COLOR GAIN Adjusts the video signal color level OFF Sets the video to black and white Increase the number Makes the colors more dense Decrease the number Makes the colors less dense Settings OFF MIN 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 MAX 10 WHITE BALANCE When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial
165. HD200U GY HD200E GY HD201E GY HD250U GY HD251E GY HD100 101 series GY HD110 111 series 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to DV 2 Set to Camera mode 3 Set the recording format to DV 60 or DVS5OI 4 Set the TC GENE switch to FREE Slave unit GY HD200U GY HD201E 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to DV 2 Set to VTR mode 3 Check that the camera image from the master unit is input 4 Set the TC GENE switch to FREE and the TC DISPLAY switch to TC 5 Set to STOP mode or EJECT mode 6 Press the STOP button for 1 second The DV input time code data from the IEEE1394 termi nal is displayed in the status display When status is in magnified size characters are displayed 7 Press the USER1 button to begin slave lock To skip slave lock press the USER3 button and clear the status display 48 Slave unit IEEE1394 terminal Slide the IEEE1394 switch to the DV side IEEE1394 cable Status display DTCG 00 00 00 00 TC SLAVE LOCK EXECUTE gt USER1 CANCEL gt USER3 8 Check that the time code that is synchronized with the master unit is running 9 Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable 10 The slave unit finally returns to Camera mode MEMO WE Slave lock cannot be performed in the following instances Slave unit is in CAMERA mode Slave unit is in VTR mode and there is no DV signal The TC GENE switch on the slave unit is
166. HIGH Displays the focal area wider than MIDDLE NEXT PAGE When you display the LCD VF 2 4 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 1 SAFETY ZONE and CENTER MARK will not be displayed when this device is in VTR mode PLAY STL FWD REV 88 89 MENU SCREENS LCD VF 2 4 Menu Screen The LCD VF 2 4 menu screen can only be set in camera mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings LCD MIRROR MODE Sets the image display method when the LCD monitor is in counterview position NORMAL Image is displayed without inverting MIRROR Inverted image is displayed NORMAL MIRROR is set when the SHUTTER dial is pressed MEMO MIRROR setting is disabled when color bar is displayed or status is in magnified size ts See Outputting Color Bars on page 105 ts See Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor on page 29 NEXT PAGE When you display the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK 90 When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen LCD VF 3 4 Menu Screen 1 2 screen is displayed in the VTR mode Item VIDEO FORMAT Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Selects wh
167. HUTTER dial and select EXECUTE to switch to skin color detection mode 4 Shoot so that the color area you want to detect within the detection area frame is input To confirm the detection area press the SHUTTER dial and set SKIN COLOR DET to STOP The frame on the screen is the detection area for the skin detail function The color within the detection area is recognized as the color that the skin detail function will use If the color within the detection area is not recognized as the color that the skin detail function will use ERROR is displayed on the screen SKIN COLOR ADJUST Fs i Detection _____ ate ERROR DSKIN COLOR DET EXECUTE SKIN COLOR RANGE NORMAL PAGE BACK SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen presenta tion Color presenta tion SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen 5 If you want to change the range of colors recognized with the skin color detection function follow the steps below Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the SKIN COLOR RANGE item and press the SHUTTER dial The setting area flashes and can be changed Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow the color range Set the range as you check the color display 7To confirm the color range press the SHUTTER dial The setting returns to its lit state 6 To stop the SKIN COLOR ADJUST function turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the PAGE BACK item and press th
168. HUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the TC UB CLOCK item and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the camera body The TC UB CLOCK menu screen appears 4 Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the TIME DATE item and then press the SHUTTER dial The TIME DATE menu screen appears Set the DISPLAY item on the TIME DATE menu screen to ON TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC DTIME DATE PAGE BACK 5 Make settings on the TIME DATE menu screen This Z includes display style etc TIME DATE menu screen TIME DATE DISPLAY ON DISPLAY MODE BARS CAM DISPLAY STYLE DATELITAME DDATE STYLE MM DD YY TIME STYLE 24HOUR SEC DISPLAY ON TIME SHIFT OFF CLOCK ADJUST PAGE BACK DATE STYLE Selects the style for displaying the date YY MM DD Year month day MM DD YY Month day year DD MMIYY Day month year TIME STYLE The time can be set to display as a 12 hour or 24 hour clock system SEC DISPLAY To select whether or not indication of seconds should be displayed on the screen TIME SHIFT Adds time to the built in clock time compensation and displays it The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the item to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting
169. ISABLE 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE 30SEC 30SEC Just 06 06 06 09 33 71 MENU SCREENS Setting Menu Screens Make the settings while observing the LCD monitor or the viewfinder screen If the ANALOG OUT CHAR item on the OTHERS 1 2 screen is set to ON the menu screen can also be viewed on a monitor connected to the video signal output connector 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Set the mode of this device with the CAM VTR button Camera mode or VTR mode 3 Press the STATUS button for 1 second or longer The TOP MENU screen appears USER1 USER2 USER3 button SHUTTER dial Mela Es SHUTTER ND FILTES ayia fo STATUS button Cursor Menu screen i MENU VIDEO FORMAT CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS SWITCH MODE AUDIO MIC LCD VF TC UB CLOCK OTHERS FILE MANAGE EXIT TOP MENU screen 72 4 Select the menu screen to be set Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the menu screen to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The selected menu screen appears Item Setting VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 FRAME RATE 60 30 10801 CAMERA OFF REC HDV HD60P EXECUTE ASPECT 16 9 HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE PB TAPE AUTO DOWN CON HDV SQUEEZE NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen 5 Select the menu item on the menu screen Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the
170. Is the date and time setting made 0 See Setting and Displaying the Date and Time on pages 41 42 106 How to Display the Hour Meter The drum and fan motor usage times are displayed in the DRUM HOUR item and the FAN HOUR items on the OTH ERS 2 2 menu screen as the hour meters on this device Use as an estimate for regular maintenance t See page 7 1 Turn the POWER switch ON 2 Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second to display the TOP MENU screen 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the OTHERS item and press the SHUTTER dial The OTHERS 1 2 menu screen is displayed 4 Select the NEXT PAGE item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen and press the SHUTTER dial The OTHERS 2 2 menu screen is displayed OTHERS 2 2 menu screen OTHERS 2 2 D1394 REC TRIG SERIES BACK SPACE HDV P 1394 DR HD100 A OFF OFF MENU ALL RESET CANCEL PAGE BACK DRUM HOUR 000200H Drum usage FAN HOUR 003200H hours h Fan motor usage hours h m OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen DRUM HOUR item Displays the drum usage hours FAN HOUR item Displays the fan motor usage hours 5 To return to the normal screen display do one of the fol lowing Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen select the EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen and press the SHUTTER dial OTHERS Specifications General Power requirements DC 12 V 1 9 A Power consumption Approx 23 W in the Record m
171. MAL V FREQUENCY HIGH KNEE m 8 GAIN NORMAL SKIN DETECT OFF LEVEL ee B ROTATION NORMAL LEVEL ms REVERSE PICTURE OFF PAGE BACK NEXT PAGE ONR o PAGE BACK ADVANCED PROCESS LENS RET PAGE BACK AUDIO MODE NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK AUDIO MIC T TEST TONE MIC WIND CUT AUDIO REF LEVEL INPUT MIG REF INPUT2 MIC REF AUDIO LIMITER 222 SWITCH MODE STEP NONE TE 908 18dB NONE NONE NONE PAGE BACK ADVANCED PROCESS WHITE BALANCE Pc INEM A OFF DWHITE PAINT lt R gt NORMAL COLOR MATRIX STANDARD WHITE PAINT lt B gt NORMAL ADJUST SHADING PRESET GAMMA STANDARD LEVEL R HEEE LEVEL NORMAL LEVEL G ws COLOR GAIN NORMAL LEVEL B Bes WHITE BALANCE PAGE BACK SKIN COLOR ADJUST PAGE BACK 70 AUDIOIMIC 2 2 AUDIO MONITOR MIX FAS AUDIO AUTO SEARCH AUDIO DV ON PB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK LODIVE 2 4 LCD MIRROR MODE NORMAL NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK SKIN COLOR ADJUST LODIVF 1 4 pzeaaa Tion ERORIS ino OFF Fitter oF SAFETY zone OFF ERTER MARK FOCUS ASSIST NORMAL foron Brue lever ini Dove NEXT Base PAGE BACK TevuBToLocK FRES 60 80730 00 EXECUTE us PRESET 0090 90 00 Execute TERET oH DRO FARNE SGP Te P RLI OFF TG DUPE ore Se RET Tie DATE PAGE BACK oTneRS 2 I gt anatoa our CHA
172. MEMO This device uses microcomputers It may not operate properly if there is external static or interference If this happens turn the power off and then on again 24 INHIBIT CHANGE FRAME RATE MENU The FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 or 60 30 and a tape recorded in 24 frame is played back or it is input into the IEEE1394 port in VTR mode Display Status Action 60 30 INHIBIT The FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 or 24 and a tape re Sets the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu CHANGE FRAME _ corded in 60 30 frame is played back or it is input into the screen to match the frames RATE MENU IEEE1394 port in VTR mode us See page 74 50 25 INHIBIT The FRAME RATE item is set to 60 30 or 24 and a tape re CHANGE FRAME _ corded in 50 25 frame or it is input into the IEEE1394 port RATE MENU in VTR mode DV 60 INVALID DV 24P INVALID DV 24PA INVALID A tape recorded in DV 601 DV 24P or DV 24PA format was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on the E model The E model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV 60I DV 24P or DV 24PA format or input into the IEEE1394 con nector in VTR mode DV 501 INVALID DV 25P INVALID A tape recorded in DV 50I or DV 25P format was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on the U model The U model cannot play back tapes recorded in DV 501 or DV 25P format or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode HDV
173. MEMO When this switch is set to TC video is not output from the Y PB PR terminal IEEE1394 IEEE1394 switch Set according to the image format of the input output sig nal and playback signal of the IEEE1394 terminal HDV Set to this for HDV format DV __ Set to this for DV format REMOTE REMOTE terminal Round 6 pin Some functions of this camera can be controlled exter nally Connect to a remote control unit RM LP55 RM LP57 ts See Connect a Remote Control Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 on page 71 GENLOCK AUX IN GENLOCK AUX IN terminal BNC e Input synchronization signals in this terminal when externally synchronizing camera images or playback images Synchronization signal BB Black Burst signal of SD or Tri sync signal of HD Input composite video signals to record images from an external device with this device Select the signal to input with the GENLOCK AUX IN switch ts See Using GENLOCK Functions on page 66 ts See Recording Composite Video Signals from an External Device on page 65 HD SD SDI HD SD SDI output terminal BNC Outputs HD SD SDI Serial Digital Interface signals Out puts embedded audio signals as digital audio The sampling frequency for embedded audio is 48 kHz In addition the time code for the built in time code genera tor and playback time code are output ts See pages 20 and 21 for the signals that are enabled MEMO Set whether or not to outpu
174. Master Unit Screen Adjustment 00 00 0 000 Viewfinder Adjustment n Back Focus Adjustment 0 00000 White Balance Adjustment 2 00 White Balance Adjustment 20 Full Auto White Balance FAW White Shading Adjustment 2 0 SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Setting the Video Format 00 Setting the FRAME RATE Item s Camera Settings on n oT RE EEA AEO Screen Size 4 3 16 9 Mode Selection Audio Input Signal Selection 0 Selecting the CH 2 channel input connector Selecting the audio signal input 55 Adjusting Audio during Recording 55 Monitoring Audio during Recording 56 SHOOTING OPERATION Basic Recording Operation 2 005 57 If the Record Standby Mode Continues 58 Checking Recorded Contents in Record Standby Mode Recording Check Function HEADER REC Function 6 0000000 eee eee PLAYBACK MODE Playback Procedure 0000 c eee eee 61 Fast Forward Rewind 00 00 cece eeu 61 SOAK 2 coc EE Radia denies Bate ee Set akan Ss ote 61 Outputting Audio aer A hee tte eee 62 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Connecting the Video Signal Cables 63 Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable 63 Dubbing with AV Devices 02
175. NT lt R gt lt B gt on the WHITE BALANCE menu screen Available only when this switch is set to A or B ts See WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen on page 82 POWER Power ON OFF switch Switch that turns the power ON OFF When the power is OFF POFF is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder Wait at least 5 seconds if you need to turn the power on again REC REC trigger button start stop recording Start and stop recording using this button This works together with the REC trigger button on the top and the lens VTR trigger button When SPLIT is set for the 1394 REC TRIGGER item on the OTHERS 2 2 menu screen this button becomes the start stop recording button for an external device t See page 94 t See Backup Recording on page 67 CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 Audio level con trols and AUTO LED Allow you to adjust the audio level for the CH 1 and CH 2 audio channels e To use these controls set the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 to MANU When the FULL AUTO switch on page 19 or the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 is set to AUTO AUTO LED lights The audio level controls do not work HDV DV LED In camera mode this lights according to the setting for the video format being shot In VTR mode it lights according to the video format being recorded on tape or the IEEE1394 input video for mat HDV Lights when the format is HDV
176. NTS ACCESSORIES 202000 dee ied ane eae eases 2 MAIN FEATURES sane haa iae a i dye Wane ace 3 INTRODUCTION Precautions for Proper Use 0020000 6 Routine and Periodical Maintenance 7 Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape 7 Battery Pack to be Used 00 00000000 8 Videocassette to be Used 0c cece ee eee 8 For recording and storing videotapes in the best condition 8 Condensation 3 seia cca oie oA ihea a wee eee 9 Characteristic CCD Phenomena 9 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS ZOOM Lens FRONESOCHON aa ake les d Eea E DE oye SENNA Roar SOCON oori apia Erda Seba oui ADASA ECD DOD an ind dated dated abated aaysvelens shaded EE EAr Right Side Section 36 02 hon Wea ie Ga eateries Left Side Section TOP SEN cia Mie scakig aan ds alvinns el whee Recording and Image Output Formats 20 Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder 22 PANS SCONE 57386 oe ioe cal anders ia wafers n aa 22 Status Screens in the Camera Mode 23 Status Screen in VTR MODE 5 28 Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor 29 Auto White Balance Indication Camera mode only 30 Menu Setting Screen 00 0000 30 Alarm Message Display 2 00 30 Safety Zone Indication Camera mode only 30 Switching between the LCD Scre
177. O menu screen to ON Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may freeze during the search Outputting Audio Setting Confirm that the GY HD250 GY HD251 is in the VTR mode VTR indicator On sy v m iE MONITOR VTR indicator SELECT switch SHUTTER dial STATUS button CAMIVTR button AUDIO menu screen AUDIO TEST TONE ON AUDIO REF LEVEL 20dB AUDIO MONITOR MIX SEARCH AUDIO DV ON DPB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK m Earphone terminal output audio Audio output is as shown in the table below depending on the MONITOR SELECT switch and AUDIO MONITOR and PB AUDIO CH DV settings on the AUDIO menu screen PB AUDIO CH DV MONITOR SELECT AUDIO MONITOR L R CH1 1 Display the AUDIO menu screen Select the AUDIO item on the TOP MENU screen 2 Set the AUDIO menu screen PB AUDIO CH DV Items CH1 2 To reproduce the sound CH 1 CH 2 recorded during shooting MIX To reproduce the sound recorded during shooting CH 1 CH 2 and the after recorded sound on CH 3 and CH 4 simultaneously CH3 4 To reproduce the sound after recorded on CH 3 and CH 4 AUDIO OUT connector CH 1 CH 2 CH1 CH2 CH1 CH3 CH2 CH4 CH3 CH4 For HDV format audio is output to CH1 and CH2 no matter the settings PB AUDIO CH DV 3 Either of the following operations returns you
178. OCK switch on the handle set to ON Is the switch on cassette set to REC If it is set to SAVE set it to REC The Camera mode has not been selected The VTR indicator does not light While the VTR indicator lights press the MODE switch upward to turn on the CAM indicator Camera image does not appear on LCD monitor or in viewfind er The Camera mode has not been selected The VTR indicator does not light While the VTR indicator lights camera image will not be output Press the CAM VTR switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator Image shown on LCD monitor or in viewfinder is dark or blurred Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen Is the ND filter knob set to 2 Is the iris closed Is the shutter speed too fast Is the viewfinder cable correctly connected Playback does not start when the play button is pressed In the Camera mode is STOP indicated as the VTR operation mode indica tor When STBY is indicated press the STOP button to display STOP Cannot play back Is the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen set to a setting oth er than AUTO If this menu item and the tape format do not match the tape cannot be played back Cannot input an HDV DV signal Is this device in VTR mode Is the VTR indicator lit Is the IEEE1394 switch set correctly Noise interferes with playback video Video head may
179. OFF No connection or SYNCRO Power OFF approx 1 second See Note 4 SPLIT SERIES OFF Connectedand SYNCRO Power ON SPLIT SERIES OFF No connection or SYNCRO Power OFF SPLIT SERIES See Note 1 approx 3 seconds See Note 2 See Note 3 approx 1 second approx 1 second Note 1 REC start signal will be sent 3 seconds after pressing REC trigger button Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance Note 2 REC start signal will be sent just after pressing REC trigger button Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance Note 3 In this mode the IEEE1394 stream is discontinuous during internal VCR back space editing when the REC trigger is operated This may result in breaks in the recording on tape on an external recorder In the case of HDD recording this may result in this device staying in REC PAUSE or divided files Note 4 If HD SD SDI OUT on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen is set to ON the internal VCR start delay becomes approximately 3 seconds 97 MENU SCREENS OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen Cont d This is not displayed in VTR mode Item DR HD100 A OFF Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Selects whether or not to turn OFF the DR HD100 HDD unit by FOCUS enhancements when this device is turned OFF OFF Power does not turn OFF ON Power turns
180. ON NE PAS EXPOSER L APPAREIL A L HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE Ce magn toscope ne doit tre utilis que sur du cou rant direct en 12V ATTENTION Afin d eviter tout resque d incendie ou d lectrocu tion ne pas utillser d autres sources d alimentation lectrique REMARQUE La plaque signal tique plaque du num ro des rie est situ e sur le cadre inf rieur de l unit Due to design modifications data given in this instruction book are subject to possible change without prior notice The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed close to the apparatus THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CON DITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFER ENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION Worded CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type II Safety Precautions Cont d FOR EUROPE This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection requirements of the corresponding European Directives This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and can be used in the following environments residential area in houses commercial and light industry
181. ONI Error If there is an error Check items and in Before initializing formatting a card FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION How to Use Skin Detail This function suppresses edge sharpening in the skin color areas of the video signal enabling velvety smooth skin tones Setting the skin detail function color and range SHUTTER dial STATUS button 1 Display the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen In menu setting procedure TOP MENU screen CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 gt CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 Select ADVANCED PRO CESS item CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 BLACK NORMAL STRETCH LEVEL COMPRESS LEVEL WHITE CLIP 108 KNEE AUTO LEVEL 2 2 2 2 otitis DNR OFF Cursor gt ADVANCE PROCESS PAGE BACK CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the SKIN COLOR ADJUST item and press the SHUTTER dial The SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen is displayed The entire screen becomes black and white and only the areas recognized by the skin detail function are displayed in color ADVANCED PROCESS CINELIKE OFF COLOR MATRIX STANDARD ADJUST GAMMA STANDARD LEVEL NORMAL COLOR GAIN NORMAL WHITE BALANCE DSKIN COLOR ADJUST PAGE BACK ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen 3 Move the cursor gt to the SKIN COLOR DET item press the SHUTTER dial and select EXECUTE to switch to skin color detection mode 4 Shoot so that the color
182. P 3 Load the recorded videocassette correctly When the videocassette is loaded this device enters the Stop mode 4 Open the operation cover on the upper section of this device Slide the operation cover to the side to open 5 Press the PLAY STILL button Playback starts 6 Press the PLAY STILL button to stop playback tempo rarily This device enters the still mode 7 To re start playback press the PLAY STILL button 8 To stop playback or the still mode press the STOP but ton MEMO Inthe VTR mode the camera image is not output on the LCD monitor in the viewfinder or through the video out put connector When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued for a while this device automatically switches to the tape protect mode Tape protect mode Drum rotation is stopped in order to protect the tape Noise may appear in the picture in the still mode When the automatic tracking function is activated at the start of the playback mode digital noise may appear in the playback image This device does not allow manual tracking adjustment When playing back a tape that was recorded on another unit digital noise may appear during playback Following loading of the tape the built in head cleaner will emit a sound while operating This does not indicate a malfunction The data recorded for the date and time or time code on the tape can be shown on the screen To enable or dis able the
183. P does not move to this item when this device is recording LCD VF Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder and for adjustments of the picture quality of LCD monitor Camera mode It consists of four screens VTR mode It consists of two screens TC UB CLOCK Displays a menu screen for setting the time code user s bit data date and time The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display style are set here The TIME DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST screen can be displayed through the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording OTHERS Displays a menu screen for setting other functions and to display the hour meter It consists of two screens FILE MANAGE Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen Saves the menu screen settings as a file on this device or an SD memory card or reads the menu screen settings saved in the file It is also possible to reset the menu settings to default settings or initialize format an SD memory card ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 96 The cursor P does not move to this item when VTR is activated EXIT The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is aligned with this item 73 MENU SCREENS VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 Menu Screen The VIDEO FORMAT menu screen consists of
184. PEN F2 F2 8 F4 F5 6 F8 F11 F16 CLOSE FILTER OFF ND1 1 4ND ND2 1 16ND It is not displayed when the lens is removed For some lenses no display appears ZEBRA 60 70 70 80 85 95 OVER 95 OVER 100 The indication can be switched ON OFF with the F NO IRIS IND item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen sa REMAIN Displays the remaining tape minutes ts See page 86 u i A Filter position indication Indicates the current filter position AUDIO pi ar MANUAL ned ey and the audio level adjustment mode Ex 32K CH1 A CH2 M A for AUTO No display FILTER OFF 7 z i ND1 FILTER ND1 1 4ND When SHUTTER DISP on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen is set to DEG the shutter display for the frame rate in 24p or 25p mode is degrees ND2 FILTER ND2 1 16ND Indication Indication Contents The indication can be switched ON OFF with the FILTER item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen SHUTTER When STEP is selected ts See page 86 360 0 180 0 172 8 150 0 144 0 135 0 120 0 105 0 90 0 75 0 60 0 45 0 30 0 22 5 11 2 Audio Lock Indication Displayed when the audio signal is locked to the video signal When VARIABLE is selected 24p 0 82 to 359 4 25p 0 85 to 359 4 STATUS 3 Displays a list of setting statuses for USER1 2 and 3 as well as LENS RET item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen t See page 83 Events are not displayed while these statuses are being displ
185. R ON CONS PAUSE TIME SMIN ALARM VA LEVEL HIGH PRONT TALLY BLINK BACK TALLY BLINK Lon e FORMAT LED on PSeLecT CAMI SCENE NEXT RAGE LOAD EXECUTE PAGE BACK PAGE BACK arene e gt seLecT CAMI SCENE iGAD ER CLE mene tort SUB NAME SCENE stoe enen STORE OVERWALTE FORMAT SD CARD CANCEL PAGE EROK PAGE BACK ese e gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE i RESET EXECUTE PAGE BACK TIME DATE bo isPLay OFF DISPLAY MODE SSS DISPLAY STYLE DATE STYL TIME STYL SEC DISPLAY ite TIME SHIFT OFF CLOCK ADJUST SKIN COLOR DET STOP SKIN COLOR RANGE NORMAL PAGE BACK LCO VF 3 4 VIDEO FORMAT ON TAPE REMAIN ON To uB ON AUDIO ON BATTERY INFO VOLTAGE SHUTTER DISP SEC NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK LODIVF 4 4 DL co vF ON LCD CONTRAST NORMA VF CONTRAST NORMAL BLACKAWHI TE COLOR PAGE BACK PAGE BACK OTHERS 2 P1394 REC TRIG BACK SPACE HDV DR HD100 A OFF MENU ALL RE PAGE BACK DRUM HOUR FAN HOUR HEADER REC DSTART KEY DISABLE TC DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE BARS TIME 30SEC BLACK TIME 30SEC PAGE BACK CLOCK ADJUST L lpoaTe MMiDDIYY 06 06 06 TIME 09 33 PAGE BACK m VTR Mode IEEE1394 Input Mode HDV DV signal input is possible with the GY HD200U GY HD201E VIDEO FORMAT AME RATE 60 30 e gt HDv PB OUTPUT NATIVE DOWN CON HDV LETTER PB TAPE SET UP PAGE BACK AUTO 7 5
186. SEC SHUTTER 1 6 1 6 25 1 7 5 1 12 1 12 5 1 15 1 24 1 25 1 30 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 10000 Variable shutter speed value was changed T When SHUTTER DISP is set to SEC V SHUTTER 1 24 01 to 1 10489 5 Shutter was turned OFF SHUTTER OFF 1 4 Shutter speed value was changed When SHUTTER DISP is set to DEG SHUTTER 360 0 180 0 172 8 150 0 144 0 135 0 120 0 105 0 90 0 75 0 60 0 45 0 30 0 22 5 11 2 Variable shutter speed value was changed When SHUTTER DISP is set to DEG 0 to 360 White balance value was changed Example WHITE BAL A 3200K Numeric value Any of 2300 2500 2800 3000 3200 3400 3700 4300 5200 5600 6500 8000 FILTER value was changed FILTER OFF FILTER ND 1 1 4ND FILTER ND 2 1 16ND AE LEVEL value was changed AE LEVEL 3 2 1 NORMAL 1 2 3 BLACK gain value was changed z BLACK NORMAL BLACK STRETCH 1 2 3 4 5 BLACK COMPRESS 1 2 3 4 5 PRESET TEMP value was changed 2 3 WHITE BAL PRST 3200K WHITE BAL PRST 5600K HEADER REC is running HEADER REC FOCUS ASSIST was turned ON OFF FOCUS ASSIST ON FOCUS ASSIST OFF Time code was set to zero reset TC ZERO PRESET ts See page 45 REC LOCK switch was turned ON OFF REC SWITCH LOCKED REC SWITCH UNLOCKED 1 See page 18 REC LOCK switch AREC
187. Set component RGB or Y C signals for the output image signals of the Y PB PR terminal Only for DV format 5 Set the audio output t See page 63 Set the AUDIO menu screen t See page 87 AUDIO menu screen AUDIO TEST TONE ON AUDIO REF LEVEL 20dB AUDIO MONITOR MIX SEARCH AUDIO DV ON DPB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK PB AUDIO CH DV item Set the audio channel to be output 6 Insert the videocassettes GY HD250 GY HD251_ Insert the recorded videocas sette Insert the videocassette to be dubbed to T Press the PLAY STILL button on the GY HD250 GY HD251 to start playback 8 Start recording on the recording unit For details see the instructions to the unit used for recording Recording unit 9 When dubbing is completed Stop recording on the recording unit and then press the STOP button on the GY HD250 GY HD251 to stop play back 67 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS HDV DV Dubbing Connecting the GY HD250 GY HD251 to another video com ponent equipped with HDV DV connector IEEE1394 stan dard using a IEEE1394 cable optional enables dubbing of digital signals with high picture quality and high quality sound Using the GY HD250 GY HD251 as the playback unit Dubbing to another video 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device DV When dubbing in DV format HDV When dubbing in HDV format 2 Connect the IEEE1394 cable 3 Turn both devices on 4 Set thi
188. Standard Defini tion video on Mini DV videocassettes HDV format can record and play back HD High Definition video on Mini DV videocassettes There are two types of recording formats within HDV format HDV 720p 720 effective scan lines progressive scan HDV 1080i 1080 effective scan lines interlaced scan GY HD250 GY HD251 supports HDV 720p format HDV 720p HDV and OV are trademarks of Sony Corporation and Victor Company of Japan Limited 24p mode shooting function n HDV format it records in 24p mode t uses a 2 3 2 3 pulldown when recording to tape and con verts the images to 60 frames Component output is con verted to 60 frames during playback as well 24p DV format video uses a 2 3 2 3 pulldown 24p Mode A 2 3 3 2 pulldown 24p Advanced Mode is also supported t can shoot with the same number of frames as movie film Tapes recorded in the DVCAM format can only be played back simple playback Recording in the DVCAM format is not possible DVCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation 60 Hz 50 Hz HD or HDTV signals Supports both 60 Hz 50 Hz HD or HDTV signals You can select this in a menu screen Cross convert video output You can output converted video from the video output con nectors You can select this in a menu screen Outputs composite component Y C separate and RGB signals as analog video in DV format Outputs composite and component signals in HDV format Features HD SD SDI output
189. T Improper object Insufficient illumination AUTO WHITE A ERROR OVER LIGHT Excessive illumination CAUTION Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects such as metal etc as this may result in improper white balance adjustment The FAW Full Auto White balance function cannot pro vide optimum white balance with a subject outside the FAW adjustment range for example when it contains only a single color or not enough white color The accuracy of the FAW Full Auto White balance is inferior to that of the Auto white balance e When the power is turned on with the FAW mode selected it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW adjust ment to be completed Do not shoot within this interval Full Auto White Balance FAW The FAW function adjusts the white balance value automati cally as the lighting condition changes This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in and out of places under different lighting conditions m Setting procedure The FAW function can be activated with the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen The FAW function can be allocated to one of the white balance switching switches A B or PRESET t See page 83 51 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION White Shading Adjustment It is necessary to perform this adjustment to the camera when attaching a lens that is different from the previously attached lens Even
190. T button and then take out the cassette 5702 Tape end sensor error Operation stops All opera Switch the power OFF and then switch TAPE END DET ERROR tions are rejected it back ON However the tape may be 5802 Tape beginning sensor error damaged depending on the circum TAPE BEGIN DET ERROR stances Please consult the person in root oman aor Reker omen erste DRUM MOTOR FAILURE A service agent 7101 Capstan rotation error CAP MOTOR FAILURE 7202 7203 Supply reel rotation error SUPPLY REEL FAILURE 7302 7303 Take up reel rotation error TAKE UP REEL FAILURE 7305 Take up reel rotation error when un TAKE UP REEL FAILURE loading 8000 Tape problem detected EMERGENCY TAPE TURN POWER OFF TURN BACK ON LATER System error when power is turned on HDV DV LED VTR indicator and TALLY lamp flash Only POWER switch operation is accepted Turn off the power and let this device sit for sometime before turning it back on 104 m TALLY lamp Blinks when remaining battery power or tape is low Only in Camera mode Blinking Pattern Remaining Battery Tape Slow blinking once per sec Remaining battery power is low Remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes Fast blinking four times per sec m Alarm Sound Tape has run out Irregularity has occurred in the VTR When remaining battery power becomes low a warning sound is output from the monito
191. UB CLOCK OTHERS FILE MANAGE EXIT TOP MENU screen 4 Select the menu screen to be set Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the menu screen to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The selected menu screen appears Item Setting VIDEO FORMATITLZ 6 FRAME RATE 0 30 10801 CAMERA OFF REC HDV HD60P EXECUTE ASPECT 16 9 HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE PB TAPE AUTO DOWN CON HDV SQUEEZE NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen 5 Select the menu item on the menu screen Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the item to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area of the selected item starts blinking and the setting can now be made 6 Change the setting Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area stops blinking and the setting is entered m To change multiple items repeat the procedures in steps 5 and 6 above T Return to the TOP MENU screen Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the PAGE BACK item and then press the SHUTTER dial m To change settings on other menu screens repeat the procedures in steps 4 to 7 above Em To save the set contents in FILE select the FILE MAN AGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving to file us See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 100 8 To return to the normal scree
192. USE status CAUTION Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV or DV Start recording after making sure that both devices are properly connected If the RET button is pressed during backup recording output from the IEEE1394 terminal is stopped the image is switched to the image recorded on this device inter rupting the backup recording image Operation Start and stop of recording on the backup unit takes place in accordance with the operation of the REC VTR trigger button on the master unit Depending on this device or the backup unit the image audio and or time code may deviate from what they should be at the points where the recording is started or stopped MEMO When the backup recording is started the TRIGGER TO DV or TRIGGER TO HDV indication is shown on the LCD or in the viewfinder for approx 3 seconds When the Series Recording function of BR HD50 is used this device s 1394 REC TRIG item should be set to OFF If the backup device is equipped with a feature to record time codes input from the IEEE1394 connector TC DUPLICATE feature time code data the same as on the master side can be recorded If the master unit tape is paused or stopped when the master unit time code running mode is in REC RUN mode the time code for the slave unit stops When using BR HD50 as a backup device and switching this device from the playback mode to the record mode noise will be no
193. When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner is used near the camera during recording the tuner could pick up noise Avoid using or placing this device in places subject to extreme heat or cold with excessive dirt or dust e with high humidity or moisture subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking stove subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface also do not leave this device for long hours in a parked car under direct sunlight or near room heating equip ment Do not leave this device where it is subject to radiation or X rays or where corrosive gasses occur Protect this device from being splashed with water espe cially when shooting in the rain Protect this device from being wet when shooting on a beach In addition salt and sand may adhere to the camera body Be sure to clean the camera after use Protect this device against penetration of dust when using it in a place subject to sandy dust Optical performance of lens Due to the optical performance of the lens color diver gence phenomena magnification chromatic aberration may occur at the periphery of the image This is not a camera malfunction Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching between the playback picture and the EE picture Use this device in an upright position If placed on its side heat release efficiency will deterio rate adversely affecting the tape transport Depending on
194. When perform ing this adjustment set the lens to the recommended settings Do not open the lens IRIS beyond F4 do not set a telephoto lens to its extreme wide position or tele photo position White shading occurs due to the optical characteristics of the mounted lens it is not a camera malfunction SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Setting the Video Format Set the video format using the FRAME RATE item and the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen Setting the FRAME RATE Item 1 Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second The TOP MENU screen is displayed SHUTTER dial ND FILTER ac or O STATUS button 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor P to the VIDEO FORMAT item and press the SHUTTER dial The VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen is displayed VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 DFRAME RATE 60 30 10801 CAMERA OFF REC HDV HD60P EXECUTE ASPECT 16 9 HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE PB TAPE AUTO DOWN CON HDV SQUEEZE NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor P to the FRAME RATE item and press the SHUTTER dial The setting for the selected item flashes and can be changed CHANGE THE SYSTEM is displayed on the screen VIDEO FORMAT A DFRAME RATE 50 25 EXECUTE CHANGE THE SYSTEM 4 Turn the SHUTTER dial change the setting and push the SHUTTER dial The setting stops flashing and is temporarily set
195. XECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete Error displays NO CARD No SD memory card is inserted Insert an SD memory card NO FORMAT The SD memory card is not initialized formatted Initialize format the SD memory card e NO ACCESS There is a problem with the SD memory card Replace the SD memory card WRITE PROTECT The SD memory card may be write protected Check that write protection is disabled DISK FULL The SD memory card does not have enough free space Delete unwanted data or initialize format the card INVALID VIDEO FORMAT A settings file for a video format that is not supported was called up Settings files for video formats that are not supported can not be called up READ ONLY FILE Indicates a read only file Read only files cannot be saved Flashing NO FORMAT Error display PUSH JOG BUTTON Error 97 MENU SCREENS FILE MANAGE Menu Screen Cont d Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings Select the RESET FILE item on the FILE MANAGE menu screen aoc RESET PIDE gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE RESET EXECUTE PAGE BACK 1 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to SELECT and press the SHUTTER dial The file name setting area for the file to be reset flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the name of the file to reset and press the SHUTTER dial CAM1 CAM2 CAM3 CAM4 CURRENT current set tings 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring
196. able of recording up to 4 channels when the 12 bit 32 kHz sampling frequency is employed This device records audio on the two channels CH 1 and CH 2 4 channel recording is possible in the case of DV input When this device is used for playback of a tape that was recorded on another unit with audio recorded on the CH 3 and CH 4 channels the PB AUDIO CH DV item on the AUDIO menu screen must be set After recording on the CH 3 and CH 4 channels is not pos sible MONITOR PB AUDIO CH DV SELECT AUDIO MONITOR CH 1 L R CH1 L R CH1 CH3 L R CH3 BOTH MIX L R CH1 CH2 L R CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 L R CH3 CH4 STEREO L CH1 R CH2 L CH1 CH3 R CH2 CH4 L CH3 R CH4 CH 2 L R CH2 L R CH2 CH4 L R CH4 In HDV format you can only select the settings within the bold frame 62 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Connecting the Video Signal Cables Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible as shown in the figure Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device DV DV format HDV HDV format IEEE1394 switch Clamp filter CAUTION When connecting the IEEE1394 cable from to Camcorder VCR and other IEEE1394 device make sure the following instructions otherwise the IEEE1394 circuit device may be destroyed Turn
197. ack 58 The recorded contents can be checked on the LCD moni tor in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the video signal output connectors 1 inthe record standby mode press the RET button on the camera lens section 1 RET button The tape rewinds and about 6 seconds of the content recorded in DV format is played back and about 8 sec onds of the content recorded in HDV format is played back After playback this device returns to standby mode at the position on the tape where the RET button was pressed m If you continue to hold down the RET button up to about 18 seconds of content recorded in DV format and up to about 20 seconds of content recorded in HDV format can be rewound and played back Pressing the REC VTR trigger button during playback will put this device in REC standby mode The camera will automatically return to recording mode after play back CAUTION This function does not work when using RET button is used as FOCUS ASSIST button This function does not work when this device is in the stop mode During recording check the following indication will appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging etc HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder When the STATUS 0 1 4 screen is displayed HEADER REC Function When the REC VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed this function first records the color
198. ack the time code or user s bit data recorded on the tape is dis played on the LCD screen or viewfinder status screen MEMO During playback if a portion of tape without recording time code runs through the time code stops running Playback continues When a tape with a time code that is longer than two hours is played on home use DV equipment time code may not be played properly on some models TC UB CLOCK menu TC GENE switch TC DUPLI item FREE REC REGEN OFF IEEE1394 TC TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode ON SLAVE mode IEEE1394 TC DUPLI mode EEE1394 TC SLAVE mode is performed with special operations See page 48 47 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Synchronizing with the Time Code of the IEEE1394 DV Connected Master Unit You can synchronize the time code when performing multi camera recording The internal time code generator will be synchro nized with the time code in the signal input from the IEEE1394 terminal After synchronization slave lock the internal time code generator continues to run even if the IEEE1394 cable is disconnected Master unit Slide the IEEE1394 switch to the DV side 1EEE1394 terminal You can use the GY HD200U or GY HD201E as a slave unit You cannot use the GY HD200E as a slave unit Connections Connect the master unit and the slave unit with an IEEE1394 cable Settings and Operations Master unit GY
199. ack However the tonality in the bright areas deteriorates Decrease the number Enhances the tonality in the bright areas However the tonality in the black areas deterio rates Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 COLOR GAIN Adjusts the video signal color level OFF Sets the video to black and white Increase the number Makes the colors more dense Decrease the number Makes the colors less dense Settings OFF MIN 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 MAX 10 WHITE BALANCE When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once the screen switches to the WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen SKIN COLOR ADJUST When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once the screen switches to the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen 83 MENU SCREENS COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings R GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the R axis of the color matrix red and cyan Increase the number Enhances red and cyan Decrease the number Reduces red and cyan Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 R ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the R axis of the color matrix red and cyan Increase the number Increases yellowishness of red color and bluishness of cyan color
200. al for composite video signal output Select whether or not to output a signal with setup in SET UP on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen Only for U model Set ANALOG OUT CHAR item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to ON to output menu setting screens and warnings from this terminal OJ AUDIO OUTPUT CH 1 CH 2 Audio output connector RCA Output connector for audio signals Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode When a HDV DV signal IEEE1394 is input the EE sound of the input audio signal is output in the VTR mode HDV DV signal input is possible with the GYHD200U GY HD201E MEMO Alarm sound is not output IEEE1394 IEEE1394 connector 6 pin Using an IEEE1394 cable optional a digital video com ponent with IEEE1394 connector can be connected here ts See Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable on page 63 ts See HDV DV Dubbing on page 65 CAUTION When connecting the IEEE1394 cable confirm that the connector is facing the right direction before inserting t See page 63 MEMO Put the covers on the connectors when you are not using them Shell E e lal IEEE1394 IEEE1394 switch Set according to the image format of the input output sig nal and playback signal of the IEEE1394 terminal HDV Set to this for HDV format DV _ Set to this for DV format yY PB PR Component Y PB PR signal output termi
201. alance selector selected P F switch on page 15 Fixed at FAW when in FULL AUTO mode When you press the AWB Auto White Balance button and readjust the white balance WHITE PAINT lt B gt NONE The FAW function is not assigned becomes NORMALS A Assigns FAW to the A position 7 5 x B Assigns FAW to the B position SHADING Adjusts white shading PA PRESET No white shading adjustment PRESET Assigns EAW to the PRESET position i MANUAL Enables white shading adjustment GAINL Sots the gain value for each position on the GAIN sensitivity selector switch on page 15 13 See White Shading Adjustment on page 52 GAIN M Setting OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB ALC Fixed at ALC in FULL AUTO mode MEMO GAIN H Initial values L 0dB M 9dB H 18dB USER1 You can assign one of the following menu functions to the USER1 2 3 buttons on page 14 to each button When the SHADING item is set to PRESET the LEVEL R LEVEL G and LEVEL B items cannot be selected USER2 Set according to the shooting conditions This is only valid in CAMERA mode This does not function in VTR mode USER3 LEVELR When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL adjusts the reds of white shading Setting Description Increase the number Red at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced NONE Does not function Decrease the number Red at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced BARS Assigns BARS item functions in
202. and LCD are used frequently Precautions for the Battery Pack When the battery pack is not in use it must be stored in a cool dry place Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be subject to a high temperature under direct sunlight in a car etc this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten service life When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty the operating time will be shortened If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even imme diately after recharging the service life of the battery pack is nearly finished Purchase a new battery pack Recharging Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could result in reduced battery capacity If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete recharging or recharging without discharging once dis charge the battery pack completely then recharge it to restore the battery capacity If the battery pack is recharged with its internal tempera ture raised immediately after use recharging may not be performed completely Perform charging in an environment where the tempera ture is between 10 C 50 F and 35 C 95 F 20 C 68 F to 25 C 77 F is the ideal temperature range for charging If the environment is too cold charging may not complete PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Turning the Power ON Turning the Power ON 1 Set the POWER swi
203. are also displayed during color bar display when this switch is set to ON The default value is 70 80 The luminance level can be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen us See page 89 While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side the color tone areas specified with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST item on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu are indicated in the viewfinder The switch returns to the OFF position when released ts See How to Use Skin Detail on page 103 The Skin Detail color tone areas are not indicated while the color bar or VTR playback picture is shown in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor J AWB Auto white balance button When the WHT BAL switch on page 15 is set to A or B and you press this button the white balance is automati cally adjusted It is not activated in preset full auto shooting full auto white balance and color bar modes ts See White Balance Adjustment on page 52 OLens mounting ring Lens lock lever Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlock wise to release lens To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well and then turn the ring clockwise until firm ts See Attaching the Zoom Lens on page 33 11 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Rear Section Back tally lamp This lamp lights up when the GY HD250 GY HD251 enters the record mode It blinks during the transition to the record mode When the
204. area you want to detect within the detection area frame is input To confirm the detection area press the SHUTTER dial and set SKIN COLOR DET to STOP The frame on the screen is the detection area for the skin detail function The color within the detection area is recognized as the color that the skin detail function will use e If the color within the detection area is not recognized as the color that the skin detail function will use ERROR is displayed on the screen SKIN COLOR ADJUST r q Detection arse ERROR DSKIN COLOR DET EXECUTE SKIN COLOR RANGE NORMAL PAGE BACK SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen Black and white presenta tion Color presenta tion SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen 5 If you want to change the range of colors recognized with the skin color detection function follow the steps below Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the SKIN COLOR RANGE item and press the SHUTTER dial The setting area flashes and can be changed Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow the color range Set the range as you check the color display To confirm the color range press the SHUTTER dial The setting returns to its lit state 6 To stop the SKIN COLOR ADJUST function turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor P to the PAGE BACK item and press the SHUTTER dial MEMO In the SKIN COLOR ADJUST menu screen the lens ima
205. asing the audio level could cause noise from the input connector to be recorded on the tape When the microphone is not con nected to the INPUT1 2 connector set the AUDIO INPUT switch to LINE or turn down the audio level control In the FULL AUTO mode the audio level volume cannot be adjusted with the audio level controls on the CH 1 and CH 2 Monitoring Audio during Recording The audio input during recording in record pause or stop mode can be monitored through the monitoring speaker or earphone PHONES jack Select the audio channel to be monitored using the MONI TOR SELECT switch CH 1 The sound input to the CH 1 channel is output BOTH The sound input to the CH 1 and CH 2 chan nels is output mixed CH 2 The sound input to the CH 2 channel is output The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring vol ume The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the case of an abnormal condition occurring in this device An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached or when the battery is running down Do not increase the audio monitoring volume exces sively otherwise howling with the camera microphone may occur MEMO When connecting a stereotype earphone make the fol lowing settings to output stereo sound Set the MONITOR SELECT switch to BOTH Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen to STEREO When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 m
206. ast 1 second to display the TOP MENU screen 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the OTHERS item and press the SHUTTER dial The OTHERS 1 2 menu screen is displayed 4 Select the NEXT PAGE item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen and press the SHUTTER dial The OTHERS 2 2 menu screen is displayed OTHERS 2 2 menu screen OTHERS 2 2 D1394 REC TRIG SERIES BACK SPACE HDV _ P 1394 DR HD100 A OFF OFF MENU ALL RESET CANCEL PAGE BACK DRUM HOUR 000200H Drum usage FAN HOUR 003200H hours h Fan motor usage hours h OTHERS 2 2 Menu Screen DRUM HOUR item Displays the drum usage hours FAN HOUR item Displays the fan motor usage hours 5 To return to the normal screen display do one of the fol lowing Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen select the EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen and press the SHUTTER dial OTHERS Specifications General Power requirements Power consumption Dimensions Mass Temperature Operating Storage Humidity Operating Storage DC12V 2A Approx 24 W in the Record mode 224 W x 242 3 H x 401 D mm U model 224 W x 242 3 H x 414 D mm E model 3 6 kg 8 0 Ibs U model 3 8 kg 8 4 Ibs E model including lens Th16 x 5 5BRMU viewfinder microphone and tape 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 20 C to 60 C 4F to 140 F 30 to 80 RH 85 RH or less Camera section Image
207. ayed Indication Indication Contents USER1 NONE BARS PRESET TEMP B STRETCH1 to 5 B COMPRESS1 to 5 AE LEVEL AE LEVEL RET LOAD FILE USER2 USER3 NONE BARS PRESET TEMP B STRETCH1 to 5 B COMPRESS1 to 5 RET LOAD FILE LENS RET RET FOCUS ASSIST STATUS 4 This screen only displays VTR mode indication date and time event display and alarm indications Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME DATE menu screen t See Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen on page 42 26 27 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder Cont d Status Screen in VTR MODE HDV HD30P Bioo 00 00 00 2 0ning O oY L D O Lek Biv o PLAY 01 02 03 MW01 23 45 o No Item Contents VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the video format recorded on the tape when in VTR mode Also displays the video format of the HDV DV input signal You can switch this display ON OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen ts See page 88 Time code TC and user s bits Displays the time code data being recorded hour minute second frame when in VTR mode UB display You can switch this display ON OFF using the TC UB item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen 1 See page 88 You can select to display either the time code or the user s bits
208. ayed and set in camera mode Set this when recording a backup of the HDV DV signal from GY HD250 GY HD251 onto another device OFF Does not control the backup device SYNCRO Controls the backup device in conjunction with the recording start stop mode status on this device and if there is no videocassette or if no tape remains for recording controls the backup device in conjunction with the REC trigger button and the lens VTR button on this device SPLIT The REC trigger button on the right panel of this device controls the backup device recording start stop Set this when you want to control the timing of the recording on this device and the backup device sep arately SERIES Automatically starts recording on a backup device that is on Pause when the tape on this device has less than 3 minutes remaining during shooting MEMO If you use the backup recording function on the BR HD50 set this item to OFF The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording BACK SPACE HDV This function controls the camera tape transport back space and pre roll time when the camera is connected to an external HDD or external back up Recorder via IEEE1394 in HDV mode P 1394 Priority for IEEE1394 recording Auto setting P TAPE Priority for camera VCR recording 1394 REC Internal BACK SPACEIHDVI amoan gg TRIGGER oD meer 1 See page 97 start delay OFF Connected and SYNCRO Power ON SPLIT SERIES
209. bar video and the test tone 1 kHz sine wave of the built in signal generator at the beginning of the tape Then it records the black video signal and the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance When the recording is completed this device enters the Record Standby mode The time code value at the Record Standby position becomes the time code specified in advance HEADER REC function Settings related to the HEADER REC function such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled the HEADER REC execution duration and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed etc are made on the HEADER REC menu screen The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances CAMIVTR button Set to CAM mode In the Record Standby or Stop mode Tape beginning a HEADER REG Record Standby mode gt Normal recording Example 30 sec Example 30 sec Color bar video signal Test tone 1 kHz Setting range 0 to 99 sec gt ja gt Black video signal Mute audio No sound Setting range 0 to 99 sec Time code user s bits recording Time code user s bits recording ry Time code User s bits Time code User s bits The value specified on the HEADER The value specified for the UB The value specified on the HEADER The value specified for the UB REC menu screen HEADER REC time DATA item on the HEADER REC REC menu screen PRESET item
210. being adjusted When values for SD H PHASE or HD H PHASE is changed the images cannot be produced properly momentarily This is not a malfunction Dubbing with AV Devices By connecting the video signal output terminal and the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal on GY HD250 GY HD251 to an AV device analog signal dubbing is possible 1 Connect the cables To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possi ble as shown in the figure Composite cable or Component cable uF Signal flow Recording unit AUDIO OUTPUT Signal flow Audio cable A Clamp filter 2 Turn both devices on 3 Set this device to VTR mode Press the CAM VTR button The VTR indicator lights 4 Set the video output Set the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen amp See page 77 VIDEO FORMAT menu screen VIDEO FORMAT FRAME RATE 60 30 gt HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE DOWN CON HDV LETTER PB TAPE AUTO HD SD SDI OUT OFF OUTPUT TERM DV Y Pb Pr SET UP 0 0 PAGE BACK HDV PB OUTPUT item Set the video format to be output from the video output terminal during tape playback PB TAPE item Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format Normally use the AUTO setting OUTPUT TERM DV item
211. cD Sr a pea SHUTTER A Q H SHUTTER dial STATUS button status 1 1n Standby or Stop mode press the USER1 button for about 2 seconds while holding down the STATUS button The current time code generator data is displayed in enlarged display mode on the LCD screen The hour digit starts blinking 46 xl AAT 2 1 343451 0 F 7S Blink 2 Press the USER2 button to reset all data Data becomes 00 00 00 00 and the hour digit starts blinking 3 Set the time code hour minute second and frame The blinking digit can be set Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the value of the blinking digit Turn the SHUTTER dial up to increase the value and down to decrease the value Press the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking digit Repeat steps and and continue setting for each row 4 Press the USER3 button to confirm the setting data The LCD screen returns to the original screen Presetting User s Bit You can specify the user s bit with a number or character between 0 F CAUTION All digits of user s bit cannot be set to F If all digits are set to F and read user s bit is deemed as undefined during playback Aborting Preset Operation While presetting press the USER1 button while holding down the STATUS button Preset operation stops and the LCD screen returns to the original screen CAUTION m Preset operation is te
212. cated and this item cannot be selected FOCUS ASSIST Sets the FOCUS ASSIST function Press the FOCUS ASSIST button on page 14 or page 18 to operate the FOCUS ASSIST function NORMAL Only the FOCUS ASSIST function operates The focus area becomes blue red or green making it easier to focus ACCU FOCUS The FOCUS ASSIST function and ACCU FOCUS forced focus function operates This makes the depth of field shallower making it easier to focus ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approximately 10 seconds COLOR Sets the display color for focusing when running the FOCUS ASSIST function BLUE Displays the area of focus in blue RED Displays the area of focus in red GREEN Displays the area of focus in green LEVEL Sets the display range of the focal area when the FOCUS ASSIST function is in use LOW Displays the focal area narrower than MIDDLE MIDDLE Displays the focal area in normal setting HIGH Displays the focal area wider than MIDDLE NEXT PAGE When you display the LCD VF 2 4 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 1 SAFETY ZONE and CENTER MARK will not be displayed when this device is in VTR mode PLAY STL FWD REV 86 LCD VF 2 4 Menu Screen The LCD VF 2 4 menu screen can only be set in camera mode Item LCD MIRROR MODE
213. cation area of the LCD monitor and or in the viewfinder HDV DV input is possible through the IEEE1394 connector Turning the Power OFF 1 Place this device in the record standby or STOP mode 2 Set the POWER switch to OFF 3 Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC INPUT connector When the camera is not going to be used for a longer period CAUTION Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is taking place Confirm that the STBY or STOP indication is shown in the VTR operation mode indication area before the power is turned off Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF during a recording wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power on again Always set the POWER switch to OFF before discon necting the power supply Do not remove the battery pack or turn AC adapter OFF while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON 39 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Loading Unloading the Cassette Cassette Loading Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV To record slide the switch on the back for use in prevent ing accidental erasure to the REC side Remove any the tape slack before loading 1 Turn the POWER switch ON 2 Slide the EJECT switch on the top panel of this device to the side The videocassette cover opens automatically and a vid eocassette tape can be inserted 3 Insert a videocassette tape into the videocassette holder With the ta
214. cause a jagged effect or a banding in fine mesh patterns White dots High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce the effect of white dots in the image This condition is con spicuous especially when gain is applied This is a characteristic of the charged coupled device CCD As far as possible use this device under conditions where the temperature of this device does not increase CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS ZOOM Lens The zoom lens is not provided with the GY HD200CHU GY HD200CHE or the GY HD201CHE Th16 x 5 5BRMU FOCUS ring Manual focus ring ZOOM lever ring This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever To adjust the zoom manually turn the zoom mode knob to position M OIRIS ring Manual iris ring To activate the auto iris feature set the Iris Mode switch to A OJVTR VTR trigger button To start stop shooting RET Return video button You can only monitor the return video signal from the VTR on the viewfinder LCD monitor and video signal connector while this button is pressed When the camera control unit is connected you can moni tor the return video signal on the viewfinder while this but ton is pressed You cannot monitor on the LCD monitor or video output terminal When you set the LENS RET item to FOCUS ASSIST in the SWITCH MODE menu
215. ce input level is 4 dBs MIC Set to this position when the dynamic micro phone is connected MIC 48V Set to this position when a microphone requiring 48 V power supply phantom microphone etc is connected CAUTION When connecting a component that does not require 48 V power supply make sure that the switch is not set to MIC 48V before the component is connected MEMO You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC 48V in the INPUT1 2 MIC REF item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen ts See page 84 QOJ INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT1 INPUT2 audio input connec tors These are audio input connectors for connecting to an external audio device or microphone 16 Set the AUDIO INPUT switch according to the device to be connected Set the CH 2 audio input connector using the CH 2 INPUT switch The CH 2 audio from the set connector is recorded Shoulder pad slide button Button to adjust the position of the shoulder pad When you press this button you can move the position of the shoulder pad forward or backward Shoulder pad Cassette cover Sliding the EJECT switch on page 18 located on the top section opens this cover to allow insertion or removal of the videocassette CAUTION To prevent foreign objects from entering the internal parts of the VTR unit do not leave this device with the cover open for extended periods of time OJVIDEO OUT Video output terminal RCA This is a termin
216. ch of the chan nel whose audio level that you want to adjust manually to MANU YA yt C EEI MONITOR SELECT FULL AUTO switch switch Monitor speaker MONITOR volume CH 1 audio input CH 1 CH 2 level volume CH 2 audio input level AUDIO SELECT switch volume 2 Rotate the audio input level control corresponding to the audio input level to be adjusted Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the 3 dB point when a loud sound is input STATUS 1 screen Bho0 00 00 00 20min 308 FAW sD B 48k 12 0V 103 M01 23 45 Audio level Indicator level reference T 53 43 36 31 20 15 11 7 3 0dB OVER 55 FIL1 F564 STBY 01 02 SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Audio Input Signal Selection Cont d MEMO e When AUDIO LIMITER in the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen is set to ON the AUDIO LIMITER functions in manual adjust mode Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input ts See AUDIO LIMITER on page 84 The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can be set with the AUDIO REF LEVEL item on the AUDIO MIC menu screen 20 dB or 12 dB The level will change for both CH 1 and CH 2 CAUTION When the AUDIO INPUT switch is set to MIC be sure to check that the microphone is connected to the INPUT1 2 connector If the
217. cies in the audio from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 terminals AUDIO REF LEVEL Sets the reference audio level on the tape Both CH 1 and CH 2 20dB Records with 20 dB as the reference audio level 12dB Records with 12 dB as the reference audio level Set this if you are playing back the recorded tape on an ordinary DV device Set this for both playback and recording This is unrelated to the audio level via the IEEE1394 signal INPUT1 MIC REF Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT1 connector When the AUDIO INPUT switch on page 16 is set to MIC or MIC 48 50dB Sets the reference audio input level at 50 dB 60dB Sets the reference audio input level at 60 dB INPUT2 MIC REF Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT2 connector When the AUDIO INPUT switch on page 16 is set to MIC or MIC 48 50dB Sets the reference audio input level at 50 dB 60dB Sets the reference audio input level at 60 dB AUDIO MODE Selects the audio sampling frequency for recording Both CH 1 and CH 2 When HDV format is set this is fixed at 48K and 48K is displayed 32K Digitally records with a 12 bit 32 kHz sampling frequency 48K Digitally records with a 16 bit 48 kHz sampling frequency If the DV format is 12 bit 32 kHz up to 4 recording track channels are available Of those this device records on the CH 1 and CH 2 channels This device is not capab
218. code generator EXTERNAL Uses the time code generator connected to the TC IN terminal MEMO TC PRESET and UB PRESET are not available when set to EXTERNAL HEADER REC is disabled when set to EXTERNAL When this is set to EXTERNAL the setting for TC DUPLI is invalidated TC PRESET To preset the time code align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE The set time code is confirmed CANCEL The set time code is cancelled ZERO PRESET Resets all time codes to 0 UB PRESET To preset the user s bit data align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE The set user s bit data are confirmed CANCEL The set user s bit data are cancelled ZERO PRESET Resets all user s bits data to 0 MEMO When the UB REC item is set to OFF is displayed and this cannot be selected DROP FRAME Selects whether the time code generator framing mode is drop frame or non drop frame DROP Internal time code generator works in drop frame mode Set this when the recorded time is im portant Internal time code generator works in non drop frame mode Set this when the number of frames is important NON DROP To select whether or not user s bit data should be recorded To select whether the user s bits should be displayed during playback of a tape with recorded user s bits data ON User s bits are recorded durin
219. cording Set the TC DUPLI item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen OFF Records the TC UB set in this device ON Records the TC UB for the IEEE1394 input Date and time data Records the data sent from the playback device in DV format Records the data of the internal clock in HDV format 66 MEMO In HDV format the UB set in this device is recorded regard less of the setting TC UB CLOCK TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME i gt TC DUPLI HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK UB REC DTC DUPLI TC UB Bios 00 00 REC 01 02 03 01 23 45 Date and Time 7 Insert the videocassettes GY HD200U _ Insert the videocassette to be dubbed GY HD201E to Playback unit Insert the recorded videocassette 8 start playback on the playback unit For details see the instructions to the unit used for play back The playback picture from the playback unit appears on the GY HD200U GY HD201E s LCD monitor and viewfinder screen 9 Press the REC VTR trigger button on the GY HD200U GY HD201E to start recording m To temporarily pause the recording press the REC or VTR trigger button m To restart the recording press the REC or VTR trigger button again 10 When dubbing is completed Press the REC VTR trigger button or the STOP button on the GY HD200U GY HD201E to stop recording and then stop playback on the playback unit MEMO Depending on th
220. cording and then stop playback on the playback unit MEMO Depending on the player sound may not be heard momen tarily from this device when switching modes from STILL to PLAY 69 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Backup Recording Backup Recording of the GY HD250 GY HD251 s_ Camera Image and _ Sound Through the IEEE1394 Connector The GY HD250 GY HD251 s camera image and sound can be recorded for backup on another component that is equipped with IEEE1394 connector Connections Use the GY HD250 GY HD251 as the master unit Connect the master unit and the backup unit with a IEEE1394 cable 1 IEEE 1394 switch Backup unit Master unit mi GY HD250 D GY HD251 IEEE1394 cable Signal flow Settings m Master unit GY HD250 GY HD251 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY HD250 GY HD251 DV When backup in DV format HDV When backup in HDV format 2 Place in Camera mode 3 Set the 1394 REC TRIG item on the OTHERS 2 2 menu screen t See page 97 For HDV mode set the BACK SPACE HDV item us See page 97 OTHERS 2 2 menu screen OTHERS 2 2 b1i394 REC TRIG SERIES BACK SPACE HDV P 1394 DR HD100 A OFF OFF MENU ALL RESET CANCEL PAGE BACK DRUM HOUR 000200H FAN HOUR 003200H 70 Backup unit Place in HDV DV signal input mode Depending on the used component it may be neces sary to set REMOTE SELECT When BR
221. cursor P with the item to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area of the selected item starts blinking and the setting can now be made 6 Change the setting Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area stops blinking and the setting is entered m To change multiple items repeat the procedures in steps 5 and 6 above 7 Return to the TOP MENU screen Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the PAGE BACK item and then press the SHUTTER dial m To change settings on other menu screens repeat the procedures in steps 4 to 7 above m To save the set contents in FILE select the FILE MAN AGE menu screen and perform the operations for saving to file ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 96 8 To return to the normal screen after completing the set tings use either of the following methods Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor gt with the EXIT item and then press the SHUTTER dial MEMO While the menu screen is being displayed the USER1 USER2 and USER3 buttons can also perform menu operations USER1 button Raises the cursor P Changes the set ting USER2 button Lowers the cursor Changes the set ting USER3 button Confirms the menu item Confirms the setting e The menu screen is not displayed when switching between Camera and VTR mode VTR indicator flashes
222. d damaged liquid has been spilled objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor mally or has been dropped 53125A Safety Precautions FOR USA AND CANADA CAUTION DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of suffi cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance INFORMATION FOR USA INFORMATION FOR CANADA RENSEIGNEMENT POUR CANADA This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil numerique de la Class B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELEC TRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE This unit should be used with 12V DC only CAUTION To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards do NOT use any other power source INFORMATION This equipment has been tested and found to com
223. d time of the internal clock are displayed In VTR playback mode The date and time recorded on the tape are displayed The last read date and time values are displayed When an HDV DV sig The date and time of the DV input nal is input from the are displayed in DV format The IEEE1394 connector date and time of the internal clock are displayed in HDV format GY HD200U GY HD201E only In VTR stop mode Displaying Time Code This device records SMPTE standard NTSC or EBU stan dard PAL time codes and user s bits In the play mode or the record mode the reproduced time codes or user s bits are shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder The time codes or user s bits can be shown on the LCD mon itor or in the viewfinder during playback and recording as fol lows Status screen Setting 1 Set the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen to ON Time codes or user s bit data are displayed on the STATUS screen Time code indication Example 00 00 00 00 Time code indication 00 00 00 00 User s bits indication FF EE DD 20 01 02 03 01 23 45 STATUS 1 screen 2 Whether time codes or user s bit data should be dis played is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the LCD door TC Time codes are displayed UB User s bit data is displayed LcD Ol CAMIVIR OO AUDIO SELECT TC a 6 5 TC DISPLAY switch TC GENE switch Time code input entered the IEEE139
224. d time precisely 3 When all the settings are completed rotate the SHUT TER dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item and then press the SHUTTER dial The TIME DATE menu screen returns 4 To return to the normal screen use either of the following methods Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen before pressing the SHUTTER dial 42 Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the screen and how to display them are set on the TIME DATE menu screen o1 2 103 i Date Time 1 Display the TIME DATE menu screen select the TC UB CLOCK item on the TOP MENU screen Select the TIME DATE item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen 2 Set the TIME DATE menu screen DISPLAY item Sets whether or not date and time should be displayed Set to ON to display the indications DISPLAY MODE Sets the video output mode in item which date and time should be dis played BARS Displayed when outputting the color bar CAM Displayed when outputting the color camera image BARS CAM Date and time are always displayed DISPLAY Sets the style in which the date and STYLE item time are displayed DATE TIME Date and time are displayed DATE Date only is displayed TIME Time only is displayed m Display of date and time in the various operation modes In Camera mode The date an
225. d time recorded on a tape are displayed in accordance with the following settings BARS CAM Date and time are always displayed BARS Date and time are displayed when the color bars are output CAM Date and time are displayed when the camera images are output When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected DISPLAY STYLE Selects the style for the date and time display DATE TIME Date and time are displayed DATE Date only is displayed TIME Time only is displayed When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected DATE STYLE Selects the style for the date display YY MM DD Displayed in the format of year month date MM DD YY Displayed in the format of month date year DD MM YY Displayed in the format of date month year Variation Range U model MM DD YY E model DD MM YY When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected TIME STYLE Selects the style for the time display 24 HOUR Displays the time using the 24 hour system 12 HOUR Displays the time using the 12 hour system When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected SEC DISPLAY Selects whether to display the seconds in the time display ON Seconds are displayed OFF Seconds are not displayed When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF
226. dark areas Set elongation level with STRETCH LEVEL below COMPRESS Ifthe video that was shot is bright overall and lacking in contrast the gain in the dark areas is com pressed which adds contrast Set compression level with COMPRESS LEVEL below STRETCH LEVEL The amount of stretching increases from LEVEL1 gt LEVEL2LEVEL3 LEVEL4 LEVEL5 Settings LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 LEVEL4 LEVEL5 COMPRESS LEVEL The amount of compression increases from LEVEL1 gt LEVEL2 LEVEL3 gt LEVEL4 LEVELS Settings LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 LEVEL4 LEVEL5 WHITE CLIP Sets the white clipping point on input video signals with a high luminance level 108 The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 108 100 The white clipping point is set at a luminance level of 100 If the screen is too white at 108 set it to 100 KNEE Sets whether to run the knee function which compresses video signals over a certain level to render the tonality in the highlight areas automatically or manually Set MANUAL when you want to check the bright areas and adjust the knee point manually AUTO Adjusts the knee point automatically according to the luminance level MANUAL You can change the luminance level in the LEVEL item LEVEL Sets the start point for knee compression knee point Increase the number Raises the knee point level Decrease the number Lowers the knee point level Settings 80
227. de 13 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Right Side Section Monitoring speaker Cheek pad In the Camera mode the input sound can be EE moni tored In the VTR mode the speaker outputs the VTR play back sound In the VTR mode the HDV DV input sound can be EE monitored HDV DV signal input is possible with the GY HD200U GY HD201E The sound to be output is selected with the MONITOR SELECT switch on page 19 The sound level is adjusted with the MONITOR sound level volume This speaker also outputs various warning sounds superimposed on other sound ts See Alarm Sound on page 105 Cheek pad set screw Screw for adjusting the height of the cheek pad MONITOR Audio monitor volume control Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and ear phone OLVF BRIGHT Viewfinder brightness adjustment To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder ts See page 49 PEAKING Contour adjustment To adjust the contours of the LCD monitor and viewfinder image When the Focus Assist function is running this control does not operate ts See page 49 FOCUS ASSIST Focus assist button When you press this button during shooting the area of focus is displayed in blue red or green making it easy to focus accurately MEMO When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen is set to ACCU FOCUS and this button is pressed AC
228. display is selected on the menu screen Display of date and time TIME DATE menu screen Display of time code LCD VF 1 2 menu screen Fast Forward Rewind Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the tape Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind the tape VTR mode only SWITCH TO VTR MODE is displayed and the function does not work if the FF or REW buttons are pressed when Camera mode is in the stop mode E Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewind ing MEMO When the tape approaches the end during fast forward ing or rewinding the tape speed decelerates to protect the tape The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may become longer when used in a cold environment This is not a malfunction Search Press the FF button in the play mode or still mode to search the tape in the forward direction Playback takes place while fast forwarding Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in the reverse direction Playback takes place while rewind ing Each press on the button switches the speed to x2 x5 and x10 m Press the PLAY STILL button to resume normal playback m Press the STOP button to stop MEMO To output sound during the search set the SEARCH AUDIO DV item on the AUDIO menu screen to ON Block noise may appear in the picture or the image may freeze during the search 61 PLAYBACK MODE
229. displayed gt Characters shown enlarged Image and characters displayed l ts See Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor on page 29 VTR VTR indicator This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode To perform VTR playback or to input the HDV DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector on page 16 press the CAMIVTR button on page 13 to turn on this indicator It flashes when the mode is being changed FULL AUTO Full auto shooting FAS switch This is the ON OFF switch for FAS mode During FAS mode FAS is displayed on the LCD moni tor or the viewfinder FAS mode works together with the auto iris and auto level control ALC modes and automatically adjusts to the optimal video signal level and white balance You can select automatic adjustment mode or manual adjustment mode for audio recording level ts See AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen on page 88 Even if there are color bars this automatically sets to camera video Auto iris mode operates even if the lens iris mode switch is set to the manual position The gain changes continuously until it reaches the max imum ALC MAX setting and the shutter speed also changes continuously When you release FAS mode all of the settings return to their previous modes CAUTION When the power is turned on while the camera is in the FAS mode it takes about 10 seconds before the automatic adjustment of FAS is completed All of th
230. down HDV HD24P HDV format Shoots using a 720 24p signal E model Only E model Only U model Only U model Only CANCEL Cancels the settings EXECUTE Executes the settings MEMO e The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the REC item setting is switched On the E model the video format is fixed at HDV HD24P when the FRAME RATE item is set to 24 HDV HD24P is displayed 77 MENU SCREENS VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 Menu Screen Cont d This is not displayed in VTR mode Item ASPECT Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Sets the screen size for the recording video signal Can only be displayed and set in camera mode 4 3 Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 4 3 16 9 Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 16 9 The resolution in the vertical direction drops compared to 4 3 video MEMO When the format setting is HDV the ASPECT item is fixed at 16 9 16 9 is displayed The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the ASPECT item setting is switched VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 Menu Screen This is not displayed in VTR mode HDV PB OUTPUT When playing back an HDV recorded tape set video format for component output from the Y PB PR terminal or SDI output from the HD SD SDI output terminal You can set the following depending on the FRAME RATE of the HDV recorded tape
231. e 6 is not a malfunction The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen are manufac tured using high precision technology Black spots may appear on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen or red blue green and or white spots may not turn off How ever this is not a malfunction and these spots are not recorded on the tape If you use this device continuously for a long period of time the characters displayed in the viewfinder may tem porarily remain on the screen This is not recorded on the tape In addition they are no longer displayed if you turn the power off and then on again If you use this device in a cold location the images may appear to lag on the screen but this is not a malfunction This is not recorded on the tape Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or dam age to the mechanism To prevent damage to the connectors use this device with the connector covers on when you are not using the video audio signal output connectors CAUTION Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or other strong light source Eye damage could result Ifthe lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun rays may collect inside this device and cause damage or a fire When carrying the camera be sure to hold the carrying handle Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in damage
232. e HDV PB OUTPUT menu item Composite Out NATIVE 720P 10801 NTSC PAL 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 720 30p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 50i 576 50i HDV 720 25p 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 50i 576 50i 720 24p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 60i 480 60p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 576 50p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 480 60i U model ay 480 60i 24p pm 576 50i E model 576 50i 25p rm pa pa MEMO Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the IEEE1394 input signal 21 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the View finder In addition to showing the EE image and the playback pic ture the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the following character displays To show characters on the LCD monitor press the DISPLAY button briefly O j a N aen Am THE IEE Z am Cc 0 CHA BOTH CH T MonrToR seLect oisilay vrr DISPLAY button m Status screens screens for checking the current cam era settings m Auto white display only displayed in the Camera mode m Menu setting screens m Alarm message display m Safety zone display only displayed in the Camera mode MEMO When ANALOG OUT CHAR on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen is ON characters are also shown on images from
233. e screen in the normal display orientation holding down the DISPLAY button does not work m When the LCD VF item in the LCD VF 4 4 menu is set to ON the LCD monitor and viewfinder VF displays are as shown below LCD Monitor Status LCD Closed Normal LCD Inverted LCD LCD Open Normal LCD Inverted LCD LCD Display VF Display MEMO Press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the LCD screen display ON and OFF The viewfinder screen is always displayed Inverted LCD LCD open 40 or dek LCD close less than 40 31 PREPARATIONS Basic System Shoulder Belt lt lt HD SD Cable iN a T BNC i 1 f iI Component Cable Woy BNC Microphone ERA Composite Cable O Rca pin Earphone PS p Audio Cable on o o g RCA pin Focus Manual Unit 14 HZ FM13 FUJINON HZ FM15 CANON 1EEE1394 Cable 6P 6P 1 3 Zoom Lens Th13 x 3 5BRMU FUJINON 4 l Wide Converter WOV 825C l l l l l For GY HD250 l l Anton Bauer Anton Bauer Battery Charger E i Battery 1 3 Zoom Lens Th16 x 5 5BRMU FUJINON Excluding the CHU CHE model Battery mount D GY HD250 Gold Mount Focus Manual Unit For GY HD251 o0 Zoom Servo Unit SD Memory Gard GY HD251 V Mount HZ ZS13B l pra ce Tripod Base U model only IDX ee OG sot C
234. e 92 LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor BLACK amp WHITE Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white display 50 Viewfinder Adjustment Direction of the Viewfinder Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder Diopter Adjustment Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen image is clearly visible Adjustment of the Viewfinder Screen PEAKING Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen VF BRIGHT Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder screen Eyepiece focusing ring i Eyepiece VF BRIGHT volume PEAKING volume Viewfinder mount base Adjustments are made on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen us See page 92 VF CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder screen BLACK amp WHITE Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white display MEMO The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by selecting the desired size with the ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen 4 3 or 16 9 Back Focus Adjustment It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the telephoto and wide angle positions It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more than 3 meters from the camera The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star chart 2 7 8 10
235. e ND filter knob set to 2 Is the iris closed Is the shutter speed too fast Is the viewfinder cable correctly connected Playback does not start when the play button is pressed In the Camera mode is STOP indicated as the VTR operation mode indica tor When STBY is indicated press the STOP button to display STOP Cannot play back Is the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen set to a setting oth er than AUTO If this menu item and the tape format do not match the tape cannot be played back Cannot input an HDV DV signal Is this device in VTR mode Is the VTR indicator lit Is the IEEE1394 switch set correctly Noise interferes with playback video Video head may be clogged with dirt Clean head with the special head clean ing tape t See Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape on page 7 Sound is not output during playback Is the AUDIO SELECT item on the AUDIO menu screen set to CH3 4 To output the sound of the recording set to CH1 2 Noise appears when playing back a tape recorded on another unit The transient section between scenes recorded on other units and those recorded on the GY HD250 GY HD251 may appear disturbed When a tape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording this phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors The front section s audio level control doesn t work Is the CH 1 CH 2 AU
236. e SHUTTER dial 103 FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION How to Use Skin Detail Cont d Using the Skin Detail Function To use the skin detail function set on the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen select ON for the SKIN DETECT item on the CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 menu screen In addition you can use the LEVEL item to set three levels of suppression of skin color area detail enhancement in the video signal See page 81 While the skin detail function operates the SD indicator is displayed on the STATUS 0 and STATUS 1 screen in the viewfinder or LCD monitor 01 02 03 01 STATUS 0 Confirming the color tone area adjusted with the Skin Detail function When you push the ZEBRA switch on the front panel to SKIN AREA the skin detail function turns ON and the color area adjusted with the skin detail function is displayed in color in the LCD monitor or viewfinder U Ca ey ZEBRA switch MEMO When the REVERSE PICTURE item in the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen is set to ROTATE skin detail function is available but the detection area is not displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen When COLOR GAIN item on the ADVANCED PRO CESS menu screen is set to OFF only the portion the skin detail function is working is displayed in skin color us See page 83 104 Outputting Color Bars GY HD250 GY HD251 can output three types of color bars depending on
237. e bag to reach that of the new environ ment before using it Characteristic CCD Phe nomena Smear and Blooming Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce vertical streaking called smear when shooting an extremely bright light source Another effect is the expansion of light around a bright light or object called blooming The CCD employed in this device is characterized by induc ing very little smear or blooming Nevertheless please take note that smear or blooming may be induced when shooting a bright light source Smear Vertical pale streaking appearing at high luminous object High luminous object Electric light sunlight etc Blooming Blurring in highlight Monitor screen Moire or Aliasing Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect or a banding in fine mesh patterns White dots High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce the effect of white dots in the image This condition is con spicuous especially when gain is applied This is a characteristic of the charged coupled device CCD As far as possible use this device under conditions where the temperature of this device does not increase CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS ZOOM Lens The zoom lens is not provided with the GY HD250CHU or the GY HD251CHE Th16 x 5 5BRMU FO
238. e connected If noise appears on the screen or the audio cuts out re connect the IEEE1394 cable or turn this device on again If you turn the power to the device connected to the IEEE1394 connector on and off or switch the video input noise may occur in the audio If you perform this type of operation set the speaker volume as low as possible on the audio device connected to this device Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the recorder is equipped with a IEEE1394 connector 65 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS HDV DV Dubbing Cont d When Using the GY HD200U GY HD201E as Recording Unit Dubbing From Another Videocassette 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY HD200U GY HD201E DV When dubbing in DV format HDV When dubbing in HDV format 2 Connect the units with the IEEE1394 cable 3 Turn ON both units 4 Place the GY HD200U GY HD201E in the VTR MODE Press the CAM VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator 5 Set the frame rate Set the FRAME RATE item 60 30 50 25 24 on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu to match the HDV DV signal frame rate input from the IEEE1394 connector t See page 74 1 IEEE1394 switch Recording unit Signal flow IEEE1394 cable CAUTION Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV or DV Start recording after making sure that both devices are properly connected 6 Set the time code and user bit re
239. e indica tor to indicate STOP VTR mode The GY HD250 GY HD251 enters the VTR mode The camera image will not be displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor When a videocassette is loaded the GY HD250 GY HD251 enters the stop mode STOP is displayed in the VTR operation mode indication area of the LCD monitor and or in the viewfinder HDV DV input is possible through the IEEE1394 connector Turning the Power OFF 1 Place the GY HD250 GY HD251 in the record standby or STOP mode 2 Set the POWER switch to OFF 3 Remove the battery pack or the power supply to the DC INPUT connector When the camera is not going to be used for a longer period CAUTION Do not set the POWER switch to OFF while recording is taking place Confirm that the STBY or STOP indication is shown in the VTR operation mode indication area before the power is turned off Should the POWER switch accidentally be set to OFF during a recording wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power on again Always set the POWER switch to OFF before discon necting the power supply Do not remove the battery pack or turn AC adapter OFF while the POWER switch on the camera is still set to ON 39 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Loading Unloading the Cassette Cassette Loading Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV To record slide the switch on the back for use in prevent ing accidental erasure to the REC
240. e input to the IEEE1394 terminal Fixed at NATIVE during DV recorded tape playback or DV signal input DOWN CON HDV Set the style to display down converted images in aspect ratio 4 3 SQUEEZE Image that is squeezed horizontally is displayed LETTER Wide image with the top and bottom blackened is displayed MEMO This setting is only valid in HDV mode In DV mode the style becomes SQUEEZE regardless of the setting of this item ON Output on Embedded audio and time code are also output OUTPUT TERM DV Sets the output image format for the Y Ps PR terminal in DV format Y PB PR Outputs analog component signals RGB Outputs analog RGB signals Y C Outputs YC separate signals Signals are output from terminals as shown in the table below depending on the settings Terminal Setting ermina Y PB PR RGB YIC Y Component Y G Y Psg Component PB B Cc PR Component PR R When the PBPR TC switch is set to PBPR MEMO SYNC signals are added to all channels for RGB signals In HDV format signals are output in analog component format regardless of these settings NEXT PAGE To display the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK 78 The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position SET UP Selects whether to add a setup signal to the video signal output from
241. e menu functions assign AE LEVEL to the USER1 button AE LEVEL to the USER2 button RET Assigns the normal RET button function LOAD FILE Assigns the function to jump to in the LOAD FILE menu ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 96 LENS RET Sets the lens RET button functions This does not function if there is not RET button on the lens you are using RET Functions as a normal RET button FOCUS ASSIST Functions as the FOCUS ASSIST button PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 8 amp 2 83 MENU SCREENS AUDIO MIC 1 2 Menu Screen The AUDIO MIC menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen In VTR mode the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings TEST TONE Sets whether to output a test audio signal 1 kHz 20dBFS or 12dBFS during color bar output OFF A test audio signal is not output ON A test audio signal is output MIC WIND CUT Selects whether to cut the lows low frequency bands from the audio input signal Use this when you want to reduce wind sounds from the microphone OFF Low frequencies are not cut INPUT1 Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT1 connector INPUT2 Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT2 connector BOTH Cuts the low frequen
242. e most for each cleaning m Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head cleaning Low Room High Running temperature temperature temperature Operating envi 0 C to 10 C 10 C to 35 C 35 C to 40 C ronment Yardstick for 1 to 2 times ev 1 to 2 times ev 1 to 2 times ev use of cleaning ery 5 hours tape ery 20 to 30 ery 5 hours Note 1 When used in a low humidity environment head cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of those given in the chart above Note 2 If an M DV80 tape is used immediately after head cleaning the HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED indicator may remain on In this case let the tape run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has run for a while Note 3 Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature 10 C to 35 C Note 4 The cleaning tape case contains instructions for use of the cleaning tape However some of these instructions differ from the contents of this sheet When using the cleaning tape please follow the instructions of this sheet Note 5 If the HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED does not disappear after repeated head cleanings the recording tape may be abnormal Avoid excessive repeated use of the head cleaning tape INTRODUCTION Battery Pack to be Used The GY HD250 GY HD251 can use any of the following bat teries Factory setting U model Anton Bauer battery E model IDX battery Recommended batteries U model Dionic 90 Anton
243. e picture or sound may be interrupted Block Noise Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC Do not use head cleaning tapes other than specified ts See Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape about how to use the head cleaning tape and precautions for use of the head cleaning tape When dust adheres to the heads the warning message HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder during playback and record ing check using the RET button on the lens section Periodical Maintenance Contents Check or replace the following mechanical parts according to the running time Usage Time 500H 1000H 1500H 2000H Drum assembly includ o a e ing heads Tape guides rollers O Belt gears Drive parts _ O Clean check and adjust Clean and check Replace as required Replace The maintenance contents vary depending on the operat ing environment and method Therefore the data in the chart should be considered as a reference Time management The accumulated running time of this device can be con firmed with the hour meter display which shows the accu mulated drum and fan motor running time amp See How to Display the Hour Meter on page 107 For consultations related to the maintenance planning or cost please contact the person in charge of professional video equipment at your nearest JVC
244. e player sound may not be heard momen tarily from this device when switching modes from STILL to PLAY Backup Recording Backup Recording of this Device s Cam era Image and Sound Through the IEEE1394 Connector This device s camera image and sound can be recorded for backup on another component that is equipped with IEEE1394 connector Connections Use this device as the master unit Connect the master unit and the backup unit with a IEEE1394 cable 1 IEEE1394 switch Backup unit Master unit this device a _ m IEEE1394 cable Signal flow Settings m Master unit this device 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of this device DV When backup in DV format HDV When backup in HDV format 2 Place in Camera mode 3 Set the 1394 REC TRIG item on the OTHERS 2 2 menu screen t See page 94 For HDV mode set the BACK SPACE HDV item ts See page 94 OTHERS 2 2 menu screen OTHERS 2 2 D1394 REC TRIG SERIES BACK SPACE HDV P 1394 DR HD100 A OFF OFF MENU ALL RESET CANCEL PAGE BACK DRUM HOUR 000200H FAN HOUR 003200H Backup unit Place in HDV DV signal input mode Depending on the used component it may be neces sary to set REMOTE SELECT When BR HD50 is used set the Backup Recording function to OFF Also set REM SEL HDV DV in the REMOTE 1 2 menu of the BR HD50 to ON or LOC REM Insert the tape and set to STOP or REC PA
245. e previous setting contents are recalled when the FAS mode is cancelled STOP Stop button Press to enter the stop mode REW Rewind button Press this button to rewind the tape Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode ini tiates the rewind mode Only for VTR mode Pressing this button during playback still picture play back or forward search initiates reverse search PLAY STILL Play still button Press to start playback Press to enter the still picture mode during playback in the stop mode or in the search mode Depending on the ambient temperature if still image play back mode continues for between 30 seconds and 3 min utes it stops automatically Tape protect mode During still picture playback and search mode press this button to return to the normal playback mode If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play mode is entered the playback video will be interfered with digital noise IFF Fast forward button Press this button to fast forward the tape Pressing this button in the stop or rewind mode initiates the fast forward mode Only for VTR mode Pressing this button during playback still picture play back or reverse search initiates forward search Screw holes for mounting accessories You can mount lights and other accessories 19 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS m When Recording HDV or DV Images from the IEEE1394 Terminal
246. e screen size for the recording video signal Can only be displayed and set in camera mode 4 3 Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 4 3 16 9 Outputs the video with an aspect ratio of 16 9 The resolution in the vertical direction drops compared to 4 3 video MEMO When the format setting is HDV the ASPECT item is fixed at 16 9 16 9 is displayed The synchronous video signal is momentarily disturbed when the ASPECT item setting is switched HDV PB OUTPUT When playing back an HDV recorded tape set video format for component output from the Y PB PR terminal You can set the following depending on the FRAME RATE of the HDV recorded tape Setting Description FRAME RATE NATIVE Outputs the signal being recorded on the tape 60 30 720P Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 720p and outputs it 50 25 10801 Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 1080i and outputs it 24 NTSC Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 480i and outputs it 60 30 24 PAL Converts the signal being recorded on tape to 576i and outputs it 50 25 MEMO If you convert video recorded in HDV format to DV format and output it the colors may change This item is also applied to EE images when HDV signals are input to the IEEE1394 terminal Fixed at NATIVE during DV recorded tape playback or DV signal input DOWN CON HDV Set the style to display down converted images in aspect ratio 4
247. e supplied viewfinder The supplied viewfinder will not function properly when set to another setting When this is set to Y or COMPOSITE in the HDV mode images are not output from the Y Ps PrR terminal When the VF P400 viewfinder sold separately is connected to the Viewfinder connector set this to Y to view HDV format images with the VF P400 m When this is set to COMPONENT or COMPOSITE the following occurs FOCUS ASSIST and SKIN AREA are not displayed m When this is set to COMPONENT the following restrictions are applied in HDV mode Set output of characters from the viewfinder terminal with ON OFF in ANALOG OUT CHAR item on the OTH ERS 1 2 menu screen Also set ZEBRA output from the viewfinder terminal with ON OFF in ANALOG OUT CHAR Item When the ZEBRA switch is ON When ZEBRA is set to ON ZEBRA is also displayed for COMPONENT output from the Y PB PR terminal PAGE BACK Camera mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen VTR mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen TC UB CLOCK Menu Screen Time codes TC and user s bits UB can be set on this screen Date and time is set on the TIME DATE screen that can be reached from this screen TCG SOURCE Function Setting bold characters indicate initi Selects the source of the time code generator INTERNAL Uses the built in time
248. e time code and user bit recording Set the TC DUPLI item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen OFF Records the TC UB set in this device ON Records the TC UB for the IEEE1394 input Date and time data Records the data sent from the playback device in DV format Records the data of the internal clock in HDV format MEMO In HDV format the UB set in this device is recorded regard less of the setting TC UB CLOCK TCG SOURCE INTERNAL TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME I gt TC DUPLI OFF HEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK UB REC ON DTC DUPLI OFF TC UB P00 00 00 00 REC 01 02 03 01 23 45 Date and Time 7 Insert the videocassettes GY HD250 GY Insert the videocassette to be dubbed HD251 to Playback unit Insert the recorded videocassette 8 Start playback on the playback unit For details see the instructions to the unit used for play back The playback picture from the playback unit appears on the GY HD250 GY HD251 s LCD monitor and view finder screen 9 Press the REC VTR trigger button on the GY HD250 GY HD251 to start recording m To temporarily pause the recording press the REC or VTR trigger button m To restart the recording press the REC or VTR trigger button again 10 When dubbing is completed Press the REC VTR trigger button or the STOP button on the GY HD250 GY HD251 to stop re
249. ecomes less than 12 the display changes to O RES When CALIBRATION is required from the battery the display switches between TIME CAPA display 30 sec onds and 0 CAL display 2 seconds repeatedly For CALIBRATION refer to the instruction manual of Anton Bauer Battery Please use the remaining battery level and remaining time as a reference for shooting duration SHUTTER DISP Sets the shutter display method to seconds or angle SEC Seconds DEG Degrees MEMO This item is available when REC on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen is set to HDV HD24P DV 24P DV 24PA HDV HD25P or DV 25P Shutter display method is fixed to SEC for other settings SEC is displayed NEXT PAGE Camera mode To display the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial VTR mode To display the LCD VF 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK Camera mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 2 4 menu screen VTR mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 88 LCD VF 4 4 Menu Screen 2 2 screen is displayed in the VTR mode This is not displayed in VTR mode Item LCD VF Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display switching
250. econds in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Initial Setting OSEC 30SEC 99SEC PAGE BACK The TC UB CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed 59 SHOOTING OPERATION HEADER REC Function Cont d How to set the HEADER REC menu screen 1 Display the HEADER REC menu screen Select the TC UB CLOCK item on the TOP MENU screen Select the HEADER REC item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK menu screen TC UB CLOCK TC PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB PRESET 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE DROP FRAME DROP TC DUPLI OFF DHEADER REC TIME DATE PAGE BACK HEADER REC menu screen 2 Setting the HEADER REC menu screen Select the menu item Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor P with the item to be set and then press the SHUTTER dial The setting area of the selected item starts blinking changing the setting value Rotate the SHUTTER dial to change the setting and then press the SHUTTER dial HEADER REC START KEY STOP REC TC DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE UB DATA 00 00 00 00 EXECUTE BARS TIME 30SEC BLACK TIME 30SEC PAGE BACK Cursor Item Set value E In the case of the TC DATA item and the UB DATA item the blinking digit position moves when the SHUT TER dial is pressed When the SHUTTER dial is rotated the value of the blinking digit changes After all the digits have been set and the SHUTTER dial is pressed
251. ecorded contents can be checked on the LCD moni tor in the viewfinder or on a monitor connected to the video signal output connectors 1 In the record standby mode press the RET button on the camera lens section 1 RET button The tape rewinds and about 6 seconds of the content recorded in DV format is played back and about 8 sec onds of the content recorded in HDV format is played back After playback this device returns to standby mode at the position on the tape where the RET button was pressed m If you continue to hold down the RET button up to about 18 seconds of content recorded in DV format and up to about 20 seconds of content recorded in HDV format can be rewound and played back Pressing the REC VTR trigger button during playback will put this device in REC standby mode The camera will automatically return to recording mode after play back CAUTION This function does not work when using RET button is used as FOCUS ASSIST button This function does not work when the GY HD250 GY HD251 is in the stop mode During recording check the following indication will appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging etc HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder When the STATUS 0 1 4 screen is displayed 59 SHOOTING OPERATION HEADER REC Function When the REC VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed this function first r
252. ecords the color bar video and the test tone 1 kHz sine wave of the built in signal generator at the beginning of the tape Then it records the black video signal and the mute audio signal for the duration specified in advance When the recording is completed this device enters the Record Standby mode The time code value at the Record Standby position becomes the time code specified in advance HEADER REC function Settings Fed to the HEADER REC function such as whether the HEADER REC function should be enabled the HEADER REC execution duration and the time code value setting when the HEADER REC recording is completed etc are made on the HEADER REC menu screen How to set the HEADER REC menu screen The HEADER REC function is enabled when TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL The HEADER REC function is executed under the following circumstances CAM VTR button Set to CAM mode In the Record Standby or Stop mode Tape beginning HEADER REC Record Standby mode i a Normal recording Example 30 sec Example 30 sec Color bar video signal Test tone 1 kHz Setting range 0 to 99 sec gt w Black video signal Mute audio No sound Setting range 0 to 99 sec Time code user s bits recording Time code user s bits recording Time code The value specified on the HEADER The value specified for the UB The value specified on the HEADER The value s
253. ed when in STATUS 1 screen VOLTAGE Indicates battery voltage in 0 1 V steps V CAPA Remaining battery is shown in percentage TIME Remaining battery is shown in minutes min VOLTAGE and CAPA can be selected when using an IDX Endura battery When TIME is set VOLTAGE is dis played MEMO When TIME or CAPA is selected the battery indicator displayed before the value changes depending on the remaining battery level 0 12 or less W 12 to less than 50 50 or more When remaining battery level becomes less than 12 the display changes to RES When CALIBRATION is required from the battery the display switches between TIME CAPA display 30 sec onds and CAL display 2 seconds repeatedly For CALIBRATION refer to the instruction manual of Anton Bauer Battery Please use the remaining battery level and remaining time as a reference for shooting duration SHUTTER DISP Sets the shutter display method to seconds or angle SEC Seconds DEG Degrees MEMO This item is available when REC on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen is set to HDV HD24P DV 24P DV 24PA HDV HD25P or DV 25P Shutter display method is fixed to SEC for other settings NEXT PAGE Camera mode To display the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial VTR mode To display the LCD VF 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial
254. el rotation error when un TAKE UP REEL FAILURE __ loading 8000 Tape problem detected EMERGENCY TAPE TURN POWER OFF TURN BACK ON LATER 108 System error when power is turned on HDV DV LED VTR indicator and TALLY lamp flash Only POWER switch operation is accepted Turn off the power and let this device sit for sometime before turning it back on 109 OTHERS Troubleshooting Symptoms Remedy Power cannot be switched ON Is power supply connected correctly Is battery pack recharged Was the power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been turned OFF Recording is not possible Is the REC LOCK switch on the handle set to ON Is the switch on cassette set to REC If it is set to SAVE set it to REC The Camera mode has not been selected The VTR indicator does not light While the VTR indicator lights press the MODE switch upward to turn on the CAM indicator Camera image does not appear on LCD monitor or in viewfind er The Camera mode has not been selected The VTR indicator does not light While the VTR indicator lights camera image will not be output Press the CAM VTR switch upward to turn on the VTR indicator Image shown on LCD monitor or in viewfinder is dark or blurred Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen Is th
255. en and Viewfinder Display 0 000 31 PREPARATIONS Basic System T aarre anre EANES ARENES E ASRI CEERI LTA Attaching the Zoom LenS 2 000005 Attaching the Microphone Provided How to Attach the Viewfinder 2 Inserting an SD Memory Card 02 200 Inserting an SD Memory Card 2 Taking out the SD memory card About SD Memory Cards 00 00 Attaching the Tripod Base Provided only for U model AC Operationy ien ccess seen ds teak tee Soe tab enne 4 Charging the Built in Battery 0 36 Battery Opetationi sarc taroa sie eee naaa vewl 37 Attaching the Battery 2000 37 Removing the Battery 00 000 37 Precautions for the Battery Operation 38 Remaining Battery Power Display 38 Operating Time with Battery Pack 38 Precautions for the Battery Pack 38 aae a ina liN e MIARE EERSTE eden ah 2 deans ode 38 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Turning the Powar ON 00 000000005 39 Turning the Power ON 0 00000 39 Turning the Power OFF 00002 39 Loading Unloading the Cassette 00 40 Cassette Loading o c es tar oraaa omina inpia anaiei 40 Unloading the Cassette 00 000000 40 Setting and Displaying the Date and Time 41 Setting the Da
256. en is set to STEREO only the audio of CH 1 is output from the monitoring speaker CH 2 The CH 2 channel audio is output ts See Outputting Audio on page 62 ts See AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen on page 85 CAUTION Make sure to move switches all the way Do not leave a switch stopped in a midway position Noise will be gener ated and operation irregularities will occur DISPLAY Display button When LCD VF in the LCD VF 4 4 menu display is set to OFF press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch between the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen When LCD VF in the LCD VF 4 4 menu display is set to ON press the DISPLAY button for 2 seconds to switch the LCD screen ON and OFF Press the DIS PLAY button briefly to change the display mode for the LCD screen as follows Only image displayed gt Characters shown enlarged Image and characters displayed z t See Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor on page 29 VTR VTR indicator This indicator lights when the camera is in the VTR mode To perform VTR playback or to input the HDV DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector on page 16 press the CAMIVTR button on page 13 to turn on this indicator It flashes when the mode is being changed HDV DV signal input is possible with the GY HD200U GY HD201E FULL AUTO Full auto shooting FAS switch This is the ON OFF switch for FAS mode During FAS mode FAS is displayed
257. ence If this hap pens turn the power off and then on again 24 INHIBIT CHANGE FRAME RATE MENU The FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 or 60 30 and a tape recorded in 24 frame is played back or it is input into the 1EEE1394 port in VTR mode Display Status Action 60 30 INHIBIT The FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 or 24 and a tape re Sets the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu CHANGE FRAME __ corded in 60 30 frame is played back or it is input into the screen to match the frames RATE MENU IEEE1394 port in VTR mode ts See page 77 50 25 INHIBIT The FRAME RATE item is set to 60 30 or 24 and a tape re CHANGE FRAME __ corded in 50 25 frame or it is input into the IEEE1394 port RATE MENU in VTR mode AUX IN INHIBIT CHANGE FRAME RATE MENU U model Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 or 24 and the GENLOCK AUX IN switch is set to AUX IN E model Displays when the FRAME RATE item is set to 60 30 or 24 and the GENLOCK AUX IN switch is set to AUX IN Set the FRAME RATE item as shown below to input exter nal images U model 60 30 E model 50 25 SYNC LOCKING Camera image is locking to external synchronization sig nals It is not possible to enter recording mode while SYNC LOCKING is displayed Wait until the indication disap pears DV 24P INVALID DV 24PA INVALID was played back or input into the IEEE1394 connector in VTR mode on the E model INVALID SYN
258. enes one after another the time codes become discontinuous at the transition points between scenes REC The preset mode is selected and the time code run mode becomes the REC run mode Set to this position to record with the time code or user s bits set anew preset The time code operates in the run mode during recording only If this setting is used when recording scenes one after another the time codes are recorded as continuous time codes REGEN Regeneration mode in which this device reads existing time codes on the tape and records time codes in continuation of the existing ones Set to this position when you want to add additional time codes to time codes already recorded on the tape MEMO Preset of time code and user s bits is performed on the TC UB CLOCK menu ts See page 44 ts See TC UB CLOCK Menu Screen on page 90 CAM VTR Camera VTR mode switch button Each time you press this button the mode switches between camera mode and VTR mode When you do this the VTR indicator on page 19 dis plays the following statuses While the mode is being switched Flashing In VTR mode Lit In camera mode Off Select the Camera mode to record the camera image Select the VTR mode to playback VTR or to input the HDV DV signal from the IEEE1394 connector on page 16 HDV DV signal input is possible with the GYHD200U GY HD201E When the power is turned on the mode becomes the Camera mo
259. ens The ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen WHITE BALANCE menu screen and SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen can be displayed through the CAMERA PROCESS menu screen e This item is only displayed in the Camera mode The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode PLAY STL FWD REV SWITCH MODE Displays the menu screens related to the camera switch functions e This item is only displayed when in camera mode AUDIO MIC Displays a menu screen related to audio Camera mode It consists of two screens VTR mode It consists of one screen In VTR mode the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording LCD VF Displays a menu screen for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder and for adjustments of the picture quality of LCD monitor Camera mode It consists of four screens VTR mode It consists of two screens TU UB CLOCK Displays a menu screen for setting the time code user s bit data date and time The ways that the date and time are recorded together with the display style are set here The TIME DATE menu screen and CLOCK ADJUST screen can be displayed through the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording OTHERS Displays a menu screen for setting other functions and to display the hour meter It consists o
260. enu screen is set to STEREO only the audio of CH 1 is output from the monitoring speaker The volume of the alarm tone is set with the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen OFF LOW MIDDLE HIGH 57 SHOOTING OPERATION Basic Recording Opera tion 11 Set the POWER switch to ON This device turns on in camera mode 2 Start recording Press the REC VTR trigger button on the GY HD250 GY HD251 to start recording Once recording has started the FRONT TALLY lamp and BACK TALLY lamp light red FOCUS ASSIST button FRONT TALLY lamp REC trigger button POWER switch FOCUS ASSIST button REC trigger button BACK TALLY lamp RET button VTR trigger button 58 MEMO The way the FRONT TALLY and the BACK TALLY lamps flash differ depending on what you set in the FRONT TALLY and BACK TALLY items on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen t See page 96 CAUTION This device enters the stop mode automatically at TAPE END If this mode continues for 3 minutes the mode switches to the tape protect mode us See OTHERS 1 2 Menu Screen on page 96 LONG PAUSE TIME item If the REC VTR trigger button is pressed very quickly and repeatedly or the POWER switch is moved immedi ately after the trigger button is pressed the GY HD250 GY HD251 may not enter the record mode To remedy this condition set the POWER switch to OFF and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power o
261. epending on the REC item setting and the ASPECT item setting in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen as shown below SAFETY ZONE OFF 4 3 14 9 16 9 16 9 4 3 CENTER MARK OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON REC ASPECT DV 60 DV 501 i DV 24P 4 3 Cannot be selected DV 24PA DV 25P 16 9 HDV HD60P HDV HD50P HDV HD30P 16 9 HDV HD25P HDV HD24P 30 SAFETY ZONE 2 35 1CE 2 35 1CH CENTER MARK OFF ON OFF ON Dy ene 4 3 Cannot be selected DV 24P DV 24PA x DV 25P 16 9 HDV HD60P HDV HD50P HDV HD30P HDV HD25P HDV HD24P Switching between the LCD Screen and Viewfinder Display m When the LCD VF item in the LCD VF 4 4 menu is set to OFF the LCD monitor and viewfinder VF displays are as shown below LCD Monitor Status LCD Closed Normal LCD Inverted LCD LCD Open Normal LCD Inverted LCD LCD Display VF Display MEMO You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2 seconds After you set up the function that switches the display between the LCD monitor and the viewfinder by holding down the DISPLAY button the display mode is cancelled by the LCD monitor open close and normal inverted operations If the LCD monitor is closed inside this device with th
262. es not indicate a malfunction The data recorded for the date and time or time code on the tape can be shown on the screen To enable or dis able the display is selected on the menu screen Display of date and time TIME DATE menu screen Display of time code LCD VF 1 2 menu screen Fast Forward Rewind Press the FF button in the stop mode to fast forward the tape Press the REW button in the stop mode to rewind the tape VTR mode only SWITCH TO VTR MODE is displayed and the function does not work if the FF or REW buttons are pressed when Camera mode is in the stop mode Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewind ing MEMO When the tape approaches the end during fast forward ing or rewinding the tape speed decelerates to protect the tape The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may become longer when used in a cold environment This is not a malfunction Search Press the FF button in the play mode or still mode to search the tape in the forward direction Playback takes place while fast forwarding Pressing the REW button executes search of the tape in the reverse direction Playback takes place while rewind ing Each press on the button switches the speed to x2 x5 and x10 m Press the PLAY STILL button to resume normal playback m Press the STOP button to stop MEMO To output sound during the search set the SEARCH AUDIO DV item on the AUDI
263. ession 4 1 1 DV format 8 bit 25 Mbps NTSC 4 2 0 PAL MPEG1 Audio Layer II 16 bit locked audio 48 kHz PCM for 2 channels or 12 bit 32 kHz PCM for 4 channels MiniDV tape 18 8 mm sec 63 minutes with an M DV63PROHD tape Compliance with SMPTE EBU stan dard 0 dBs 6 dBs high impedance unbal anced 0 dBs 6 dBs low impedance unbal anced Composite video signals 1V p p Genlock input 0 3V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC BB signals SMPTE 170M RS 170A compliant NTSC ITU R BT 470 6 compliant PAL HDTV Tri sync signals SMPTE 296M SMPTE 274M com pliant BNC Analog composite output 1 0 V p p 75 Q unbalanced RCA Analog component output Y PB PR HD SD SDI output 1 0 V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC 0 7 V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC SMPTE 292M compliant HD serial Audio inputs Mic Line Audio outputs Earphone jack IEEE1394 connector digital signals SMPTE 259M compliant SD serial digital signals BNC 60 dBs 3 KQ balanced XLR 48 V output for phantom power supply 4 dBs 10 kQ balanced XLR 8 dBs low impedance unbalanced RCA x2 17 dBs to 60 dBs 8 Q impedance stereo mini jack x2 6 pin ACCESSORIES Lens SA Microphone 21 Core Filter 21 Clamp Filter 24 SD memory card 24 Tripod base 1 Instruction Manual EB Warranty Card 21 USA and Canada only U model only For details con
264. ether to display the video format in the status display on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen ON Displays the video format OFF Does not display the video format In camera mode Displays the video format set in the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen In VTR mode Displays the video format recorded on the playback tape or the video format input from the IEEE1394 connector TAPE REMAIN Selects whether or not the remaining tape time minutes is shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen ON Displayed OFF Not displayed TC UB Selects whether or not the time code or user s bits data should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen OFF Not displayed ON Displayed Whether the time code or user s bits data is shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch AUDIO Selects whether the audio level meters should be shown in the status display on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen Camera mode STATUS 1 screen VTR mode STATUS screen OFF Not displayed ON Displayed BATTERY INFO For setting the status display method when loading the Anton Bauer Battery The status will be displayed on the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen In camera mode only display
265. evice and operations or data exchange may not be possible even if the devices are connected If noise appears on the screen or the audio cuts out re connect the IEEE1394 cable or turn the GY HD250 GY HD251 on again If you turn the power to the device connected to the IEEE1394 connector on and off or switch the video input noise may occur in the audio If you perform this type of operation set the speaker volume as low as possible on the audio device connected to this device Recording may not be possible in some cases even if the recorder is equipped with a IEEE1394 connector When Using the GY HD250 GY HD251 as Recording Unit Dubbing From Another Videocassette 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on left side of the GY HD250 GY HD251 DV When dubbing in DV format HDV When dubbing in HDV format 2 Connect the units with the IEEE1394 cable 3 Turn ON both units 4 Place the GY HD250 GY HD251 in the VTR MODE Press the CAM VTR button to turn on the VTR indicator 5 Set the frame rate Set the FRAME RATE item 60 30 50 25 24 on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu to match the HDV DV signal frame rate input from the IEEE1394 connector ts See page 77 1 IEEE1394 switch Recording unit Signal flow IEEE1394 cable CAUTION Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV or DV Start recording after making sure that both devices are properly connected 6 Set th
266. f two screens FILE MANAGE Displays the FILE MANAGE menu screen Saves the menu screen settings as a file on this device or an SD memory card or reads the menu screen settings saved in the file It is also possible to reset the menu settings to default settings or initialize format an SD memory card ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 100 The cursor P does not move to this item when VTR is activated EXIT The normal screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is aligned with this item 76 VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 Menu Screen The VIDEO FORMAT menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen In VTR mode this screen consists of one screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item FRAME RATE Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Sets the frame rate for shooting U model 60 30 Shoots at 480 60i 720 60p 720 30p 50 25 Shoots at 720 50p 720 25p 24 Shoots at 480 24p 2 3 2 3 pulldown 480 24p advance mode 2 3 3 2 pulldown 720 24p E model 60 30 Shoots at 720 60p 720 30p 50 25 Shoots at 576 50i 720 50p 576 25p 720 25p 24 Shoots at 720 24p CANCEL Cancels the settings EXECUTE Executes the settings MEMO If you change the FRAME RATE item setting the system is rebooted t See page 54 The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is in VTR mode or is ejecting a tape 10801 CAMERA
267. for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format setting See page 83 Displayed if functions were assigned to the USER1 3 buttons 1 See page 83 Displayed when the WHT BAL white balance selector switch on page 15 is set to PRST PRESET depends on the video format No Item Contents ation VTR mode indication STBY In record standby mode record pause mode REC During recording PLAY During playback FF During fast forward REW During rewind STL During still picture playback mode FWD During playback in forward direction FWD1 About x2 speed FWD2 About x5 speed FWD3 About x10 speed REV During playback in reverse direction REV1 About x2 speed REV2 About x5 speed REV3 About x10 speed STOP Stop mode Tape protect mode EJECT Cassette being ejected No tape loaded Indication of date and time Indicates the date and time Whether or not the date and time should be displayed as well as the display style are set on the TIME DATE menu LCD BRIGHT indication When the brightness of the monitor screen is adjusted with the LCD BRIGHT button the date and time indications and the VTR mode indication are turned off and the LCD BRIGHT indicator is displayed Example BRIGHT 5 eeeeetecceell Numeric value Any of 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Indication of Black operation B Displayed when the black stretch or
268. functions are only valid in Camera mode They do not work in VTR mode Synchronized Signals The synchronized signal differs depending on the input sync signal Refer the table below Input sync signal Terminal Video signal BB Tri syne 720p 1080i VIDEO Composite SC H V F Vv VF SD Component H V F Vv VF HD Component 720p Vv H V Vv Y PsB PR_ HD Component 1080i VF Vv H V F SD RGB H V F Vv VF SD Y C SC H V F Vv VF SD SDI H V F Vv VF Ea HD SDI 720p v H V v HD SDI 1080i V F Vv H V F SC Subcarrier phase H Horizontal phase V Vertical phase F Field phase Adjust SC PHASE and H PHASE in the above table from the GENLOCK menu screen Adjust SC and H PHASE Connection m During Standby or Stop mode input synchronization sig nals from a Sync signal generator to the GENLOCK AUX IN terminal The following synchronization signals are applicable SD synchronization signal BB Black burst signals SMPTE170M RS 170A compliant for NTSC ITU R BT 470 6 compliant for PAL HD synchronization signal HDTV Tri sync signals SMPTE296M compliant for HD720p SMPTE274M compliant for HD1080i CAUTION When the FRAME RATE is set to 60 30 or 24 in the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen input a 59 94 Hz synchronization signal vertical synchronization 50 Hz 60 Hz synchronization signals cannot be synchronized If the FRAME RATE is set to 50 25 input a 50 Hz syn chronizatio
269. g level differs depending on the switch position as follows Factory presets L 0 dB no boosting is applied M 9 dB boosted to approximately 3 times the original H 18 dB boosted to approximately 8 times the original The boosting level for each switch position can be changed with the SWITCH MODE menu screen ts See page 83 The more the boosting level is increased the more the resulting image will be noisy When the FULL AUTO switch on page 19 is ON this is fixed at ALC J WHT BAL White balance switch Three white balance modes are selectable with this switch B Switch into white balance mode memorized in B If white balance is performed with the switch in this position it will be memorized into B A Switch into white balance mode memorized in A If white balance is performed with the switch in this position it will be memorized into A PRST Switch into white balance mode 3200K or PRESET 5600K set in PRESET TEMP item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen ts See page 77 FAW Full Auto White Balance mode can be set to A B or PRESET with the SWITCH MODE menu screen t See page 83 In the FAW mode video color temperatures are constantly sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white bal ance When the FULL AUTO switch on page 19 is ON this is fixed at FAW MEMO Fine tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in auto white balance in WHITE PAI
270. g recording User s bits are displayed during playback OFF User s bits are not recorded during recording User s bits are not displayed during playback Sets how to record the time code TC and user s bits UB during IEEE1394 input of HDV DV format OFF Records the TC UB set in this device ON Records the TC UB of the IEEE1394 input MEMO This is validated when TCG SOURCE is set to INTERNAL In HDV format the UB set in this device is recorded regardless of the setting HEADER REC To make settings related to the HEADER REC function align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUT TER dial 1 See HEADER REC Menu Screen on page 94 TIME DATE To make settings related to the date and time align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial 1 See TIME DATE Menu Screen on page 95 PAGE BACK T This can be displayed When 24 is set this i When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen and selected when 60 30 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen s fixed at NON DROP and NON DROP is displayed 2 This can be displayed and selected when 50 25 is set for the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen 93 MENU SCREENS HEADER REC Menu Screen The HEADER REC menu screen is used for settings related to the HEADER REC function t See page 60
271. g the lens or viewfinder may result in damage Routine and Periodical Maintenance This device incorporates precision mechanical parts which will collect dirt wear out and deteriorate as this device is used After this device has been used for a long period even in a normal environment the heads drums and tape trans port mechanisms also collect dirt Especially dust which penetrates the inside of the VTR section during outdoor use will promote the wear and deterioration of mechanical parts by causing poor contact between tape and heads or failing to maintain the video and audio quality at high levels To pre vent wear and deterioration clean the mechanical parts using a head cleaning tape as routine maintenance How ever cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not enough for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism so it is also recommended to apply periodical maintenance inspection to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure As the replace ment adjustment and servicing of parts require advanced skill and equipment please consult the person in charge of professional video equipment at your nearest JVC autho rized service agent Head Cleanin To maintain beautiful pictures and sound be sure to use a head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically ts See Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape If head cleaning is not performed periodically a type of mosaic noise called block noise may appear in th
272. g the setting 1 See pages 53 and 74 When status indications are magnified warnings are not displayed on the LCD monitor ts See Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor on page 29 103 OTHERS Warnings and Responses Cont d Error code WARNING 7001 DRUM MOTOR FAILURE Warning Warning Indications for VTR Abnormalities Should malfunctions occur during VTR operation this device self diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnose together with an error code on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder Error Code Error Details This device Operation Remedy 0201 Indicates dew formation condensa Operation stops All opera Leave this device with the power ON CONDENSATION ON DRUM tion 3200 Tape cannot be loaded LOADING FAILURE 3300 Tape cannot be unloaded UNLOADING FAILURE 4100 Irregularity with eject operation CASSETTE EJECT FAILURE tions are rejected until the indication disappears ts See page 9 Switch the power OFF and then switch it back ON However the tape may be damaged depending on the circum stances Please consult the person in charge of professional video equip ment at your nearest JVC authorized service agent 5605 5609 Tape is cut Operation stops Press the EJECT button to take out the DEFECTIVE TAPE cassette If the tape runs out during recording switch the power OFF and then switch it back ON press the EJEC
273. ge is not inverted and flipped even if the REVERSE PICTURE item in the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen is set to ROTATE 99 FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION How to Use Skin Detail Cont d Using the Skin Detail Function To use the skin detail function set on the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen select ON for the SKIN DETECT item on the CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 menu screen In addition you can use the LEVEL item to set three levels of suppression of skin color area detail enhancement in the video signal 1 See page 78 While the skin detail function operates the SD indicator is displayed on the STATUS 0 and STATUS 1 screen in the viewfinder or LCD monitor D4 SD display 3 12 00 01 02 03 01 23 45 STATUS 0 Confirming the color tone area adjusted with the Skin Detail function When you push the ZEBRA switch on the front panel to SKIN AREA the skin detail function turns ON and the color area adjusted with the skin detail function is displayed in color in the LCD monitor or viewfinder ZEBRA switch MEMO When the REVERSE PICTURE item in the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen is set to ROTATE skin detail function is available but the detection area is not displayed in the viewfinder or LCD screen When COLOR GAIN item on the ADVANCED PRO CESS menu screen is set to OFF only the portion the skin detail function is working is displayed in skin color us See pa
274. ge 80 100 Outputting Color Bars This device can output three types of color bars depending on the camera settings NTSC standard Outputs color bars compliant with the SMPTE standard PAL standard Outputs color bars compliant with the EBU standard 16 9 screen Outputs multi format color bars To output color bars make the following settings 1 Turn the FULL AUTO switch to OFF 2 Set the BARS item on the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen to ON 1 See page 77 Color bars are output FULL AUTO switch USER button m Outputting color bars using the USER buttons 11 Turn the FULL AUTO switch to OFF 2 Assign BARS to one of the USER1 2 or 3 buttons ts See SWITCH MODE Menu Screen on page 83 3 Press the USER button to which BARS was assigned Color bars are output MEMO You can select whether to output an audio test signal during color bar output using the TEST TONE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen t See page 84 Color bars are not output when FULL AUTO mode is ON or in VTR mode OTHERS Warnings and Responses Warnings are displayed on the LCD monitor or the viewfinder if there was a mistaken operation if the battery or tape is low or if there is a problem on the VTR In addition if the tape or battery is low or the VTR has a problem the tally lamp flashes or lights and an alarm is output from the monitor speaker or PHONES jack
275. git changes When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward the value becomes higher When rotated downward the value becomes smaller Repeat the procedure described in and above to set the day month year hours minutes The digits indicating seconds cannot be set pPress the SHUTTER dial in sync with a time signal to enter the date and time precisely 3 When all the settings are completed rotate the SHUT TER dial to align the cursor with the PAGE BACK item and then press the SHUTTER dial The TIME DATE menu screen returns 4 To return to the normal screen use either of the following methods Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen and then select the EXIT item on the TOP MENU screen before pressing the SHUTTER dial 42 Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen Whether or not the time and date should be displayed on the screen and how to display them are set on the TIME DATE menu screen 01 02 03 01 23 45 Date Time 1 Display the TIME DATE menu screen Select the TC UB CLOCK item on the TOP MENU screen Select the TIME DATE item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen 2 Set the TIME DATE menu screen DISPLAY item Sets whether or not date and time should be displayed Set to ON to display the indications DISPLAY MODE Sets the video output mode in item which date and time should be dis played BARS Displayed when outputting the color bar CAM Displayed when outputting
276. h the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen When using a stereotype jack and stereo sound should be output the following setting should be performed Set the MONITOR SELECT switch on page 19 to BOTH Set the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen to STEREO 12 m Connecting the Earphone Cable To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible as shown in the figure Clamp filter Shoulder belt hooks Allows you to attach a separately sold shoulder belt LCD monitor Shows a color camera image or the VTR playback picture It is also used for displaying the following Menu Setting screens Characters showing the whether this device is set to shooting mode or VTR playback mode Date and time and time code Audio level meter Warning indications etc ts See page 22 LCD Door C 3 CAMNTR SE p AUDIO SELECT TC 626 68 A LCD BRIGHT I LCD BRIGHT LCD brightness button This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD mon itor display Pushing the button in the direction makes the monitor brighter Pushing the button in the direction makes the monitor darker Pushing the buttons simultaneously returns the set ting to the standard setting J CH 1 CH 2
277. h to AUX IN m Set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen as fol lows U model DV 601 E model DV 501 m Set SET UP item on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen as follows Only for U model ON Set to this when input analog signals include the setup signal OFF Set to this when input analog signals do not include the setup signal Operation m Start and stop recording with the REC VTR trigger button EE images of input signals are output in DV 601 U model or DV 50 E model formats from the various image output terminals CAUTION Recording cannot be checked using the lens RET button when recording external image signals Do not touch GENLOCK AUX IN switch during record ing Status Screen Display on the LCD Screen or Viewfinder AUX is displayed at the top left with signal format DV601 or DV501 AUX display AUX display DV 601 AUX DV 601 AUX W00 00 00 00 20min STBY 01 02 STATUS 1 screen STBY 01 02 03 M01 STATUS 0 screen 65 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Using GENLOCK Func tions This device features a GENLOCK IN terminal Input external synchronization signals in the GENLOCK IN terminal to syn chronize camera images or playback images with external signals Additionally the H horizontal and SC subcarrier phase adjustments can be performed on image signals of this device for external synchronization signals from the GEN LOCK menu screen GENLOCK
278. hae ge P Battery Mount Converter ti L 112 1 3 ACM 12 2391 3 ACM 17 XLR 4P AC AC Adapter 1 2 Zoom Lens JEN S14 x 7 3B12U FUJINON if 517 x 6 6BRM FUJINON t l 20 x 6 4B12U FUJINON S Lee Y YH16 x 7K12U CANON 5 YH19 x Sth CANON Carrying Case Remote 2 3 Zoom Lens lee me oe SS Headset 0 DT109 Beyerdynai Monitor Monitor HDD Unit DR HD100 DVVTR BR HD50 Non linear Editing System Control Unit RM LPS55 RM LP57 mic l l l I Ail eg View Finder Camera Remot VF P400 l M P H l l i 4 i View Finder DM 3106 Astrodesign eat l V R70P HAD Marshall Electronics Z J F lonitor 1 An HZ FM13 cannot be used with a Th16 x 5 5BRMU or 14 x 7 3B12 U zoom lens Use a FUJINON focus manual unit FMM 8 CFH 3 CFC 12 990 For details please consult your JVC authorized dealer 32 seks 2 bON te Control Unit 210 Attaching the Zoom Lens 1 Loosen the mount ring 2 Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the mount 3 Tighten the mount ring 4 Connect the cable connector 5 Clamp the lens cable CAUTION Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely Incomplete tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed back focus Set the GY HD250
279. hanges When the SHUTTER dial is rotated upward the value becomes higher When rotated downward the value becomes smaller Repeat the procedure described in and above to set the desired value for all digits After setting the frame digit press the SHUTTER dial to make EXECUTE blink The setting values are con firmed when the SHUTTER dial is pressed again To cancel the setting select CANCEL and press the SHUTTER dial 3 When all the digits are set Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen or Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the PAGE BACK item and then press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen Presetting user s bit data The user s bit data are preset with the UB PRESET item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The method for setting is the same as the method for setting the time code described on the left The user s bit can be specified using numerals or alpha betic letters from 0 to F for each digit To record user s bit data set the UB REC item to ON Only when set to FRAME RATE 50 25 CAUTION It is not possible to set all the digits of the user s bit data to p Reading of the data during playback will not be possible for an all F setting Zero resetting the Time Code or User s Bit Data This is performed with the TC or UB PRESET item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen Performed separately for the time code and the user s bit data
280. he cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen DRUM HOUR Displays the drum usage time Use as an estimate for regular maintenance The cursor P does not move to this item FAN HOUR Displays the fan motor usage time Use as an estimate for regular maintenance The cursor P does not move to this item 95 MENU SCREENS FILE MANAGE Menu Screen You can perform the following operations in the FILE MAN AGE menu screen Settings corresponding to shooting conditions can be read immediately with the following read only files LIVE HD60P Ideal setting for HD60P format LIVE HD50P Ideal setting for HD50P format CINEMA HD24P Ideal setting for movie quality shoot ing The read only files listed above cannot be saved or reset Save menu settings Camcorder CAM1 2 3 4 SD mem ory card EXT1 2 3 4 to files Load saved files You can set a SUB NAME for the file to be saved Reset the menu settings to the factory settings Initialize format an SD memory card When you set CANCEL for the LOAD STORE RESET and FORMAT SD CARD items these operations are not executed A message is displayed in the LCD monitor or the view finder EXECUTE Displayed for 3 seconds COMPLETE Displayed for 3 seconds ERROR Flashes Error displays See page 97 LOAD FILE LOAD FILE EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete
281. head cleaning tape us See page 7 CLEANING TAPE Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted The display disappears when the head cleaning tape is re moved COPY GUARD Tried to play back a copyguarded tape Cannot play back a copyguarded tape FAN MOTOR HOUR Over the prescribed fan motor usage time Please contact your local dealer or JVC PUSH CASSETTE COVER The videocassette cover is not firmly shut Lightly push the top center of the videocassette cover CHANGE THE SYS TEM Displayed when you attempt to change FRAME RATE item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen When the FRAME RATE item setting is changed the frame rate system for this device is changed Check the frame rate to use before changing the setting ts See pages 54 and 77 When status indications are magnified warnings are not displayed on the LCD monitor ts See Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor on page 29 107 OTHERS Warnings and Responses Cont d m TALLY lamp Blinks when remaining battery power or tape is low Only in Camera mode Blinking Pattern Remaining Battery Tape Slow blinking once per sec Remaining battery power is low Remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes Tape has run out Irregularity has occurred in the VTR Error code Fast blinking four times per sec WARNING 7001 DRUM MOTOR FAILURE
282. his button the white balance is automati cally adjusted Itis not activated in preset full auto shooting full auto white balance and color bar modes ts See White Balance Adjustment on page 51 Lens mounting ring Lens lock lever Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlock wise to release lens To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well and then turn the ring clockwise until firm t See Attaching the Zoom Lens on page 33 11 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Rear Section Back tally lamp This lamp lights up when this device enters the record mode It blinks during the transition to the record mode When the tape has run out or the VTR enters the warning mode it blinks quickly Use the BACK TALLY item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to select whether or not the lamp should light and the lighting pattern t See page 93 PHONES Earphone jack This is a stereo mini jack for connecting an earphone for audio monitoring Plug in an earphone or headphone with a 3 5 mm diameter plug The earphone can also be used to monitor alarm tones in accordance with the circum stances The audio channel to be output is selected with the AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen and MONITOR SELECT switch on page 19 The audio output level is adjusted with the Audio monitor volume control on page 14 MEMO The volume of the alarm sound is set wit
283. icated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen is set to 32 K Audio dication is recorded with 12 bit 32 kHz sampling 48K Indicated when the AUDIO MODE item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen is set to 48 K Audio is recorded with 16 bit 48 kHz sampling When HDV format is set 48K is displayed ts See page 87 Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu Audio level meter indication Displays the CH 1 CH 2 audio level meters Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu t See page 91 Standard audio level indication The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by Il 20 dB 12 dB ts See AUDIO REF LEVEL on page 87 CH 1 CH 2 Iris indicator display A Iris set higher than normal W Iris set to normal Y Iris set lower than normal The indication can be switched ON OFF with the F NO IRIS IND item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen ts See page 89 Iris F value indication Indicates the F number of the connected lens OPEN F2 F2 8 F4 F5 6 F8 F11 F16 CLOSE It is not displayed when the lens is removed For some lenses no display appears The indication can be switched ON OFF with the F NO IRIS IND item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen t See page 89 Filter position indication Indicates the current filter position No display FILTER OFF ND1 FILTER ND1 1 4ND ND2 FILTER ND2 1
284. ication Contents us See page 88 r Tares peg TR Pr a FILE FILE CAM1 CAM2 4 and EXT1 4 indicates SUB NAME 1 See pages 96 98 Standard audio level indication The level at which audio is recorded on the tape is indicated by I A symbol is displayed when a menu setting read from LOAD FILE was changed 20 dB 12 dB The display disappears when the setting is saved using STORE FILE t See AUDIO REF LEVEL on page 84 FULL AUTO ON OFF a GAIN OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB ALC 20 dB SHUTTER When STEP is selected OFF 1 6 1 6 25 1 7 5 1 12 1 12 5 1 15 1 24 1 25 1 30 1 48 1 50 1 60 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 10000 When VARIABLE is selected 1 24 01 1 10489 5 Iris indicator display ris set higher than normal Displayed when FAS or ALC mode is selected ris set to normal EEI A tis set lower than normal The range for the shutter speed differs depending on the video format t See page 83 The indication can be switched ON OFF with the F NO IRIS IND item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen WHT BAL A 00K B 00K PRESET 00K FAW MANUAL Only when the remote control unit is used tr See page 86 For A and B represents 23 25 28 30 32 34 37 43 52 65 or 80 For PRESET 32 or 56 Iris F value indication Indicates the F number of the connected lens AE LEVEL 3 2 1 NORMAL 1 2 3 O
285. ich the skin detail function is applied Adjust as you check the color range Increase the number Widens the range Decrease the number Narrows the range Settings NARROW 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 WIDE 10 MEMO When the COLOR GAIN item is OFF on the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen only the areas where the skin detail function is running are displayed using skin colors PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen 87 MENU SCREENS WHITE BALANCE Menu SWITCH MODE Menu Screen Screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings The SWITCH MODE menu screen Is only displayed in camera mode WHITE PAINT lt R gt Adjusts the R red component when in AWB Auto White Balance mode Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings Increase the number Strengthens the red SHUTTER Sets the fixed value STEP for values that can change using the SHUTTER dial on the right panel or the VARIABLE Decrease the number Weakens the red used when shooting computer monitors Settings MIN 32 31 NORMAL 0 30 MAX 31 STEP Switches the shutter speed using fixed values MEMO VARIABLE Set when shooting a computer monitor etc You can set the following using the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen This is fixed at EEI when in You can select this when A or B is set for the WHT BAL sw
286. ideocassette tape 4 Carefully push the center of the videocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it CAUTION When you close the videocassette cover push it in firmly as far as it will go If the videocassette cover is not closed properly it becomes half locked and this device cannot function If this happens firmly push the videocassette cover in again as far as it will go to lock it The videocassette cover does not open during recording even if you slide the EJECT switch Do not leave the videocassette cover open for a long time Dust or dirt may enter the inside and cause damage Do not touch the videocassette cover or interfere with the eject operation while ejecting is in progress This will cause damage When you close the videocassette cover do not press the black area of the inner cover Setting and Displaying the Date and Time The date and time of the built in clock should be set Pow ered by the built in backup battery the set date and time data continue to count even when the power is switched off The set date and time data are displayed on the LCD mon itor or in the viewfinder and recorded on the tape in accor dance with the settings made on the menu screen Setting the Date and Time Style The date and time are set on the menu screen When setting while observing on a monitor connected to the connector set the ANALOG OUT CHAR item or SDI OUT CH
287. ies outside the European Union If you wish to dispose of this product please do so in accor dance with applicable national legislation or other rules in your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic equipment IV Thank you for purchasing the JVC HD CAMERA RECORDER These instructions are for the GY HD200U CHU GY HD200E CHE and GY HD201E CHE A lens is included with the GY HD200U GY HD200E and GY HD201E A lens is not included with the GY HD200CHU GY HD200CHE and GY HD201CHE IEEE1394 input is possible with the GY HD200U CHU and GY HD201E CHE Explanations concerning unique GY HD200U CHU and GY HD201E CHE functions are set off by the GY HD200U GY HD201E only notice Information applicable only to the GY HD200U CHU is marked by U model only Information applicable only to theGY HD200E CHE GY HD201E CHE is marked by E model only Model Accessories IEEE1394 Applicable Lens Availability Input Model GY HD200U Yes Yes U model GY HD200CHU No Yes GY HD200E Yes No E model GY HD200CHE No No GY HD201E Yes Yes GY HD201CHE No Yes FOV D This device is a HDV DV video system format camera recorder Videocassettes marked with the DW symbol can be used The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded on other units including another GY HD200U GY HD200E GY HD201E are recorded or played back on this device The transien
288. in the following TC DISPLAY switch is changed CAM VTR mode switch is changed VTR operations are performed m USER1 USER2 and USER3 presetting in the SWITCH MODE menus screen is not available when the Time Code Preset screen is displayed m The time code preset screen is displayed on the LCD screen or viewfinder It will not be output from the VIDEO OUT terminal Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time Codes Recorded on Tape The GY HD250 GY HD251 also incorporates a time code reader Therefore when this device enters record mode from record standby mode it can read the time code data recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation of the existing data The recorded user s bit data are identical to the user s bit date recorded on tape However approximately 1 frame variations may occur in scene accuracy To enable this function set the time code related switches as follows before starting recording Setting Set TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to INTERNAL Set the TC GENE switch inside the LCD door to REGEN Set TC DUPLI item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to OFF MEMO The time code framing mode automatically becomes the mode drop frame or non drop frame already recorded on the tape About Time Code Mode m Camera mode TC UB CLOCK menu TC GENE switch TCG SOURCE item FREE REC REGEN INTERNAL TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode EXTERNAL EXT TC
289. in the record record standby or stop mode 1 Set the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch of the chan nel whose audio level that you want to adjust manually to MANU Jy 7 o EAR MONITOR SELECT FULL AUTO switch switch MONITOR volume Monitor speaker CH 1 audio input level volume CH 2 audio input level AUDIO SELECT switch volume 2 Rotate the audio input level control corresponding to the audio input level to be adjusted Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the 3 dB point when a loud sound is input STATUS 1 screen W00 00 00 00 20min 308 FAN l s FIL4 3 F568 aK 12 0 STBY MO1 23 45 C audio level Indicator level reference Ine eel te lisa J SF ASS A a 18 ae 3 0dB OVER MEMO When AUDIO LIMITER in the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen is set to ON the AUDIO LIMITER functions in manual adjust mode Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input ts See AUDIO LIMITER on page 87 The reference level for audio recorded on the tape can be set with the AUDIO REF LEVEL item on the AUDIO MIC menu screen 20 dB or 12 dB The level will change for both CH 1 and CH 2 CAUTION When the AUDIO INPUT switch is set to MIC be sure to check that the microphone is connected to the INPUT1 2 connector If the microphone is not connected incre
290. ing OSEC 30SEC 99SEC BLACK TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the black signal is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Initial Setting OSEC 30SEC 99SEC PAGE BACK 60 The TC UB CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed Executing the HEADER REC Function The START KEY item on the HEADER REC menu screen should be set to STOP REC 1 Load the cassette and engage the Record Standby mode or the Stop mode 2 While pressing the STOP button press the REC VTR trigger button The tape automatically rewinds to the beginning and HEADER REC operation starts from the beginning of the tape After HEADER REC recording is performed for the specified duration only the Record Standby mode is engaged automatically During HEADER REC recording HEADER REC is shown blinking on the LCD monitor and in the view finder SVU gt HEADER RECZ TILTTIVVANN During HEADER REC The menu screen is not displayed during HEADER REC recording 3 After HEADER REC recording is completed and the Record Standby mode is engaged normal recording starts when you press the REC VTR trigger button When the TC GENE switch is set to either REC or REGEN the time code value at the start of the HEADER REC menu screen MEMO To stop during HEADER REC operation press the REC VTR trigger button or the STOP button The HEADER REC menu screen cannot be opened
291. ing conditions Time code reader generator The built in time code reader generator can be used to record the time code and user s bits Built in large 3 5 color LCD display In addition to displaying the camera image and the play back image the LCD monitor shows the status screens menu screens for settings and alarm indications Built in monitor speaker for audio checking The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode The playback sound can be monitored in the playback mode The speaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an abnormal condition occurs in this device Recording check function for convenient recording review function Camera section designed with 3 CCD system for high quality picture 1 3 3 CCD with 1 110 000 effective pixels employed Dig ital signal processing for reproduction of HDV DV high quality picture Multi Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit Multi zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris position even in back light conditions or when a bright sub ject moves in a frame Safety Zone indication in viewfinder Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder Full Auto Shooting FAS function Eliminates the need for troublesome switch or filter opera tions by automatically providing a wide range of compati bility with shooting conditions that change as you move between indoors and outdoors or between bright and dark locations ND filters for 1 4ND 1 16ND provided IE
292. ing the CH 2 channel input connector Select using the CH 2 INPUT switch INPUT1 Inputs the audio from the INPUT1 connector into CH 2 INPUT2 Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector into CH 2 CH 2 INPUT switch AUDIO INPUT switch MEMO The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH 1 regardless of the setting Selecting the audio signal input Select the sound to be input to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 con nector using the AUDIO INPUT switch The setting is made for each of INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector LINE Set to this position when connected to audio equipment etc The reference input level is 4 dBs MIC Set to this position when using a dynamic microphone MIC 48V Set to this position when a microphone phan tom microphone requiring 48 V DC power supply is connected CAUTION When connecting a component that does not require 48 V power supply make sure that the switch is not set to MIC 48V before the component is connected 56 MEMO You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC 48V in the INPUT1 2 MIC REF item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen Adjusting Audio during Recording For each audio channel use the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch to select whether the audio level adjustment should be set to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode m Adjusting the audio input level control The audio input level can be adjusted manually when the GY HD250 GY HD251 is
293. ing the cleaning tape please follow the instructions of this sheet Note 5 If the HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED does not disappear after repeated head cleanings the recording tape may be abnormal Avoid excessive repeated use of the head cleaning tape INTRODUCTION Battery Pack to be Used This device can use any of the following batteries Factory setting U model Anton Bauer battery E model IDX battery Recommended batteries U model Dionic 90 Anton Bauer E model Endura 7 IDX CAUTION Use only the recommended batteries If a heavy battery is used the battery may fall out depend ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used Videocassette to be Used Use JVC s videocassette tapes marked with the DY symbol Mini DV videocassette M DV63HD M DV63PROHD Do not use M DV80 Videocassettes cannot be used upside down Avoid storing a videocassette with its tape not being com pletely wound as this may damage the tape Rewind it to the beginning before placing a cassette into storage e Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and good ventilation where mould does not form After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly it becomes unable to maintain full performance due to an increase in noise caused by dropouts etc Do not continue to use a dirty or damaged tape as this will reduce the rotary head life Videocassette tapes with the IN symbol are provided with a
294. io from the INPUT1 connector into CH 2 INPUT2 Inputs the audio from the INPUT2 connector into CH 2 CH 2 INPUT switch men D rvs AUDIO INPUT _HL erp switch S MEMO The audio from the INPUT1 connector is also input into CH 1 regardless of the setting Selecting the audio signal input Select the sound to be input to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 con nector using the AUDIO INPUT switch The setting is made for each of INPUT1 or INPUT2 connector LINE Set to this position when connected to audio equipment etc The reference input level is 4 dBs MIC Set to this position when using a dynamic microphone MIC 48V_ Set to this position when a microphone phan tom microphone requiring 48 V DC power supply is connected CAUTION When connecting a component that does not require 48 V power supply make sure that the switch is not set to MIC 48V before the component is connected MEMO You can select the normal input level for MIC and MIC 48V in the INPUT1 2 MIC REF item on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen Adjusting Audio during Recording For each audio channel use the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch to select whether the audio level adjustment should be set to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode m Adjusting the audio input level control The audio input level can be adjusted manually when this device is in the record record standby or stop mode 1 Set the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT swit
295. is dial is turned 1 click up or down in the normal screen mode the shutter speed indicator is shown for about 3 seconds on the LCD monitor or in the view finder The shutter speed is changed when this dial is turned while the shutter speed indicator is shown us See page 86 When this dial turned upward or downward while the menu screen is displayed the cursor P also moves upward or downward to allow selection of items in the menu To change the setting value of the item press this dial When the setting value starts blinking turn this dial upward or downward to change the setting ts See Setting Menu Screens on page 75 J ND FILTER ND filter switch Switches the built in ND filter OFF Turns the filter OFF FILTER OFF 1 Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1 4 1 4ND 2 Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1 16 1 16ND When you change this switch the type of the new ND filter is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder CAUTION If you switch the ND filter while shooting is in progress the picture may be disturbed or noise may occur in the audio ts See Camera Settings on page 55 I STATUS Status Menu button Pressing this button in the normal screen mode condi tion in which the menu screen is not shown displays a status screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor The displayed status screen changes each time the but ton is pressed us See Status Screens on page 2
296. itch on the right panel of this device FULL AUTO mode ts See page 15 Settings can be made for A and B individually When PRESET is set is displayed and this cannot be REC Item Setting for STEP Setting for VARIABLE selected Dv 601 417 5 1 15 1 30 1 60 1 100 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 30 03 1 10489 5 When you press the AWB Auto White Balance button and readjust the white balance WHITE PAINT R HDV HD60P 1 10000 becomes NORMAL HDV HD30P WHITE PAINT lt B gt Adjusts the B blue component when in AWB Auto White Balance mode DV 501 1 6 25 1 12 5 1 25 1 50 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 25 04 1 10489 5 Increase the number Strengthens the blue HDV HDS50P 1 4000 1 10000 Decrease the number Weakens the blue HDV HD25P Settings MIN 32 31 NORMAL 0 30 MAX 31 Dv 25P MEMO DV 24P 1 6 1 12 1 24 1 48 1 60 1 100 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 24 01 1 10489 5 Fare ae tae IE TAT se aT PEE MB PE DV 24PA 1 4000 1 10000 e You can select this when A or B is set for the WHT BAL switch on the right panel of this device 1 See page 15 HDV HD24F Sanas canbe made for Aand B individually When PRESET 1s set is displayed and this cannot be FAW Sets the positions to assign the FAW Full Auto White Balance function to the WHT BAL white b
297. itch Switch for setting the time code generator to preset mode or regeneration mode It is also used to select the time code run mode when the preset mode is selected FREE The preset mode is selected and the time code run mode becomes the FREE run mode Set to this position to record with the time code or user s bits set anew preset In this setting the time code always operates in the run mode If this setting is used when recording scenes one after another the time codes become discontinuous at the transition points between scenes REC The preset mode is selected and the time code run mode becomes the REC run mode Set to this position to record with the time code or user s bits set anew preset The time code operates in the run mode during recording only If this setting is used when recording scenes one after another the time codes are recorded as continuous time codes REGEN Regeneration mode in which this device reads existing time codes on the tape and records time codes in continuation of the existing ones Set to this position when you want to add additional time codes to time codes already recorded on the tape MEMO This switch is enabled when TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to INTERNAL Preset of time code and user s bits is performed on the TC UB CLOCK menu ts See page 44 ts See TC UB CLOCK Menu Screen on page 93 CAM VTR Camera VTR mode switch button
298. itial settings TEST TONE Sets whether to output a test audio signal 1 KHz 20dBFS or 12dBFS during color bar output OFF A test audio signal is not output ON A test audio signal is output MIC WIND CUT Selects whether to cut the lows low frequency bands from the audio input signal Use this when you want to reduce wind sounds from the microphone OFF Low frequencies are not cut INPUT1 Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT1 connector INPUT2 Only cuts the low frequencies in the audio from the INPUT2 connector BOTH Cuts the low frequencies in the audio from both the INPUT1 and INPUT2 terminals AUDIO REF LEVEL Sets the reference audio level on the tape Both CH 1 and CH 2 20dB Records with 20 dB as the reference audio level 12dB Records with 12 dB as the reference audio level Set this if you are playing back the recorded tape on an ordinary DV device Set this for both playback and recording This is unrelated to the audio level via the IEEE1394 signal INPUT1 MIC REF Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT1 connector When the AUDIO INPUT switch on page 16 is set to MIC or MIC 48 50dB Sets the reference audio input level at 50 dB 60dB Sets the reference audio input level at 60 dB INPUT2 MIC REF Sets the reference audio input level for the INPUT2 connector When the AUDIO INPUT switch on page 16 is set to MIC or
299. l can be added to COMPONENT output You can also select a setup signal in the IEEE1394 signal input mode 0 0 No setup signal is added 7 5 A setup signal is added Initial settings U model 7 5 E model 0 0 MEMO When the FRAME RATE item is set to 50 25 this item is not displayed PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen 76 CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen The CAMERA OPERATION menu screen is only displayed in the Camera mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings AE LEVEL For adjusting the image level when using auto iris ALC or EEI Increase value Increases level Decrease value Decreases level Settings 3 2 NORMAL 0 2 3 ALC MAX Sets the maximum ALC value to automatically change the signal intensity level depending on the brightness Setting 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB PRESET TEMP Sets the basic color temperature when the WHT BAL white balance selector switch on page 15 is in the PRST PRESET position 3200K Sets the basic color temperature to 3200K Use for light sources with a low color temperature such as halogen lamps 5600K Sets the basic color temperature to 5600K Use for light sources with a high color temperature such as sunlight MEMO This item does not function when the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen is set to PRESET
300. l processing for reproduction of HDV DV high quality picture Multi Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit Multi zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris position even in back light conditions or when a bright sub ject moves in a frame Safety Zone indication in viewfinder Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder Full Auto Shooting FAS function Eliminates the need for troublesome switch or filter opera tions by automatically providing a wide range of compati bility with shooting conditions that change as you move between indoors and outdoors or between bright and dark locations ND filters for 1 4ND 1 16ND provided IEEE1394 connector IEEE1394 connector 6 pin provided Enables transfer of digital data to other equipment provided with IEEE1394 connector such as a non linear editing system Power cannot be supplied 1 3 bayonet type lens Built in color bars ARIB multi format color bars SMPTE EBU type Shutter speeds and menus can be selected using a dial making it very easy to use Variable scan shutter There is no flicker when shooting computer screens and other non NTSC PAL format screens Slow shutter Makes it possible to brightly shoot video of dark subjects with little motion by accumulating the images Backup recording function Continuous extended recording is possible by connecting to HDV DV devices Connect to KA HD250 Studio Kit and use as a studio cam era 3 CONTE
301. layed during playback fast forward and rewind During recording in DV format the data from the IEEE1394 connector is displayed During recording in HDV format the data of internal clock is displayed Whether or not the date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME DATE menu screen 0 See page 95 When the date and time have not been set the following indication appears Voltage indication Example 12 2V Indicates remaining battery level in 0 1V steps Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed Select the display method in BATTERY INFO on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen 0s See page 91 Anton Bauer battery Voltage remaining capacity remaining time IDX Endura battery Voltage remaining capacity Audio Lock indication Displayed when the audio signal from DV recording or playback is locked to the video signal Magnified Status Indications on the LCD Monitor The characters on the status screens can be showed alone in magnified size on the LCD monitor o CH1 SEARS EZ M 4030 20 10 B CH2 U ArT 2 343410 Fo gt Earl 63 min 2668 DDO 12 2V 1 Set the LCD VF item on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen to ON 1 See page 92 2 When the DISPLAY button is briefly pressed while the LCD monitor is displayed the displayed contents change every time the D SPLAY button is pressed Only image displayed
302. le STORE FILE STORE FILE EXECUTE COMPLETE Execute Complete Error displays NO CARD No SD memory card is inserted Insert an SD memory card NO FORMAT The SD memory card is not initialized formatted Initialize format the SD memory card NO ACCESS There is a problem with the SD memory card Replace the SD memory card WRITE PROTECT The SD memory card may be write protected Check that write protection is disabled DISK FULL The SD memory card does not have enough free space Delete unwanted data or initialize format the card INVALID VIDEO FORMAT A settings file for a video format that is not supported was called up Settings files for video formats that are not supported can not be called up READ ONLY FILE Indicates a read only file Read only files cannot be saved ERROR SD CARD Flashing C No FORMAT Error display PUSH JOG BUTTON Error 101 MENU SCREENS FILE MANAGE Menu Screen Cont d Resetting the menu settings to the factory settings Select the RESET FILE item on the FILE MANAGE menu screen e RESET FILE gt SELECT CAM1 SCENE RESET EXECUTE PAGE BACK 1 Turn the SHUTTER dial bring the cursor to SELECT and press the SHUTTER dial The file name setting area for the file to be reset flashes 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial select the name of the file to reset and press the SHUTTER dial CAM1 CAM2 CAM3 CAM4 CURR
303. le of dubbing AUDIO LIMITER Sets whether or not AUDIO LIMITER functions when the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 is set to MANU OFF AUDIO LIMITER is turned off ON AUDIO LIMITER is turned on Recording level is suppressed when excessive audio is input NEXT PAGE To display the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen 84 AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen In VTR mode the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings AUDIO MONITOR Selects whether stereo or mixed audio is output from the PHONES jack when the MONITOR SELECT switch is set to BOTH STEREO Stereo audio CH 1 audio is output to L and CH 2 audio is output to R Outputs only the CH 1 audio from the monitor speaker MIX Mixed audio CH 1 and CH 2 mixed audio is output to L and R FAS AUDIO Selects the recording level adjusting method for FAS Full Auto Shooting CH 1 CH 2 AUTO Sets to AUTO SW SET Follows settings for the AUDIO SELECT switch See CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT switch on page 13 See FULL AUTO switch on page 19 SEARCH AUDIO DV Selects whether to output audio when searching a tape recorded in DV format This also i
304. le the cursor is at this position MEMO 1 When the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu is set to DV 60I or DV 501I is displayed and this cannot be DNR is not applied in VTR mode or during playback selected DNR is not applied to composite output signals in CAMERA mode 2 REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected When the DNR is set to ON the camcorder s S N ratio becomes better but the blurring of moving objects will increase ADVANCED PROCESS Calls up the ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen ts See ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen on page 80 PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 menu screen 4 REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected 78 79 MENU SCREENS ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen Item CINEMA Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings OFF Turns the function OFF ON Sets the gamma characteristics and color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen The monitor image is movie quality This setting is not intended for film output MEMO When this item is set to ON CINE is displayed for COLOR MATRIX and GAMMA items and cannot be selected COLOR MATRIX Sets the color matrix OFF Turns the function O
305. lows you to select the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen t See page 74 You can switch this display ON OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen 1 See page 88 Time Code TC User s Bits UB indication Indicates the time code h m s frame or user s bits data Example Time code TC 00 00 00 00 Colon when non drop frame mode Dot when drop frame mode User s bits UB FF EE DD 20 Whether or not to display this item is set with the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen 1 See page 88 Whether the time code or user s bits should be shown is selected with the TC DISPLAY switch inside the LCD door Remaining tape indication Remaining tape indication displayed in 1 minute steps This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen 1 See page 88 When inserting a brand new tape the remaining tape time is not indicated When the tape has been run the indication will appear The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide When this device is used at low temperatures it may take a while before the indication of the remaining tape time appears Voltage indication Example 12 2V Indicates remaining battery level in 0 1V steps Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed Select the display method in
306. ls over 95 OVER100 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels over 100 F NO IRIS IND Selects whether or not the F number of the lens iris iris level mark is displayed in the status display on the LCD mon itor or in the viewfinder STATUS 1 screen OFF F number and iris level mark is not displayed F NO F number is displayed F NO IND F number and iris level mark is displayed FILTER Selects whether or not the FILTER position of this device is displayed in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder STATUS 1 screen OFF FILTER position is not displayed ON FILTER position is displayed SAFETY ZONE Selects whether or not the safety zone is shown on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder together with the form of the safety zone indication OFF Not displayed 4 3 4 3 zone is displayed 14 9 14 9 zone is displayed 1 16 9 zone is displayed 16 9 4 3 16 9 zone and 4 3 zone are display mixed This cannot be selected when DV format is set 2 35 1 CE Displays 2 35 1 zone in the middle of the screen Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode 2 35 1 CH Displays 2 35 1 zone at the top of the screen Only in HDV format or 24P or 25P mode CENTER MARK Sets whether or not a center mark is displayed when the safety zone is displayed ON Center mark is displayed OFF Center mark is not displayed MEMO When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF is indi
307. me code generator continues to run even if the IEEE1394 cable is disconnected Master unit Slide the IEEE1394 switch to the DV side You can use the GY HD250U GY HD251E GY HD110U or GY HD111E as a slave unit Connections Connect the master unit and the slave unit with an IEEE1394 cable Settings and Operations e Master unit GY HD100U GY HD100E GY HD101E GY HD110U GY HD110E GY HD111E GY HD250U GY HD251E 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to DV 2 Set to Camera mode 3 Set the recording format to DV 60 or DV50I 4 Set the TC GENE switch to FREE Slave unit GY HD250U GY HD251E GY HD110U GY HD111E 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left side to DV 2 Set to VTR mode 3 Check that the camera image from the master unit is input 4 Set TCG SOURCE in the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to INTERNAL GY HD250U GY HD251E 5 Set the TC GENE switch to FREE and the TC DISPLAY switch to TC 6 Set to STOP mode or EJECT mode 7 Press the STOP button for 1 second The DV input time code data from the IEEE1394 termi nal is displayed in the status display When status is in magnified size characters are displayed 8 Press the USER1 button to begin slave lock To skip slave lock press the USER3 button and clear the status display 48 Slave unit O eel i pb AW N ale i Sel t IEEE 1394 terminal IE
308. me code data from the IEEE1394 terminal set TCG SOURCE item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to INTERNAL To record HDV DV input time code and user s bit from the IEEE1394 connector set the TC DUPLI item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to ON us See page 93 To maintain the continuity of time code data use with the TC GENE switch set to REGEN mode when recording HDV DV input signal from the IEEE1394 connector There is no time code display for HDV input CAUTION A time code with a duration of more than 2 hours may not be displayed correctly by DV components for general con sumer use as some of these lack the capability to display longer time codes 43 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Presetting and Recording of Time Code The time codes from the internal time code generator can be recorded at the time of recording scenes The TC UB CLOCK menu screen differs depending on whether the FRAME RATE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen is 60 30 or 50 25 There are two ways to preset the time code Set from the TC UB CLOCK menu screen Set in the LCD screen without opening the menu screen This section explains how to set from the TC UB CLOCK menu screen See page 46 for instructions of setting from the LCD screen Menu and switch settings to set the time code preset are the same as the settings below Setting To preset the Time Code make the following settings m TC GENE switch Set to
309. method ON Viewfinder always displayed the image OFF Turns off the viewfinder display when the LCD monitor is opened MEMO When this item is set to ON the contents displayed on the LCD monitor can be changed with the DISPLAY button See page 29 LCD CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 VF CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 BLACK amp WHITE Selects the LCD monitor and viewfinder display style COLOR Displays the image in color B amp W Displays the image in black and white MEMO Characters are always displayed in color PAGE BACK Camera mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen VTR mode When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen 8 amp 9 MENU SCREENS TC UB CLOCK Menu Screen Time codes TC and user s bits UB can be set on this screen Date and time is set on the TIME DATE screen that can be reached from this screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings TC PRESET To preset the time code align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE The set time code is confirmed CANCEL The set time code is cancelled ZERO PRESET Rese
310. mponent when in AWB Auto White Balance mode Increase the number Strengthens the red Decrease the number Weakens the red Settings MIN 32 31 NORMAL 0 30 MAX 31 MEMO You can select this when A or B is set for the WHT BAL switch on the right panel of this device uss See page 15 Settings can be made for A and B individually When PRESET is set is displayed and this cannot be selected e When you press the AWB Auto White Balance button and readjust the white balance WHITE PAINT R becomes NORMAL PAGE BACK Press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS screen when cursor is at this position SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen When you enter the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen the areas where the skin detail function is applied are displayed in color and other areas are displayed in black and white Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings SKIN COLOR DET Sets the color used by the skin detail function STOP Stops loading the color used by the skin detail function EXECUTE Loads the color used by the skin detail function ts See Using the Skin Detail Function on page 104 SKIN COLOR RANGE Adjusts the range of skin colors to which the skin detail function is applied Adjust as you check the color range Increase the number Widens the range Decrease the number Narrows the range Settings NARROW 10 9 NORMAL 0
311. n USERS NONE LENS RET FOCUS ASSIST STBY 01 02 03 M01 23 45 STATUS 3 STATUS MEMO When the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or longer the menu setting screen is displayed To display the Status screen while the menu setting screen is displayed press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen You can switch between the LCD monitor and the view finder by holding down the DISPLAY button for about 2 seconds When the LCD VF item on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen is set to OFF Status Screens in the Camera Mode o STBY 01 02 03 M01 23 45 I e 3 STATUS 0 Screen STATUS 0 Event Indication External Image Input Mode AUX IN DV 601 AUX 2668 STBY 01 02 03 MO01 23 45 2 STATUS 0 Screen When the Gain or Shutter Speed is changed manually the setting condition is displayed for about 3 seconds at the time the change is made Set the shutter display method to seconds or angle in SHUTTER DISP on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen Only when frame rate is 24p or 25p mode Setting Status Gain value was changed Contents of Indications GAIN 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 18 dB Gain value reached the ALC GAIN ALC FULL AUTO was turned ON OFF FULL AUTO ON FULL AUTO OFF ZEBRA was turned ON OFF ZEBRA ON ZEBRA OFF Shutter speed value was changed j When SHUTTER DISP is set to
312. n Size 4 3 16 9 Mode Selection The screen size of recorded images can be selected with the ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen ts See page 75 To record using the standard screen set ASPECT to 4 3 To record using the 16 9 screen set ASPECT to 16 9 54 ASPECT item 4 3 oo SQUEEZE 4 3 TV oOo LETTER 16 9 TV In DV mode selection of SQUEEZE and LETTER is not possible The screen display mode becomes SQUEEZE MEMO When you set the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu to HDV format the ASPECT item is fixed at 16 9 and 16 9 is displayed If the above applies you can set to display the image in the style of 4 3 televisions t See DOWN CON HDV on page 75 In the SAFETY ZONE item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen you can display the safety zone for a standard screen as well as a 16 9 screen in the viewfinder or LCD monitor ts See page 86 When the ASPECT item is set to 4 3 the screen that is displayed may differ depending on the 16 9 television you are using Audio Input Signal Selec tion This device is provided with the INPUT1 connector and the INPUT2 connector for audio input Select the audio from the INPUT1 connector or the INPUT2 connector using the CH 2 INPUT switch for the audio to be recorded in CH 2 Selecting the CH 2 channel input connector Select using the CH 2 INPUT switch INPUT1 Inputs the aud
313. n after completing the set tings use either of the following methods Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen and align the cursor P with the EXIT item and then press the SHUTTER dial MEMO While the menu screen is being displayed the USER1 USER2 and USER3 buttons can also perform menu operations USER1 button Raises the cursor Changes the set ting USER2 button Lowers the cursor P Changes the set ting USER3 button Confirms the menu item Confirms the setting The menu screen is not displayed when switching between Camera and VTR mode VTR indicator flashes 75 MENU SCREENS TOP MENU Screen Different menu screens are displayed depending on whether the GY HD250 GY HD251 is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode In the VTR mode the CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS and SWITCH MODE menu screens are not dis played Item VIDEO FORMAT Function Displays the menu screen for setting the video format for shooting and playing back video Camera mode It consists of two screens VTR mode It consists of one screen The cursor P does not move to this item when this device is recording CAMERA OPERATION Displays a menu screen for setting the operation mode for camera shooting e This item is only displayed in the Camera mode CAMERA PROCESS Displays a menu screen for adjustments of the picture quality of the camera image It consists of two scre
314. n again A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be guaranteed if a recording is ended by turning the POWER switch or DC power supply OFF or by removing the battery pack Trial shooting is always recommended before recording important events to confirm the recording is satisfactory The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens iris if the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved abruptly during recording About the QUICK REC START Mode If the REC VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after the videocassette is inserted the mode becomes the QUICK REC START mode that enables quick start of recording However when shooting starts in the middle of the tape a blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked smoothly with the previous image Also the time code does not continue Some overlap may also occur About the Focus Assist Function When you press this button during shooting the area of focus is displayed in blue red or green making it easy to focus accurately ts See LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen on page 89 You can also set this function from the RET button ts See SWITCH MODE Menu Screen on page 86 LENS RET item When FOCUS ASSIST on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen is set to ACCU FOCUS ACCU FOCUS functions with FOCUS ASSIST This makes focusing with shallower depth of field easier ACCU FOCUS automatically turns OFF after approxi mately 10 seconds 1
315. n signal 59 94 Hz 60 Hz synchronization sig nals cannot be synchronized Do not connect or disconnect the cable during recording or playback When the power is turned on while the external synchro nization signal is input a vertical vibration occurs for a few seconds This is not a malfunction VTR playback signals with jitter cannot be synchronized with this device Setting m Set this device to Camera mode m Set the GENLOCK AUX IN switch to GENLOCK When the camera image is locking to external synchro nization signals SYNC LOCKING is displayed on the screen When locking to external synchronization sig nals is complete the indication disappears and you can enter recording mode 66 1 Display the GENLOCK menu screen Follow the steps in Setting Menu Screens on page 75 and proceed as follows MENU gt OTHERS GENLOCK 2 In the GENLOCK menu screen select the item to per form phase adjustment for and adjust SD H PHASE Adjust the H phase in SD analog signals During BB signal input HD H PHASE Adjust the H phase in HD analog and SD HD SDI signals During Tri sync signal input PHASE of SD analog signals are simultaneously adjusted in HD H PHASE item SC PHASE Adjust the SC phase in composite and YC signals For details refer to GENLOCK Menu Screen on ts See page 99 MEMO H PHASE cannot be adjusted during playback or record ing IEEE1394 output stops while H PHASE is
316. n the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen us See page 80 FAW Full Auto White Balance mode can be set to A B or PRESET with the SWITCH MODE menu screen ts See page 86 In the FAW mode video color temperatures are constantly sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white bal ance When the FULL AUTO switch on page 19 is ON this is fixed at FAW MEMO Fine tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in auto white balance in WHITE PAINT lt R gt lt B gt on the WHITE BALANCE menu screen Available only when this switch is set to A or B ts See WHITE BALANCE Menu Screen on page 85 POWER Power ON OFF switch Switch that turns the power ON OFF When the power is OFF POFF is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder Wait at least 5 seconds if you need to turn the power on again REC REC trigger button start stop recording Start and stop recording using this button This works together with the REC trigger button on the top and the lens VTR trigger button When SPLIT is set for the 1394 REC TRIGGER item on the OTHERS 2 2 menu screen this button becomes the start stop recording button for an external device us See page 97 ts See Backup Recording on page 70 CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 Audio level con trols and AUTO LED Allow you to adjust the audio level for the CH 1 and CH 2 audio channels To use these controls set the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SEL
317. nal BNC x 3 Outputs analog component Y PB PR signals Select whether or not to add setup signals to DV format signals in SET UP item on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen Only for U model Set ANALOG OUT CHAR item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen to ON to output menu setting screens and warnings from this terminal J REMOTE REMOTE terminal Round 6 pin Some functions of this camera can be controlled exter nally Connect to a remote control unit RM LP55 RM LP57 t See Connect a Remote Control Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 on page 68 JDC INPUT DC input terminal XLR 4 pin This is the 12V DC power input terminal Connect to the AC adapter When a battery is installed and a cable is connected to this terminal power supply from the battery stops and power is supplied by this terminal 17 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Top Section 0o Viewfinder Displays the camera image and the playback picture Eyepiece Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman Eyepiece focus ring You can adjust the focus by turning this ring Eyepiece mounting ring You can adjust the position of the eyepiece forward
318. nance The cursor P does not move to this item GENLOCK Menu Screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings SD H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal H phase of the SD signal of this device according to the BB Black Burst signal input to the GENLOCK IN terminal Increase the number Proceed horizontal phase Decrease the number Delay horizontal phase Settings MIN 31 to 1 0 1 to 86 MAX HD H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal H phase of the HD signal and HD SD SDI signal of this device according to the HD Tri synce signal input to the GENLOCK IN terminal In addition during Tri sync signal input H PHASE of SD analog signals are simultaneously adjusted in HD H PHASE item Increase the number Proceed horizontal phase Decrease the number Delay horizontal phase Settings MIN 1023 to 1 0 1 to 1022 MAX MEMO When adjusting the HD H PHASE the setting value quickly changes while the USER1 or USER2 button is held down for approximately two seconds SC COARSE Adjusts the phase of the subcarrier SC of the composite or YC separate signal of this device according to the BB Black Burst signal input to the GENLOCK IN terminal Increase the number Proceed phase Decrease the number Delay phase Settings 0 90 180 270 SC FINE Fine tunes the phase of the subcarrier SC of the composite or YC separate signal of this device according to
319. ncludes slow playback ON Audio is output OFF Audio is not output PB AUDIO CH DV Selects which channel audio to output when playing back a DV tape with the audio signal recorded in 4 channels Can only be set in VTR mode CH1 2 Outputs the CH 1 and CH 2 channel audio This device records the audio in CH 1 and CH 2 while shooting MIX Outputs all 4 channels of audio at the same time CH3 4 Outputs the CH 3 and CH 4 channel audio MEMO This device does not have a function for dubbing to the CH 3 and CH 4 channels PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen 85 MENU SCREENS LCD VF 1 4 Menu Screen The LCD VF menu screen consists of four screens 1 4 screen 2 4 screen 3 4 screen 4 4 screen The LCD VF 1 4 menu screen can only be set in camera mode In VTR mode this screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings ZEBRA Switches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra pattern is displayed 60 70 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 60 and 70 70 80 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 70 and 80 85 95 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance levels between 85 and 95 OVER95 Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance leve
320. nction BARS Assigns BARS item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen PRESET TEMP Assigns PRESET TEMP item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen uss See CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen on page 80 B STRETCH1 Assigns BLACK item functions in the CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 menu screen B STRETCH2 uss See CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 Menu Screen on page 81 B STRETCH3 B STRETCH4 B STRETCHS B COMPRESS1 B COMPRESS2 B COMPRESS3 B COMPRESS4 B COMPRESS5 AE LEVEL Assigns AE LEVEL item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen AE LEVEL MEMO Cannot assign to the USER3 button If you assign these menu functions assign AE LEVEL to the USER1 button AE LEVEL to the USER2 button RET Assigns the normal RET button function LOAD FILE Assigns the function to jump to in the LOAD FILE menu uss See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 100 LENS RET Sets the lens RET button functions This does not function if there is not RET button on the lens you are using RET Functions as a normal RET button FOCUS ASSIST Functions as the FOCUS ASSIST button PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the TOP MENU screen AUDIO MIC 1 2 Menu Screen The AUDIO MIC menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen In VTR mode the screen changes to the AUDIO menu screen This is not displayed in VTR mode Item Function Setting bold characters indicate in
321. nds LOW Enhances low frequency bands SKIN DETECT 2 Sets ON OFF for the skin detail function OFF Turns off the skin detail function ON Turns on the skin detail function Softens detected skin color area details ts See Using the Skin Detail Function on page 104 Sets the contour compensation level amount of softening for the skin detail function This can only be selected when the SKIN DETECT item is set to ON 1 Low contour compensation level amount of softening 2 Medium contour compensation level amount of softening 3 High contour compensation level amount of softening NEXT PAGE To display the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position 1 When the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu is set to DV 601 or DV 50I is displayed and this cannot be selected REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected 8 amp 1 MENU SCREENS CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 Menu Screen Item BLACK Function Setting bold character Changes the gain in dark areas Change this depending on the video signal being shot NORMAL Normal status STRETCH Enhances the dark areas of the video so the contrast between light and dark is more visible by stretching the signal only in the
322. nector is recorded Shoulder pad slide button Button to adjust the position of the shoulder pad When you press this button you can move the position of the shoulder pad forward or backward Shoulder pad Cassette cover Sliding the EJECT switch on page 18 located on the top section opens this cover to allow insertion or removal of the videocassette CAUTION To prevent foreign objects from entering the internal parts of the VTR unit do not leave this device with the cover open for extended periods of time OJ VIDEO OUT Video output terminal RCA This is a terminal for composite video signal output Select whether or not to output a signal with setup in SET UP on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen Only for U model OJAUDIO OUTPUT CH 1 CH 2 Audio output connector RCA Output connector for audio signals Outputs the input audio signal in the Camera mode Outputs the playback audio signal in the VTR mode When a HDV DV signal IEEE1394 is input the EE sound of the input audio signal is output in the VTR mode MEMO Alarm sound is not output IEEE1394 IEEE1394 connector 6 pin Using an IEEE1394 cable optional a digital video com ponent with IEEE1394 connector can be connected here ts See Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable on page 64 ts See HDV DV Dubbing on page 68 CAUTION When connecting the IEEE1394 cable confirm that the connector is facing the right direction before i
323. ness of magenta color Decrease the number Increases yellowishness of green color and bluishness of magenta color Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 B GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the B axis of the color matrix blue and yellow Increase the number Enhances blue and yellow Decrease the number Reduces blue and yellow Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 B ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the B axis of the color matrix blue and yellow Increase the number Increases reddishness of blue color and greenishness of yellow color Decrease the number Increases greenishness of blue color and reddishness of yellow color Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 PAGE BACK Press the SHUTTER dial to return to the ADVANCED PROCESS screen when cursor is at this position SKIN COLOR ADJUST Menu Screen When you enter the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen the areas where the skin detail function is applied are displayed in color and other areas are displayed in black and white Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings SKIN COLOR DET Sets the color used by the skin detail function STOP Stops loading the color used by the skin detail function EXECUTE Loads the color used by the skin detail function ts See How to Use Skin Detail on page 99 SKIN COLOR RANGE Adjusts the range of skin colors to wh
324. ng the Microphone Provided Connect the provided microphone to the microphone holder Provided microphone is a phantom microphone 1 Turn the knob on the microphone holder anticlockwise to loosen it and open the microphone holder 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Place the microphone toward the front to prevent it from interfering with the cassette cover 3 Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to secure the microphone 4 Connect the microphone cable to the INPUT1 or INPUT2 input connector on this device 5 Attach the microphone cable to the clamp 6 Make sure to perform the correct setting for use of a phantom microphone ts See page 55 2 Microphone Microphone holder 4 INPUT1 2 connector How to Attach the View finder 1 To attach the viewfinder slide it in the direction of the arrow 2 Set the viewfinder to a comfortable position and then turn the slide mounting ring and mount Em To take off the viewfinder pull the knob in the direction of the arrow as you slide the viewfinder Knob Taking off the viewfinder 33 PREPARATIONS How to Attach the Viewfinder Cont d About the Viewfinder Cable Attach the viewfinder cable to the clamp on page 14 To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided core filter as shown in the figure below Attach the core filter black as close to this device as pos sible as shown in
325. ng with a head cleaning tape alone is not 1 Noise may appear in the picture or audio and or the colors The camera may not show stable pictures in the period enough for cleaning the entire tape transport mechanism so Head Cleaning Ta pe may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or tele immediately after the power is turned on but this is not a it is also recommended to apply periodical maintenance vision transmitting antenna in places where strong mag malfunction inspection to prevent the sudden occurrence of failure As Please use cleaning tape produced by JVC Adhere to the following precautions when using the head cleaning tape the replacement adjustment and servicing of parts require advanced skill and equipment please consult the person in charge of professional video equipment at your nearest JVC netic fields are generated by transformers motors etc or A sound occurs when the built in head cleaner that runs near devices emitting radio waves such as transceivers or when you load or eject a videocassette operates but this cellular phones Use of wireless microphone near the camera When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner is used near the camera during recording the tuner could pick up noise Avoid using or placing this device in places subject to extreme heat or cold with excessive dirt or dust with high humidity or moisture subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking stove
326. ngaged when the record standby condition continues 3MIN 3 minutes 5MIN 5 minutes When used in a cold environment or when the stopped or STILL status continues the setting will be 3 minutes or less regardless of the setting on the menu Normally set 3MIN and use this to prevent head clogging and tape damage ALARM VR LEVEL Selects whether or not alarm sound is emitted and the volume of the alarm sound The alarm sound is output through the monitoring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack OFF Sound is not output LOW Alarm sound is soft MIDDLE Alarm sound is normal HIGH Alarm sound is loud FRONT TALLY Selects the lighting method of the FRONT TALLY lamp during recording BLINK The lamp blinks from when the REC VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts The lamp lights steadily during recording ON The lamp lights only during recording OFF The lamp is always off BACK TALLY Selects the lighting method of the BACK TALLY lamp during recording BLINK The lamp blinks from when the REC VTR trigger is pressed and until recording starts The lamp lights steadily during recording ON The lamp lights only during recording OFF The lamp is always off FORMAT LED Sets whether or not the HDV DV LED on page 15 lights for HDV format or DV format ON Lights OFF Does not light NEXT PAGE To display the OTHERS 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial
327. ns when you load or eject a videocassette operates but this is not a malfunction The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen The LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen are manufac tured using high precision technology Black spots may appear on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen or red blue green and or white spots may not turn off How ever this is not a malfunction and these spots are not recorded on the tape If you use this device continuously for a long period of time the characters displayed in the viewfinder may tem porarily remain on the screen This is not recorded on the tape In addition they are no longer displayed if you turn the power off and then on again If you use this device in a cold location the images may appear to lag on the screen but this is not a malfunction This is not recorded on the tape Do not insert fingers or foreign objects into the cassette insertion slot as this may result in personal injury or dam age to the mechanism To prevent damage to the connectors use this device with the connector covers on when you are not using the video audio signal output connectors CAUTION Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or other strong light source Eye damage could result If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun rays may collect inside this device and cause damage or a fire When carrying the camera be sure to hold the carrying handle Holdin
328. nsation forms gradually the condensation indica tion may not appear for the first 10 15 minutes after con densation has formed inside In an extremely cold place the condensation could freeze and turn into frost In such a case it takes an additional 2 3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and then to be dissolved To prevent condensation When moving this device from one place to another where the temperatures are greatly deferent first remove the vid eocassette place this device in a tightly sealed vinyl bag and then move it to a new environment To ensure no condensation occurs allow the temperature of this device in the bag to reach that of the new environ ment before using it Characteristic CCD Phe nomena Smear and Blooming Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce vertical streaking called smear when shooting an extremely bright light source Another effect is the expansion of light around a bright light or object called blooming The CCD employed in this device is characterized by induc ing very little smear or blooming Nevertheless please take note that smear or blooming may be induced when shooting a bright light source Smear Vertical pale streaking appearing at high luminous object High luminous object Electric light sunlight etc Blooming Blurring in highlight Monitor screen Moire or Aliasing Shooting stripes or fine patterns may
329. nserting ts See page 64 MEMO Put the covers on the connectors when you are not using them MA le STUDIO Studio terminal Round 10 pin Connect the studio cable from the KA HD250 Studio Kit sold separately Connect the KA HD250 to use this device as a studio camera For details refer to the KA HD250 INSTRUCTION MAN UAL IDC INPUT DC input terminal XLR 4 pin This is the 12V DC power input terminal Connect to the AC adapter When a battery is installed and a cable is connected to this terminal power supply from the battery stops and power is supplied by this terminal GENLOCK AUX IN GENLOCK AUX IN switch Set according to the signal input in the 6GENLOCK AUX IN terminal GENLOCK Set to this when inputting external synchroni zation signals AUX IN Set to this when inputting composite video signals from an external device MEMO If no signals are input to the AUX IN terminal and this switch is set to AUX IN the monitor turns black and video is not output from any terminal PsPRITC PBPR Time code switch Set according to the PB TC IN and PR TC OUT terminal signals PBPR Set to this when outputting component PB signals from the PB TC IN terminal and outputting com ponent PR signals from the PR TC OUT terminal TC Set to this when inputting LTC time code from the Ps TC IN terminal and outputting the built in time code generator from the PR TC OUT terminal
330. objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed close to the apparatus Worded CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type Information for Users on Disposal of Old Equipment Attention This symbol is only valid in the European Union European Union This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equip ment should not be disposed as general household waste at its end of life Instead the product should be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment for proper treatment recovery and recycling in accordance with your national legislation By disposing of this product correctly you will help to con serve natural resources and will help prevent potential nega tive effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product For more information about collection point and recycling of this product please contact your local municipal office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation Business users If you wish to dispose of this product please visit our web page www jvc europe com to obtain information about the take back of the product Other Countr
331. ode Dimensions 1 224 W x 242 3 H x 401 D mm U model 224 W x 242 3 H x 414 D mm E model Mass 3 6 kg 8 0 Ibs U model 3 8 kg 8 4 Ibs E model including lens Th16 x 5 5BRMU viewfinder microphone and tape Temperature Operating 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Storage 20 C to 60 C 4F to 140 F Humidity Operating 30 to 80 RH Storage 85 RH or less Camera section Image pickup device 1 3 interline transfer CCDs Color separation F1 4 3 color separation prism optical system Number of total pixels Approx 1 110 000 pixels Color bars SMPTE EBU type Sync system Internal sync built in SSG Lens mount 1 3 bayonet system ND filter 1 4ND 1 46ND Gain 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 dB ALC Electronic shutter Standard value 59 94 Hz U model 50 Hz E model Fixed values 7 5 10 000 Hz 11 steps HDV HD30p HDV HD60p DV 60i 6 25 10 000 Hz 11 steps HDV HD25p HDV HD50p DV 50i 6 10 000 Hz 12 steps HDV HD24p DV 24p 6 25 10 000 Hz 11 steps DV 25p 30 03 10 489 5 Hz HDV HD60p HDV HD30p DV 60i 25 04 10 489 5 Hz HDV HD50p HDV HD25p DV 50i DV 25p 24 01 10 489 5 Hz HDV HD24p DV 24p 300 or more Variable scan Dynamic range VTR section Video Recording format 720 24p 720 25p 720 30p 720 50p 720 60p U E model 480 24p 480 60i U model 576 25p 576 50i E model Video Format HDV Video signal record HDV720p forma
332. ode is not possible In DV format Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes we recom mend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3 min utes from the beginning of the tape Before recording important scenes be sure to perform a test recording and confirm that both video and audio are recorded correctly Recorded video and audio contents are for private use Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright hold ers JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or audio due to malfunction of this device or the videocas sette Videocassettes marked with the DN symbol can be used The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded This device records and plays back in the SP mode All product names in this manual are trademarks or regis tered trademarks of their respective companies Marks such as and are not used in this manual ed A Excluding the CHU CHE model Lens ts See pages 10 and 33 Core Filter For Viewfinder Cable ts See page 33 ol Q07 SD memory card ts See page 34 ACCESSORIES Microphone us See page 33 lt a Clamp Filters x4 For DC x2 Audio IEEE1394 Cable us See pages 36 64 and 67 Tripod base Provided only for U model us See page 35 MAIN FEATURES GY HD250 GY HD251 records in HDV format or DV format DV format can record and play back SD
333. on the LCD moni tor or the viewfinder FAS mode works together with the auto iris and auto level control ALC modes and automatically adjusts to the optimal video signal level and white balance You can select automatic adjustment mode or manual adjustment mode for audio recording level ts See AUDIO MIC 2 2 Menu Screen on page 85 Even if there are color bars this automatically sets to camera video Auto iris mode operates even if the lens iris mode switch is set to the manual position The gain changes continuously until it reaches the max imum ALC MAX setting and the shutter speed also changes continuously When you release FAS mode all of the settings return to their previous modes CAUTION When the power is turned on while the camera is in the FAS mode it takes about 10 seconds before the automatic adjustment of FAS is completed All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the FAS mode is cancelled J STOP Stop button Press to enter the stop mode REW Rewind button Press this button to rewind the tape Pressing this button in the stop or fast forward mode ini tiates the rewind mode Only for VTR mode Pressing this button during playback still picture play back or forward search initiates reverse search PLAY STILL Play still button Press to start playback Press to enter the still picture mode during playback in the stop mode or in the search mode
334. on the TC UB Example 23 59 00 00 menu screen Example 00 00 09 00 CLOCK menu screen only when set to REC RUN or FREE RUN mode m HEADER REC menu screen contents Item Function Initial Setting START KEY Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed DISABLE HEADER REC operation is not executed STOP REC HEADER REC operation is executed TC DATA Sets the time code value for the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER REC EXECUTE Confirms the set time code ZERO PRESET Resets all time codes to zero 0 CANCEL Clears the set time code The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The time code value at the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the value set for this item UB DATA Sets the user s bits of the HEADER REC section EXECUTE Confirms the set user s bits ZERO PRESET Resets all user s bits data to zero 0 CANCEL Clears the set user s bits MEMO The user s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen BARS TIME Sets the duration seconds in which the color bar signal and test tone 1 kHz is recorded during HEADER REC 1 sec steps Initial Setting OSEC 30SEC 99SEC BLACK TIME Sets the duration s
335. once the screen switches to the WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen SKIN COLOR ADJUST When the cursor is in this position and you press the SHUTTER dial once the screen switches to the SKINCOLOR ADJUST screen PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen 80 COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen Item R GAIN Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings For manually adjusting the shading of the R axis of the color matrix red and cyan Increase the number Enhances red and cyan Decrease the number Reduces red and cyan Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 R ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the R axis of the color matrix red and cyan Increase the number Increases yellowishness of red color and bluishness of cyan color Decrease the number Increases bluishness of red color and greenishness of cyan color Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 G GAIN For manually adjusting the shading of the G axis of the color matrix green and magenta Increase the number Enhances green and magenta Decrease the number Reduces green and magenta Settings MIN 5 4 NORMAL 0 4 MAX 5 G ROTATION For manually adjusting the color phase of the G axis of the color matrix green and magenta Increase the number Increases bluishness of green color and reddish
336. onitor BLACK amp WHITE Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white display Viewfinder Adjustment Direction of the Viewfinder Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder Diopter Adjustment Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen image is clearly visible Adjustment of the Viewfinder Screen PEAKING Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen VF BRIGHT Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder screen Eyepiece focusing ring Eyepiece VF BRIGHT volume PEAKING volume Viewfinder mount base Adjustments are made on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen ts See page 89 VF CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder screen BLACK amp WHITE Sets the LCD monitor and viewfinder to black and white display MEMO The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by selecting the desired size with the ASPECT item on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen 4 3 or 16 9 49 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Back Focus Adjustment It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the telephoto and wide angle positions It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more than 3 meters from the camera The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star chart NN wm Siemens star chart 50 1
337. onth date year DD MM YY Displayed in the format of date month year Variation Range U model MM DD YY E model DD MM YY When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected TIME STYLE Selects the style for the time display 24 HOUR Displays the time using the 24 hour system 12 HOUR Displays the time using the 12 hour system When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected SEC DISPLAY Selects whether to display the seconds in the time display ON Seconds are displayed OFF Seconds are not displayed When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected TIME SHIFT Sets the clock OFFSET time 1H steps Adds time to the built in clock time compensation and displays it The adjusted time is also recorded on the tape Settings 23H 1H OFF 1H 23H CLOCK ADJUST To adjust the date and time align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial The date and time are set on the CLOCK ADJUST screen ts See Setting the Date and Time on page 42 PAGE BACK The TC UB CLOCK menu returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed while the cursor is at this position 95 MENU SCREENS OTHERS 1 2 Menu Screen The OTHERS menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial
338. oor Synchronized display with an external time code generator Lights up when the time code generator of this device synchronizes with the time code input from the TC IN terminal Blinks when synchronization is unsuccessful Turns off If there is no input signal Remaining tape indication Remaining tape indication displayed in 1 minute steps This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen ts See page 91 When inserting a brand new tape the remaining tape time is not indicated When the tape has been run the indication will appear The remaining tape indication is to be regarded only as a guide When this device is used at low temperatures it may take a while before the indication of the remaining tape time appears Voltage indication Example 12 2V Indicates remaining battery level in 0 1V steps Battery voltage and remaining battery are displayed Select the display method in BATTERY INFO on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen t See page 91 Anton Bauer battery Voltage remaining capacity remaining time IDX Endura battery Voltage remaining capacity 25 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder Cont d No Item Contents Audio sampling frequency in 32K Ind
339. op is enhanced LEVEL R Adjusts reds LEVEL G Adjusts greens LEVEL B Adjusts blues lt Range 128 to 127 gt 5 Press the SHUTTER dial after changing the setting val ues to save in the memory 6 Press the STATUS button to return to the normal screen 7 When white shading adjustment is completed adjust white balance again ts See White Balance Adjustment on page 52 53 SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Setting the Video Format Set the video format using the FRAME RATE item and the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen Setting the FRAME RATE Item 1 Press the STATUS button for at least 1 second The TOP MENU screen is displayed SHUTTER dial STATUS button 2 Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor P to the VIDEO FORMAT item and press the SHUTTER dial The VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen is displayed VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 DFRAME RATE 60 30 10801 CAMERA OFF REC HDV HD60P EXECUTE ASPECT 16 9 HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE PB TAPE AUTO DOWN CON HDV SQUEEZE NEXT PAGE PAGE BACK 3 Turn the SHUTTER dial and bring the cursor P to the FRAME RATE item and press the SHUTTER dial The setting for the selected item flashes and can be changed CHANGE THE SYSTEM is displayed on the screen VIDEO FORMAT DFRAME RATE 50 25 EXECUTE CHANGE THE SYSTEM 54 4 Turn the SHUTTER dial change the
340. ore visible by stretching the signal only in the dark areas Set elongation level with STRETCH LEVEL below COMPRESS If the video that was shot is bright overall and lacking in contrast the gain in the dark areas is com pressed which adds contrast Set compression level with COMPRESS LEVEL below Increase the number Raises the pedestal level Decrease the number Lowers the pedestal level Settings MIN 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 MAX 10 DETAIL Adjusts the contour detail sharpness level Increase the number Sharpens the contour Decrease the number Softens the contour OFF Does not function Settings OFF MIN 10 9 NORMAL 0 9 MAX 10 When this item is set to OFF is displayed for the following menu items and they cannot be selected V H BALANCE Sets which contours details to sharpen those in the horizontal H direction or those in the vertical V direction STRETCH LEVEL The amount of stretching increases from LEVEL1 gt LEVEL2 gt LEVEL3 gt LEVEL4 gt LEVEL5 Settings LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 LEVEL4 LEVELS COMPRESS LEVEL The amount of compression increases from LEVEL1 LEVEL2LEVEL3 gt LEVEL4 LEVEL5 Settings LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 LEVEL4 LEVELS th ber Sh H directi WHITE CLIP Sets the white clipping point on input video signals with a high luminance level eeni by num ies 3 S iea Ion 108 The white clipping point
341. pe playback PB TAPE item Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format Normally use the AUTO setting 64 5 Set the audio output t See page 62 Set the AUDIO menu screen t See page 84 AUDIO menu screen AUDIO TEST TONE ON AUDIO REF LEVEL 20dB AUDIO MONITOR MIX SEARCH AUDIO DV ON DPB AUDIO CH DV CH1 2 PAGE BACK PB AUDIO CH DV item Set the audio channel to be output 6 Insert the videocassettes This device Insert the recorded videocas sette Recording unit Insert the videocassette to be dubbed to 7 Press the PLAY STILL button on this device to start play back 8 start recording on the recording unit For details see the instructions to the unit used for recording 9 When dubbing is completed Stop recording on the recording unit and then press the STOP button on this device to stop playback HDV DV Dubbing Connecting this device to another video component equipped with HDV DV connector IEEE1394 standard using a IEEE1394 cable optional enables dubbing of digital signals with high picture quality and high quality sound Using this device as the playback unit Dubbing to another video 1 Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device DV When dubbing in DV format HDV When dubbing in HDV format 2 Connect the IEEE1394 cable 3 Turn both devices on 4 Set this device to
342. pe window facing out move the switch on the back of the videocassette up and firmly push the center back of the videocassette straight in as far as it will go 4 Carefully push the center Push here sticker of the vid eocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it After the cover is closed it takes about 10 seconds until recording can begin or this device can enter STOP mode REC SAVE switch Tape window EJECT switch Cassette holder Inner cover m If the power is on the modes are as shown below REC SAVE switch REC SAVE Camera Record standby mode STOP mode REC INHIBIT is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder MODE VTR STOP mode 40 Unloading the Cassette 1 Turn the POWER switch to ON 2 When this device is in shooting standby mode or stop mode slide the EJECT switch to the side and wait until the videocassette cover opens completely The LED next to the EJECT switch flashes A few seconds pass before the videocassette tape is ejected 3 The LED turns off and the videocassette cover opens Take out the videocassette tape 4 Carefully push the center of the videocassette cover in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go to close it CAUTION When you close the videocassette cover push it in firmly as far as it will go If the videocassette cover is not closed properly it becomes half locked and this
343. pecified for the UB REC menu screen HEADER REC time DATA item on the HEADER REC REC menu screen PRESET item on the TC UB Example 23 59 00 00 Time code User s bits User s bits Example 00 00 00 00 CLOCK menu screen only when set to REC RUN or FREE RUN mode menu screen m HEADER REC menu screen contents Item Function Initial Setting START KEY Sets whether the HEADER REC operation should be executed when the REC VTR trigger button is pressed while the STOP button is pressed DISABLE HEADER REC operation is not executed STOP REC HEADER REC operation is executed TC DATA Sets the time code value for the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged following completion of HEADER REC EXECUTE Confirms the set time code ZERO PRESET Resets all time codes to zero 0 CANCEL Clears the set time code The frame mode is set depending on the setting in the DROP FRAME item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen The time code value at the point when the Record Standby mode is engaged may differ some frames from the value set for this item UB DATA Sets the user s bits of the HEADER REC section EXECUTE Confirms the set user s bits ZERO PRESET Resets all user s bits data to zero 0 CANCEL Clears the set user s bits MEMO The user s bits for the normal recording section are set on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen 1 Display the HEADER RE
344. pickup device Color separation optical system Number of total pixels Color bars Lens mount ND filter Gain Electronic shutter Standard value Fixed values Variable scan Dynamic range VTR section Video Recording format Video Format HDV Video signal record ing format Compression 112 1 3 interline transfer CCDs F1 4 3 color separation prism Approx 1 110 000 pixels SMPTE EBU type Sync system Internal sync built in SSG 1 3 bayonet system 1 4ND 1 16ND 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 dB ALC 59 94 Hz U model 50 Hz E model 7 5 10 000 Hz 11 steps HDV HD30p HDV HD60p DV 60i 6 25 10 000 Hz 11 steps HDV HD25p HDV HD50p DV 50i 6 10 000 Hz 12 steps HDV HD24p DV 24p 6 25 10 000 Hz 11 steps DV 25p 30 03 10 489 5 Hz HDV HD60p HDV HD30p DV 60i 25 04 10 489 5 Hz HDV HD50p HDV HD25p DV 50i DV 25p 24 01 10 489 5 Hz HDV HD24p DV 24p 300 or more 720 24p 720 25p 720 30p 720 50p 720 60p U E model 480 24p 480 60i U model 576 25p 576 50i E model HDV720p format 8 bit 19 7 Mbps MPEG 2 video profile amp level MP H 14 DV Video signal record ing format Compression Audio HDV Audio signal record ing format DV Audio signal record ing format Usable tape Tape speed Record play time Time Code Time code signal LTC input LTC output Connectors AUX input DV compr
345. ply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communi cations However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help CAUTION CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC COULD VOID USER S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT NOTE The rating plate serial number plate is on the bottom of the unit CAUTION To prevent electric shock do not open the cabinet No user ser viceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service person nel AVERTISSEMENT POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D INCENDIE OU D ELECTROCUTI
346. rator continues to run even if the external time code generator is disconnected after synchronization CAUTION If a time code generator is connected or disconnected dur ing recording servo lock will be disturbed m When connecting multiple devices and assigning one as the master unit and others as slave units If there is only one slave unit connect as shown below If there are multiple slave units input external synchroniza tion signals to all GENLOCK AUX IN terminals from the syn chronization signal generator Master unit Slave unit TC OUT 49 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Screen Adjustment LCD monitor direction angle screen brightness etc can be adjusted Adjusting the Direction and Angle of the LCD monitor With the LCD door in the open condition rotate the LCD door It can be turned 180 in upward direction and 90 in down ward direction When turned 180 upward direction the LCD monitor can be viewed from the lens side vertically inverted image LCD lock release lever Adjusting the LCD monitor PEAKING Adjusts the contour of the LCD monitor LCD BRIGHT Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor Adjustments are made on the LCD VF 2 4 menu screen ts See page 90 LCD MIRROR MODE Sets the LCD monitor to display mirrored images when shooting facing the subject Adjustments are made on the LCD VF 4 4 menu screen ts See pag
347. rd ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 96 J EJECT Eject switch and LED Slide this switch to the side to insert or eject a videocas sette tape The LED lights while ejecting is in progress MEMO It takes a few seconds before the videocassette is ejected Do not close the cassette cover during the eject operation Do not touch the cassette insertion slot or cassette dur ing the eject operation This could result in damage Operation cover Open this cover when operating in the playback mode Otherwise keep this cover closed This cover can be opened by sliding it to the side MEMO When the STOP button is pressed in the Camera mode to set the VTR operation mode indicator to indicate STOP playback operations become possible Battery adapter Attach the battery U model Anton Bauer battery E model IDX battery ts See Battery Operation on page 37 J MONITOR SELECT Audio monitor selector switch This switch is used to select the monitor sound output and playback sound output from the monitoring speaker on page 14 or the PHONES jack on page 12 CH 1 The CH 1 channel audio is output BOTH CH 1 and CH 2 channel audio are output mixed When this setting is selected the menu screen can be used to select whether the mixed sound or stereo sound should be output via the PHONES jack AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu screen When AUDIO MONITOR item on the AUDIO MIC 2 2 menu scre
348. reen Performed separately for the time code and the user s bit data Rotate the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the TC or UB PRESET item and then press the SHUTTER dial Rotate the SHUTTER dial to select ZERO PRESET as the setting value and then press the SHUTTER dial MEMO When a menu screen is not being displayed you can zero reset the time code data by simultaneously holding down the USER2 button and the STOP button for about 1 sec ond 45 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen The time code can be preset directly from the LCD screen without opening the TC UB CLOCK menu screen CAUTION PRESET mode is not available in the following TC GENE switch is set to REGEN TC DUPLI item in the TC UB CLOCK menu screen is set to ON Menu screen is displayed RECORDING mode is active Switching to CAM VTR mode When VTR indicator is blinking Setting m TC UB CLOCK menu screen Set framing of the time code generator in DROP FRAME When set to FRAME RATE 60 30 Set to enable disable user s bit recording in UB REC When set to FRAME RATE 50 25 m Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE MEMO See page 44 for details on the above settings m Set the TC DISPLAY switch Set to TC to preset time code and UB to preset user s bit Operation This section describes presetting of the time code USER 2 button USER 1 button USER 3 button
349. reen ts See page 91 When inserting a brand new tape the remaining tape time is not indicated When the tape has been run the indication will appear The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide When this device is used at low temperatures it may take a while before the indication of the remaining tape time appears Event display Displays messages related to VTR operations ts See pages 106 108 Audio sampling frequency in The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during playback dication 32 K 48 K 44 1 K Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen ts See page 91 Audio level meter indication Displays the audio level meters during playback Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen ts See page 91 VTR mode indication Indicates the VTR operation status STBY STOP PLAY REC FF REW FWD REV STL No tape loaded SLOW During variable play back in forward direction Displayed when using non linear editing software SLOW 1 About x0 1 speed SLOW 2 About 0 2 speed SLOW 3 About 0 5 speed During variable playback in reverse direction Displayed when using non linear editing software SLOW 1 About x 0 1 speed SLOW 2 About x 0 2 speed SLOW 3 About x 0 5 speed 28 No Item Time Date indication Contents Recorded data are disp
350. requency bands LOW Enhances low frequency bands When the KNEE item is set to AUTO is displayed and this cannot be selected SKIN DETECT 2 Sets ON OFF for the skin detail function OFF Turns off the skin detail function REVERSE PICTURE When the lens image is inverted and flipped set ROTATE to record properly ON Turns on the skin detail function Softens detected skin color area details OFF No inversion t See Using the Skin Detail Function on page 100 ROTATE Invert lens image LEVEL Sets the contour compensation level amount of softening for the skin detail function DNR Selects whether or not to set the noise reduction r A This can only be selected when the SKIN DETECT item is set to ON The DNR Digital Noise Reduction function is applied to the tape recording signal HD component output signal and 1 Low contour compensation level amount of softening the IEEE 1394 output signal in CAMERA mode 1 x i T A 2 Medium contour compensation level amount of softening When camcorder s picture is noisy because of low light conditions you can improve picture s S N by turning DNR 3 High contour compensation level amount of softening on OFF Noise reduction is not performed NEXT PAGE To display the CAMERA PROCESS 2 2 menu screen move the cursor to this position and press the SHUTTER dial ON Sets noise reduction PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed whi
351. ring loudspeaker and the PHONES jack In Camera mode only When an irregularity occurs in the VTR a warning sound is also output Whether or not alarm sound should be output and the vol ume level are selected with the ALARM VR LEVEL item on the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen m Depending on the alarm conditions the warning indicators on the LCD monitor viewfinder screen the TALLY lamp and alarm sounds appear as shown in the following table VTR alarm indication Example Alarm Indications on LCD Monitor Viewfinder Screen 7001 DRUM MOTOR FAILURE TALLY lamp Alarm Sound HA IN IK HH nn Condition Dew formation condensation or error has oc curred in the VTR TAPE NEAR END h About 3 min before tape end displayed during recording MMU Tape end TAREJEND D AN displayed during recording LOW VOLTAGE 9 iii Remaining battery power is low Display symbols Blinking once per second Blinking four times per second Sound interrupted once per second Continuous sound 105 OTHERS Troubleshooting Symptoms Power cannot be switched ON Is power supply connected correctly Is battery pack recharged Was the power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been turned OFF Recording is not possible Is the REC L
352. ripod base on the tripod by using the hole that balances this device most optimally O0000000000 6 1 Tripod mounting holes 2 While pushing the safety lever pull the lock lever toward the front until the front mount clip clicks into place Front mount clip 2 Safety lever Lock lever 3 Place this device on the tripod base by aligning the rear base mount of this device with the pin on the tripod base 4 Front base mount 3 Rear base mount 4 Hold the camera on the top and slide forward so that the base mount of the camera is locked by the front mount clip of this device as it clicks into place 4 qm CAUTION The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base mount of this device Therefore after mounting make sure that these parts are engaged properly When moving this device mounted on a tripod any impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause this device to become detached and to drop from the tri pod Be sure to remove this device from the tripod before transporting it 35 PREPARATIONS AC Operation The GY HD250 GY HD251 is operable with AC power supply or battery pack Use the AC adapter as the AC power supply 1 Af
353. rminated in the following TC DISPLAY switch is changed CAM VTR mode switch is changed VTR operations are performed m USER1 USER2 and USER3 presetting in the SWITCH MODE menus screen is not available when the Time Code Preset screen is displayed m The time code preset screen is displayed on the LCD screen or viewfinder It will not be output from the VIDEO OUT terminal Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time Codes Recorded on Tape This device also incorporates a time code reader Therefore when this device enters record mode from record standby mode it can read the time code data recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation of the existing data The recorded user s bit data are identical to the user s bit date recorded on tape However approximately 1 frame variations may occur in scene accuracy To enable this function set the time code related switches as follows before starting recording Setting Set the TC GENE switch inside the LCD door to REGEN Set TC DUPLI item on the TC UB CLOCK menu screen to OFF MEMO The time code framing mode automatically becomes the mode drop frame or non drop frame already recorded on the tape About Time Code Mode m Camera mode TC GENE switch FREE REC REGEN TC PRESET mode TC REGENE mode m VTR mode IEEE1394 input mode Playing Back Time Code This device features a time code reader During playb
354. rol unit is connected ADVANCED PROCESS Menu Screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings CINEMA OFF Turns the function OFF ON Sets the gamma characteristics and color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen The monitor image is movie quality This setting is not intended for film output MEMO When this item is set to ON CINE is displayed for COLOR MATRIX and GAMMA items and cannot be selected COLOR MATRIX Sets the color matrix OFF Turns the function OFF STANDARD Sets a normal color matrix CINEMA Sets a color matrix close to the characteristics of a movie screen ADJUST When STANDARD or CINEMA is set for the COLOR MATRIX item a color matrix can be set individually Press the SHUTTER dial to call up the COLOR MATRIX ADJUST menu screen uss See COLOR MATRIX ADJUST Menu Screen on page 84 GAMMA Adjusts the gamma curve to determine how black is rendered OFF No gamma curve correction STANDARD Sets a normal gamma curve CINEMA Sets to appear movie like when viewing on a TV screen FILM OUT Sets to a setting for recording onto film MEMO When this item is set to OFF isplayed for the LEVEL item and it cannot be selected LEVEL When STANDARD CINEMA or FILM OUT is set for the GAMMA item a gamma curve can be set individually Increase the number Enhances the tonality of the bl
355. rpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet con sult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete out let Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plug convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod Fortas bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the appa ratus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury tip over AE Unplug this apparatus during light i ning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam aged in any way such as power supply cord or plug id damaged liquid has been spilled objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate nor mally or has been dropped RT WARNING y RETAC Safety Precautions FOR USA AND CANADA CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEA
356. running mode is in REC RUN mode the time code for the slave unit stops When using BR HD50 as a backup device and switching GY HD250 GY HD251 from the playback mode to the record mode noise will be noticed on the monitor output screen of BR HD50 backup will be correctly recorded Connect a Remote Con trol Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 Set camera switch functions with the remote control unit RM LP55 RM LP57 Connection Connect the remote control unit cable to the REMOTE termi nal REMOTE RM LP55 CAUTION Turn the power OFF when connecting Operation 1 Turn the device ON 2 Turn ON the OPERATE switch on remote control unit to activate the remote control unit See page 72 for details on functions that can be operated with the remote control unit Notes on Using the Remote Control Unit When the switch function of this device and the remote control unit are the same the remote control switch func tion is prioritized FOCUS and ZOOM cannot be adjusted with the remote control unit Shutter speed slightly differs from the value displayed on this device Shutter Speed in 24p Mode When this device is in 24p mode shutter speed cannot be set to 1 60 U model or 1 50 E model with the remote control unit Even if shutter speed is set to 1 60 or 1 50 with the remote control unit when in 24p mode the shutter speed for the device is
357. s are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communi cations However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help CAUTION CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC COULD VOID USER S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CON DITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFER ENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION AVERTISSEMENT POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D INCENDIE OU D ELECTROCUTION NE PAS EXPOSER L APPAREIL A L HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE Ce magn toscope ne doit tre u
358. s close to this device as pos sible as shown in the figure Inserting an SD Memory Card By using an SD memory card you can save and call up menu settings and camera settings for GY HD250 GY HD251 ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 100 Check that the POWER switch is OFF Inserting an SD Memory Card 1 Open the SD memory card cover 2 Face the cutout end of the SD memory card inward and insert it in the direction of the arrow CAUTION Be sure not to touch the metal connector area of the SD memory card 3 Close the SD memory card cover SD memory card cover 34 Taking out the SD memory card 1 Push the SD memory card in the direction of the arrow The SD memory card comes out slightly 2 Pull the SD memory card straight out About SD Memory Cards When you use an SD memory card that was either just purchased or formatted on a device other than GY HD250 GY HD251 format it on GY HD250 GY HD251 ts See page 102 Recommended SD memory cards Panasonic 16 MB to 2 GB You can write protect the card so that saved files are not mistakenly erased Set the switch on the side of the SD memory card to the LOCK position 07 LOCK switch J MEMO SDHC compliant memory cards cannot be used with this device Attaching the Tripod Base Provided only for U model Use the provided tripod base to place the camera on a tri pod U model only 11 Attach the t
359. s device to VTR mode Press the CAM VTR button The VTR indicator lights 1 IEEE1394 switch Recording unit gs la N Signal flow IEEE1394 cable CAUTION Set the IEEE1394 switch on both devices to either HDV or DV Start recording after making sure that both devices are properly connected 68 5 Set the PB TAPE item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen t See page 79 Select whether to automatically detect the playback tape video format or play back only a particular format Normally use the AUTO setting VIDEO FORMAT menu screen VIDEO FORMAT FRAME RATE 60 30 HDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE DOWN CON HDV LETTER DPB TAPE AUTO HD SD SDI OUT OFF OUTPUT TERM DV Y Pb Pr SET UP 0 0 PAGE BACK 6 insert a videocassette tape GY HD250 GY HD251__ Recorded videocassette tape Recording unit Videocassette you want to dub T Press the PLAY STILL button on GY HD250 GY HD251 to start playback 8 Start recording on the recording device See the recording device user manual for more informa tion 9 When dubbing is finished stop recording on the record ing device press the STOP button on this device and stop the playback MEMO Switch the IEEE1394 switch when this device is OFF When you dub still images they are low resolution images Noise may also enter the audio Operations may differ depending on the features and specifications of the connected d
360. s the camera tape transport back space and pre roll time when the camera is connected to an external HDD or external back up Recorder via IEEE1394 in HDV mode P 1394 Priority for IEEE1394 recording Auto setting P TAPE Priority for camera VCR recording 1394 REC Internal IEEE1394 External Recorder or HDD BACK SPACE HDV h TRIGGER VCR A connection 1 gt See page 94 start delay vie IEEE1394 terminal OFF N A Connected and SYNCRO See Note 1 Pi ON approx 3 seconds ower SPLIT See Note 2 SERIES N A P 1394 OFF i SYNCRO nose mecen SPLIT approx 1 second N A SERIES OFF Connected and SYNCRO See Note 3 Power ON SPLIT approx 1 second SERIES N A P TAPE OFF i SYNCRO Noomen i SPLIT approx 1 second N A SERIES Note 1 REC start signal will be sent 3 seconds after pressing REC trigger button Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance Note 2 REC start signal will be sent just after pressing REC trigger button Actual recording start time is depending on recorder performance Note 3 In this mode the IEEE1394 stream is discontinuous during internal VCR back space editing when the REC trigger is operated This may result in breaks in the recording on tape on an external recorder In the case of HDD recording this may result in this device staying in REC PAUSE or divided files MEMO The cursor P does not move to this item when this
361. screen Greens and magentas may be colored This is due to char acteristics of the lens Correcting this phenomenon is called White Shading Adjustment Perform this after adjusting white balance White shading adjustment is performed on the WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen 1 Display the WHITE BALANCE menu screen Follow the steps in Setting Menu Screens on page 75 and proceed as follows MENU CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 CAMERA PRO CESS 2 2 ADVANCE PROCESS gt WHITE BALANCE WHITE BALANCE WHITE PAINT lt R gt NORMAL WHITE PAINT lt B gt NORMAL DSHADING PRESET LEVEL R LEVEL G LEVEL B PAGE BACK Setting in the WHITE BALANCE screen is performed as fol lows m Selecting an item Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor gt with the desired item and press the SHUTTER dial The item is selected and the setting value blinks m Changing the setting value Turn the SHUTTER dial to change the blinking value When the SHUTTER dial is pressed the value stops blinking and the setting is changed 2 Perform the above steps to set SHADING to MANUAL 3 Select LEVEL R LEVEL G LEVEL B and press the SHUTTER dial The setting value for the selected LEVEL blinks and becomes available for changing 4 Change the setting values for LEVEL R LEVEL G and LEVEL B with the SHUTTER dial while referring to the monitor When setting values are increased colors at the bottom of the screen are suppressed and the t
362. screen you can use this button as the FOCUS ASSIST button ts See page 83 10 ZOOM servo control lever To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever set the ZOOM knob to S Pressing the W section of this lever increases the angle of the lens for a wider shooting angle Pressing the T section of this lever narrows the lens angle perspective for telephoto shots Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom IRIS mode switch A Activates the auto iris feature M Allows manual iris control Momentary auto iris button When the IRIS mode switch is at M pushing this but ton activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down only OS IRIS speed adjusting control For adjusting the iris operation speed MEMO If the speed becomes too fast hunting may occur To avoid the phenomena described above perform adjustment again FILTER thread Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the front Other filters can be used for various effects ZOOM servo connector Connect an optional zoom servo unit here ZOOM ZOOM mode knob S Servo zoom mode Allows operation by the zoom servo control lever M Manual zoom mode Allows zoom control by the zoom lever ring BACK FOCUS ring fixing screw For back focus adjustment only Secure with the screw knob after adjustment t See Back Focus Adjustment on page
363. screen with white 5 Press the AWB Auto White Balance button AUTO WHITE A B OPERATION is displayed in the view finder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit operates When correct white balance is obtained the approximate color temperature is displayed together with AUTO WHITE A B OK for about 5 seconds Iris mode switch on page 10 ND filter DE oag C AWB button POWER switch _ WHT BAL switch MEMO Fine tune red and blue to match the white adjusted in white balance in WHITE PAINT lt R gt lt B gt on the WHITE BAL ANCE menu screen See page 82 Error messages If the adjustment ends abnormally an error message as described below blinks for about 5 seconds NG OBJECT Improper object Displayed when there is not enough white color on an object or the color temperature is not suitable Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use another white object and re adjust the white balance ERROR LOW LIGHT Insufficient illumination Displayed when the illumination is dim Increase the illumi nation and then re adjust the white balance ERROR OVER LIGHT Excessive illumination Displayed when the light is excessively bright Decrease the illumination and then re adjust the white balance AUTO WHITE A AUTO WHITE A OPERATION OK lt 3200K gt During operation Result message AUTO WHITE A AUTO WHITE A NG OBJECT ERROR LOW LIGH
364. sehold waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation Business users If you wish to dispose of this product please visit our web page www jvc europe com to obtain information about the take back of the product Other Countries outside the European Union If you wish to dispose of this product please do so in accor dance with applicable national legislation or other rules in your country for the treatment of old electrical and electronic equipment IV Thank you for purchasing the JVC GY HD250U CHU and GY HD251E CHE HD CAMERA RECORDER These instructions are for the GY HD250U CHU and GY HD251E CHE A lens is included with the GY HD250U and GY HD251E A lens is not included with the GY HD250CHU and GY HD251CHE Information applicable only to the GY HD250U CHU is marked by U model only Information applicable only to the GY HD251E CHE is marked by E model only FOV DW This device is a HDV DV video system format camera recorder on other units including another GY HD250 GY HD251 are recorded or played back on GY HD250 GY HD251 The transient section between scenes recorded on other units and those recorded on this device may appear dis turbed Digital noise may appear during playback due to track ing errors Recording or playback in the LP m
365. sult your JVC dealer Excluding the CHU CHE model EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS unit mm 40 VWF move VF MOVE 55 129 242 3 310 fer IDX BATT gt sje 256 13 LENS E A T rY al a i i I q O AS 3 Ese 297 tor ANTON BATT om 295 10a me 4 i o M o E j gt z p LENS ae Qo I E i PA ove Design and specifications are subject to change without notice 113 JVC Correction About provided clamp filter Wrong Correct Page 2 Clamp Filters x 4 Clamp Filters x 4 For DC x2 Audio For DC x2 Earphone IEEE1394 Cable IEEE1394 Cable t See pages 36 64 and 67 tx See pages 36 64 67 E Conncting the Earphone Cable To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible as shown in the figure Clamp filter 2006 Victor Company of Japan Limited LST0523 001A
366. switch on the back to prevent accidental erasure Slide the switch to SAVE to protect the required recording in the tape from being overwritten To record on the tape slide the switch to REC Switch For recording and storing videotapes in the best con dition Observe the following instructions for the best recording and storage of videotapes Take care of the conditions of handling videotapes It is recommended that you record and store videotapes in the environment below Storage Recording Short period Long period Up to 10 Over 10 years years Temperature 17 C to 25 C 15 C to 23 C 15 C to 19 C Humidity 30 to 70 40 to 55 25 to 35 Hourly tempera Less than _ _ ture change 10 C Hourly humidity Less than change 10 Do not leave the videotapes neglected for a long period If videotapes are left wound for a long period of time it may result in distortion of the tape Also it may cause tape to tape adhesion known as blocking It is recommended that videotapes be unspooled and rewound once a year for refreshing When tapes are not in use store them in cases and on end Storage cases protect videotapes from humidity dust and ultraviolet light Keep tapes in cases and do not store them lying flat When housed in a horizontal position pres sure from other tapes can cause distortions and deforma tions of the tape edges Condensation
367. t 8 bit 19 7 Mbps ing format Compression MPEG 2 video profile amp level MP H 14 108 DV Video signal record DV format 8 bit 25 Mbps ing format Compression DV_ compression 4 1 1 NTSC 4 2 0 PAL Audio HDV Audio signal record MPEG1 Audio Layer II ing format DV Audio signal record 16 bit locked audio 48 kHz PCM ing format for 2 channels or 12 bit 32 kHz PCM for 4 channels Usable tape MiniDV tape Tape speed 18 8 mm sec Record play time 63 minutes with an M DV63PROHD tape Time Code Time code signal Compliance with SMPTE EBU stan dard Connectors Analog composite output 1 0 V p p 75 Q unbalanced RCA Analog component output Y 1 0 V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC Ps PR 0 7 V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC Audio inputs Mic 60 dBs 3 kQ balanced XLR 48 V output for phantom power supply Line 4 dBs 10 KQO balanced XLR Audio outputs 8 dBs low impedance unbalanced RCA x2 Earphone jack 17 dBs to 60 dBs 8 Q impedance stereo mini jack x2 IEEE1394 connector 6 pin ACCESSORIES Lens 1 Excluding the CHU CHE model Microphone 1 Core Filter 1 Clamp Filter 4 SD memory card 1 Instruction Manual 1 Warranty Card USA and Canada only For details consult your JVC dealer EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS unit mm ica eal aa e 297 tor ANTON BATT 235
368. t SDI signals from this terminal in HD SD SDI OUT of the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen Y Component Y signal output terminal BNC Outputs Y signal of component when the PBPR TC switch is set to PBPR Ps TC IN Component Ps signal output time code input terminal BNC Outputs Ps signal of component when the PBPR TC switch is set to PBPR Inputs time code when the PBPR TC switch is set to TC Enter the LTC time code to slave lock this device s time code generator with an external time code genera tor MEMO Set TCG SOURCE on the TC UB CLOCK Menu screen to EXTERNAL to input external time codes ts See Synchronizing with an External Time Code Gener ator on page 49 Ps TC OUT Component Pe signal output time code output terminal BNC Outputs PR signal of component when the PBPR TC switch is set to PBPR Outputs the LTC time code of the built in time code gen erator when the PBPR TC switch is set to TC MEMO Set the Y PB PR terminal output image signal to RGB or Y C video signals in OUTPUT TERM DV on the VIDEO FORMAT 2 2 menu screen Only for DV format ts See OUTPUT TERM DV on page 79 17 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Top Section
369. t section between scenes recorded on other units and those recorded on this device may appear dis turbed Digital noise may appear during playback due to track ing errors This device records and plays back in the SP mode Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible In DV format Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes we recom mend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3 min utes from the beginning of the tape Before recording important scenes be sure to perform a test recording and confirm that both video and audio are recorded correctly Recorded video and audio contents are for private use Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright hold ers JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or audio due to malfunction of this device or the videocas sette All product names in this manual are trademarks or regis tered trademarks of their respective companies Marks such as and are not used in this manual ACCESSORIES _ Excluding the CHU CHE model Microphone ts See page 33 Lens ts See pages 10 and 33 Core Filter Clamp Filters x4 For Viewfinder Cable For DC 2 Earphone ts See page 34 IEEE1394 Cable ts See pages 12 36 and 63 oO p07 SD memory card ts See page 34 MAIN FEATURES This device records in HDV format or DV format DV for mat can record
370. t to OFF connect the DC cable to the DC OUTPUT connector of the AC adapter and the DC INPUT connector of this device as shown in the illustration To lessen the amount of unnecessary radio waves emitted attach a provided Clamp filter near both ends of the DC cable as shown in the diagram Clamp filter DC cable DC OUTPUT Clamp filter AC adapter 2 Press the POWER switch of this device to ON Power is supplied to the VTR section and the camera CAUTION Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording is being performed Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in the power source voltage power sources generating noise such as ripples or power sources with lower volt age 36 Charging the Built in Battery The built in rechargeable backup battery retains the date and time and the time code data The built in battery is constantly being charge whenever this device is connected to a power supply but it gradually dis charges while this device is disconnected from a power sup ply The battery will be fully discharged when this device is not used for about three months in which case the set date and time and time code data are reset In this case recharge the built in battery and then set the date and time and time code data again However it is possible to use this device even if the built in battery is discharged but the date and time and time code data
371. tape flash es only when recording To continue shooting find a new tape or replace the tape TAPE END Displayed when the tape ends Replace the tape CHANGE 1394 Recording or playback video format and the IEEE1394 set Set the IEEE1394 switch correctly turn the power off and SWITCH ting is different when connected to the IEEE1394 port then on again SWITCH TO VTR MODE Tried to use the FF or REW button in camera mode Press the CAM VTR button to set VTR mode HEAD CLEANING REQUIRED Displayed when the video head is dirty Head clogging was detected during an edit search in shooting mode as well as during playback and displayed Clean with a special head cleaning tape us See page 7 CLEANING TAPE Displayed when a head cleaning tape is inserted The display disappears when the head cleaning tape is re moved COPY GUARD Tried to play back a copyguarded tape Cannot play back a copyguarded tape FAN MOTOR HOUR Over the prescribed fan motor usage time Please contact your local dealer or JVC PUSH CASSETTE COVER The videocassette cover is not firmly shut Lightly push the top center of the videocassette cover CHANGE THE SYS TEM Displayed when you attempt to change FRAME RATE item in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen When the FRAME RATE item setting is changed the frame rate system for this device is changed Check the frame rate to use before changin
372. tch to ON This device turns on in Camera mode m The operation differs according to whether this device is in the Camera mode or in the VTR mode The mode switches each time you press the CAM VTR button When the mode is switched the VTR indicator displays the following statuses While the mode is being switched Flashing In VTR mode Lit In Camera mode Off OEE eet u O 1 wm CHT BOTH Hz T T s narai ary via CAMI VTR button POWER switch Camera mode This device enters the Camera mode The camera image is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor When a recordable videocassette is loaded this device enters the record standby mode automatically STBY is dis played in the VTR operation mode indication area of the LCD monitor and or in the viewfinder In this condition press the REC VTR trigger button to start recording Playback is also possible in the Camera mode Playback operation becomes possible when the STOP button is pressed to set the VTR operation mode indica tor to indicate STOP VTR mode This device enters the VTR mode The camera image will not be displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor When a videocassette is loaded this device enters the stop mode STOP is displayed in the VTR operation mode indi
373. te and Time Style 41 Setting the Date and Time 42 Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen 42 Displaying Time Code viss crara rpisiontr dakana 43 Displayed Time Code User s Bit 43 Time code input entered the IEEE1394 connector 43 Presetting and Recording of Time Code Setting Presetting time code data Presetting user s bit data 00 0 Zero resetting the Time Code or User s Bit Data 45 Presetting the Time Code from the LCD Screen 46 Recording Time Codes in Continuation of Time Codes Recorded on Tape 47 Playing Back Time Code Synchronizing with the Time Code of the IEEE1394 DV Connected Master Unit 48 Synchronizing with an External Time Code Generator 49 Screen Adjustment 00 0 00 0 e eee Viewfinder Adjustment Back Focus Adjustment White Balance Adjustment 02 00 52 White Balance Adjustment 00 52 Full Auto White Balance FAW 52 White Shading Adjustment 00 00 53 SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING Setting the Video Format 00000 54 Setting the FRAME RATE Item 54 Camera Settings 0 0 Aa eee eee 55 Screen Size 4 3 16 9 Mode Selection 55 Audio Input Signal Selection 000200
374. tem RGB Out Y C Out comes Out NATIVE 720P 10801 NTSC PAL 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 601 480 60i 7 480 60i 720 30p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60i N A 480 601 480 601 480 60i 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 501 576 50i2 576 50i2 576 50i HDV 720 25p 720 50p 1080 50i N A 576 50i 576 50 576 50i 576 50i 720 24p 720 60p 1080 60i 480 60 N A 480 601 480 601 7 480 60i 480 60p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 576 50p N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 480 60i pm va U model 480 60i 24p lt DV 576 50i E model 576 50i 25p y g T 1 When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to NTSC 480 60i format video signal is output 2 When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to PAL 576 50i format video signal is output MEMO Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE in the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the playback signal 20 21 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the View finder In addition to showing the EE image and the playback pic ture the LCD monitor and viewfinder are also used for the following character displays To show characters on the LCD monitor press the DISPLAY button briefly alm oO J cH BOTH GH T MONITOR SELECT DISI AY vrr DISPLAY button m Status screens screens for checking the current cam
375. ter making sure that the power switches of the GY HD250 GY HD251 and of the AC adapter are set to OFF connect the DC cable to the DC OUTPUT connector of the AC adapter and the DC INPUT connector of the GY HD250 GY HD251 as shown in the illustration To lessen the amount of unnecessary radio waves emitted attach a provided Clamp filter near both ends of the DC cable as shown in the diagram Clamp filter Moco DC cable De OUTPUT Clamp filter AC adapter 2 Press the POWER switch of the GY HD250 GY HD251 to ON Power is supplied to the VTR section and the cam era CAUTION Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording is being performed Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in the power source voltage power sources generating noise such as ripples or power sources with lower volt age 36 Charging the Built in Battery The built in rechargeable backup battery retains the date and time and the time code data The built in battery is constantly being charge whenever the GY HD250 GY HD251 is connected to a power supply but it gradually discharges while the GY HD250 GY HD251 is dis connected from a power supply The battery will be fully dis charged when the GY HD250 GY HD251 is not used for about three months in which case the set date and time and time code data are reset In this case recharge the built in battery and then set the date and time and
376. the BB Black Burst signal input to the GENLOCK IN terminal Increase the number Proceed phase Decrease the number Delay phase Settings MIN 127 to 1 0 1 to 126 MAX PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial once to return to the OTHERS 1 2 menu screen 1 REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected 99 MENU SCREENS FILE MANAGE Menu Screen You can perform the following operations in the FILE MAN AGE menu screen Settings corresponding to shooting conditions can be read immediately with the following read only files LIVE HD60P Ideal setting for HD60P format LIVE HD50P Ideal setting for HD50P format CINEMA HD24P Ideal setting for movie quality shoot ing The read only files listed above cannot be saved or reset Save menu settings Camcorder CAM1 2 3 4 SD mem ory card EXT1 2 3 4 to files Load saved files You can set a SUB NAME for the file to be saved Reset the menu settings to the factory settings Initialize format an SD memory card When you set CANCEL for the LOAD STORE RESET and FORMAT SD CARD items these operations are not executed A message is displayed in the LCD monitor or the view finder EXECUTE Displayed for 3 seconds COMPLETE Displayed for 3 seconds ERROR Flashes Error displays 1 See page 101 poa LOAD FILE LOAD FILE
377. the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen Settings MIN 12 10 1 NORMAL 10126 MAX PRESET TEMP Assigns PRESET TEMP item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen LEVEL G When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL adjusts the greens of white shading 1 See CAMERA OPERATION Menu Screen on page 77 Increase the number Green at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced B STRETCH1 Assigns BLACK item functions in the CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 menu screen Decrease the number Green at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced y S g im i aad B STRETCH2 ts See CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 Menu Screen on page 78 Settings MIN 127 to 1 NORMAL 1 to 126 MAX B STRETCH3 LEVEL B When the SHADING item is set to MANUAL adjusts the blues of white shading B STRETCH4 Increase the number Blue at the bottom of the screen is suppressed and the top is enhanced B STRETCH5 Decrease the number Blue at the top of the screen is suppressed and the bottom is enhanced B COMPRESS1 Settings MIN 127 to 1 NORMAL 1 to 126 MAX B COMPRESS2 PAGE BACK When the cursor is in this position press the SHUTTER dial to return to ADVANCED PROCESS menu screen B COMPRESS3 1 REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected P C OMERESSI AE LEVEL Assigns AE LEVEL item functions in the CAMERA OPERATION menu screen AE LEVEL MEMO Cannot assign to the USER3 button If you assign thes
378. the figure Inserting an SD Memory Card By using an SD memory card you can save and call up menu settings and camera settings for this device ts See FILE MANAGE Menu Screen on page 96 Check that the POWER switch is OFF Inserting an SD Memory Card 1 Open the SD memory card cover 2 Face the cutout end of the SD memory card inward and insert it in the direction of the arrow CAUTION Be sure not to touch the metal connector area of the SD memory card 34 3 Close the SD memory card cover Cutout Taking out the SD memory card 1 Push the SD memory card in the direction of the arrow The SD memory card comes out slightly 2 Pull the SD memory card straight out About SD Memory Cards When you use an SD memory card that is either new or was formatted on a device other than this device format it on this device ts See page 98 Recommended SD memory cards Panasonic 16 MB to 2 GB You can write protect the card so that saved files are not mistakenly erased Set the switch on the side of the SD memory card to the LOCK position SpI907 LOCK switch F MEMO SDHC compliant memory cards cannot be used with this device Attaching the Tripod Base Optional Use the optional tripod base to place the camera on a tripod 1 Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that balances this device most optimally O0000000000
379. the following cases e When this device is suddenly moved from a cold place to a pon drum warm place When a room heater has just started or when this device is exposed directly to cold air from k 5 an air conditioner When this device is placed in a very humid place Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the camera under conditions where the temperature environ ment changes After moving this device do not use until the internal parts have stabilized CONDENSATION ON DRUM is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder when condensation occurs in this device WARNING 0201 CONDENSATION ON DRUM Keep the power on until the warning message disappears Pay attention to condensation even before the condensa tion indication appears As condensation forms gradually the condensation indica tion may not appear for the first 10 15 minutes after con densation has formed inside In an extremely cold place the condensation could freeze and turn into frost In such a case it takes an additional 2 3 hours for the frost to first melt into condensation and then to be dissolved To prevent condensation When moving this device from one place to another where the temperatures are greatly deferent first remove the vid eocassette place this device in a tightly sealed vinyl bag and then move it to a new environment To ensure no condensation occurs allow the temperature of this device in th
380. the power of both devices OFF and connect the IEEE1394 cable Do not insert incorrectly in reverse the IEEE1394 cable end to IEEE1394 port of both devices lt x Do not connect the IEEE1394 cable under the condition of static electricity Turn the power of both devices OFF when changing the IEEE1394 switch from to HDV DV Displaying Alarms CHANGE 1394 SWITCH Displayed when the setting for the input output video format from the IEEE1394 connector and the setting for the IEEE1394 switch are different Set the IEEE1394 switch so it matches the video format CHANGE 1394 SWITCH 63 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Dubbing with AV Devices By connecting the video signal output terminal and the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal on this device to an AV device analog signal dubbing is possible 1 Connect the cables Composite cable or Component cable Signal flow Recording unit AUDIO OUTPUT connector s Signal flow 2 Turn both devices on 3 Set this device to VTR mode Press the CAM VTR button The VTR indicator lights 4 Set the video output Set the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen 0 See page 74 VIDEO FORMAT menu screen gt VIDEO FORMAT FRAME RATE 60 30 DHDV PB OUTPUT NATIVE DOWN CON HDV LETTER PB TAPE AUTO SET UP 0 0 PAGE BACK HDV PB OUTPUT item Set the video format to be output from the video output terminal during ta
381. the shutter speed differs depending on the video format t See page 86 WHT BAL A 00K B 00K PRESET 00K FAW For A and B represents 23 25 28 30 32 34 37 43 52 65 or 80 For PRESET 32 or 56 AE LEVEL 3 2 1 NORMAL 1 2 3 FILTER OFF ND1 1 4ND ND2 1 46ND ZEBRA 60 70 70 80 85 95 OVER 95 OVER 100 REMAIN Displays the remaining tape minutes AUDIO Displays the audio sampling frequency and the audio level adjustment mode Ex 32K CH1 A CH2 M Al for AUTO mode M for MANUAL mode When SHUTTER DISP on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen is set to DEG the shutter display for the frame rate in 24p or 25p mode is degrees Indication Indication Contents SHUTTER When STEP is selected 360 0 180 0 172 8 150 0 144 0 135 0 120 0 105 0 90 0 75 0 60 0 45 0 30 0 22 5 11 2 When VARIABLE is selected 0 to 360 STATUS 3 Displays a list of setting statuses for USER1 2 and 3 as well as LENS RET item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen us See page 86 Events are not displayed while these statuses are being displayed Indication Indication Contents USER1 USER2 NONE BARS PRESET TEMP B STRETCH1 to 5 B COMPRESS1 to 5 AE LEVEL AE LEVEL RET LOAD FILE USER3 NONE BARS PRESET TEMP B STRETCH1 to 5 B COMPRESS1 to 5 RET LOAD FILE LENS RET STATUS 4 This screen onl
382. ticed on the monitor output screen of BR HD50 backup will be correctly recorded 67 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Connect a Remote Con trol Unit RM LP55 RM LP57 Set camera switch functions with the remote control unit RM LP55 RM LP57 Connection Connect the remote control unit cable to the REMOTE termi nal Wind once REMOTE RM LP55 Attach the clamp filter included with the remote control unit to the remote cable The clamp filter can be substituted with the clamp filter included with this device Consult your JVC dealer if you do not have a clamp filter CAUTION Turn the power OFF when connecting Operation 1 Turn the device ON 2 Turn ON the OPERATE switch on remote control unit to activate the remote control unit See page 69 for details on functions that can be operated with the remote control unit 68 Notes on Using the Remote Control Unit When the switch function of this device and the remote control unit are the same the remote control switch func tion is prioritized FOCUS and ZOOM cannot be adjusted with the remote control unit Shutter speed slightly differs from the value displayed on this device Shutter Speed in 24p Mode When this device is in 24p mode shutter speed cannot be set to 1 60 U model or 1 50 E model with the remote control unit Even if shutter speed is set
383. tilis que sur du cou rant direct en 12V ATTENTION Afin d eviter tout resque d incendie ou d lectrocu tion ne pas utillser d autres sources d alimentation lectrique REMARQUE La plaque signal tique plaque du num ro des rie est situ e sur le cadre inf rieur de l unit The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and Due to design modifications data given in this instruction book are subject to possible change without prior notice that no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed close to the apparatus Worded CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC I Safety Precautions Cont d FOR EUROPE This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection requirements of the corresponding European Directives This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and can be used in the following environments residential area in houses commercial and light industry e g offices or theatres urban outdoors In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electro magnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding the following length Camera Port Cable DC IN Exclusive Cable VIDEO Coaxial Cable Y PB PR Coaxial Cable AUDIO INPUT1 Shielded Cable
384. time code data again However it is possible to use the GY HD250 GY HD251 even if the built in battery is discharged but the date and time and time code data cannot be recorded How to charge the built in battery 1 Connect the AC adapter to the GY HD250 GY HD251 and an AC outlet or mount a charged battery on the GY HD250 GY HD251 2 Set the POWER switch on the GY HD250 GY HD251 to ON or OFF charging takes places with the POWER switch set to either of the positions 3 Leave the equipment in this condition for about 4 hours The built in battery will remain charged for about 3 months after being charged for about 4 hours Battery Operation The attachable battery varies depending on location Recommended batteries U model Dionic 90 Anton Bauer E model Endura 7 IDX CAUTION Use only the recommended batteries If a heavy battery is used the battery may fall out depend ing on the way the HD camera recorder is used mGY HD250U Use an Anton Bauer battery Attaching the Battery 1 Align the battery guide pins three places with the bat tery adapter guide holes and insert straight Battery will not be properly attached if guide pins are not straight Guide pins Cassette cover Guide side panel holes x3 Battery pack trim pack LCD screen side panel 2 Slide the battery towards the Cassette cover side panel until it clicks The battery is attached Removing the Ba
385. tion 3200K Sets the basic color temperature to 3200K Use for light sources with a low color temperature such as halogen lamps 5600K Sets the basic color temperature to 5600K Use for light sources with a high color temperature such as sunlight MEMO This item does not function when the FAW item on the SWITCH MODE menu screen is set to PRESET SMOOTH TRANS Smoothens the transition when the GAIN switch on page 15 or WHT BAL switch on page 15 is switched over and achieves gradual change in place of sudden change However the smooth transition function does not function when switching the GAIN switch set in ALC FULL AUTO ON vl 50 OFF Deactivates the smooth transition function ON Activates the smooth transition function BARS Sets whether or not color bars are output This is fixed at OFF when in FULL AUTO mode OFF Color bars are not output ON Color bars are output PAGE BACK The TOP MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with the cursor at this position REMOTE appears as the setting value of this item when the remote control unit is connected CAMERA PROCESS 1 2 Menu Screen The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen consists of two screens 1 2 screen 2 2 screen The CAMERA PROCESS menu screen is only displayed in camera mode MASTER BLACK Function Setting bold characters indicate initi Adjusts the pedestal level master black that serves as the
386. to 1 60 or 1 50 with the remote control unit when in 24p mode the shutter speed for the device is 1 48 AUTO WHITE Function When the device is in VTR mode during playback or HEADER REC the AUTO WHITE function does not work even if the auto white operation is performed with the RM LP55 and RM LP57 In the case of the RM LP55 LOW LIGHT ERROR is dis played on the LCD screen of the RM LP55 Remote Control Unit Functions List SC FINE X Function RANDOM SHUTTER x RM LP55 RM LP57 Action VARIABLE SHUTTER LEVEL x BARS OFF ON 5 SLOW SHUTTER LEVEL x CONTOUR OFF ON O Same as RM LP55 O Available CONTOUR V H LEVEL sm O None X Not available RISIMANU AUTO O wl Only when frame rate is 60p 60i 30p or 24p IRIS LEVEL ta O 2 Only when frame rate is 50p 50i or 25p IRIS DETECT x WHT BAL AUTO1 O AUTO2 O FAW O PRESET O MANU O AUTO WHITE O MANUAL WHITE BALANCE R B o LEVEL PAINT R B LEVEL O GAIN 0dB O 6dB O 9dB Q 12dB c O LOLUX x 3dB x 6dB x ALC EEI O ALC x NEGA OFF ON x SHUTTER NORMAL O 1 100 or 1 120 o 1 250 c O 1 500 a 1 1000 O 1 2000 O 1 4000 O 1 10000 O EEI X V SCAN x ZOOM X FOCUS X HI RESO OFF ON x MASTER BLACK LEVEL e GAMMA OFF ON x GAMMA MASTER LEVEL x KNEE MAST
387. to the nor mal screen Press the STATUS button or Return to the TOP MENU screen select the EXIT item and press the SHUTTER dial MEMO The DV format is capable of recording up to 4 channels when the 12 bit 32 kHz sampling frequency is employed The GY HD250 GY HD251 records audio on the two channels CH 1 and CH 2 4 channel recording is possible in the case of DV input When the GY HD250 GY HD251 is used for playback of a tape that was recorded on another unit with audio recorded on the CH 3 and CH 4 channels the PB AUDIO CH DV item on the AUDIO menu screen must be set After recording on the CH 3 and CH 4 channels is not possible The PB AUDIO CH DV item is also valid for embedded audio The sampling frequency for embedded audio is 48 kHz L R CH1 CH3 L R CH3 MIX L R CH1 CH2 STEREO L CH1 R CH2 L R CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 L R CH3 CH4 L CH1 CH3 R CH2 CH4 L CH3 R CH4 L R CH2 L R CH2 CH4 L R CH4 In HDV format you can only select the settings within the bold frame 63 USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS Connecting the Video Signal Cables Connecting the IEEE1394 Cable To reduce the emission of unwanted radio waves be sure to attach the provided clamp filter as shown in the figure below Attach the clamp filter as close to this device as possible as shown in the figure Set the IEEE1394 switch on the left panel of this device DV DV format HDV HDV format I
388. ts See page 22 LCD Door C4 Lod BRIGHT SNR ae C I LCD BRIGHT LCD brightness button This button is for adjusting the brightness of the LCD mon itor display Pushing the button in the direction makes the monitor brighter Pushing the button in the direction makes the monitor darker Pushing the buttons simultaneously returns the set ting to the standard setting J CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio selector switch Selects the method of adjusting the CH 1 and CH 2 audio channel audio levels AUTO The audio level is automatically adjusted according to the input level When excessive audio is input the limiter works to suppress the audio level The AUTO LED in the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO LEVEL area on page 15 lights MANU Allows you to adjust the audio levels using the CH 1 CH 2 AUDIO LEVEL volume con trols on page 15 Set AUDIO LIMITER on the AUDIO MIC 1 2 menu screen to use limiter functions when excessive audio is input ts See AUDIO LIMITER on page 87 TC DISPLAY TC UB display switch Selects the contents displayed on the TC counter of the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder This switch works when the TC UB item on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen is set to ON TC Set to this position to display time code values UB _ Set to this position to display the user s bits values O TC GENE Time code generator setting sw
389. ts all time codes to 0 UB PRESET To preset the user s bit data align the cursor with this position and then press the SHUTTER dial EXECUTE The set user s bit data are confirmed CANCEL The set user s bit data are cancelled ZERO PRESET Resets all user s bits data to 0 MEMO When the UB REC item is set to OFI is displayed and this cannot be selected DROP FRAME 1 Selects whether the time code generator framing mode is drop frame or non drop frame DROP Internal time code generator works in drop frame mode Set this when the recorded time is im portant NON DROP Internal time code generator works in non drop frame mode Set this when the number of frames is important UB REC 2 To select whether or not user s bit data should be recorded To select whether the user s bits should be displayed during playback of a tape with recorded user s bits data ON User s bits are recorded during recording User s bits are displayed during playback OFF User s bits are not recorded during recording User s bits are not displayed during playback TC DUPLI Sets how to record the time code TC and user s bits UB during IEEE1394 input of HDV DV format OFF Records the TC UB set in this device ON Records the TC UB of the IEEE1394 input MEMO In HDV format the UB set in this device is recorded regardless of the setting HEADER REC To make settings related to the HEADER REC function align the cursor with this position
390. ttery Slide the battery towards you LCD screen side panel while holding down the release lever and pull away from the device to remove the battery Release lever mGY HD251E Use an IDX Endura battery Attaching the Battery 1 Face the battery terminals down and align the battery V mount with the battery adapter V mount attachment V mount attachment 2 Slide the battery down until it clicks and locks The battery is attached Removing the Battery Slide the battery up while holding down the lock release but ton to remove the battery Release button 37 PREPARATIONS Battery Operation Cont d Precautions for the Battery Opera tion Do not detach the battery pack while recording is taking place Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operat ing with a battery pack The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is con nected or disconnected while operating with a battery pack The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is disconnected Noise to the video and audio signals occurs Audio sig nal are muted When operation is continued with DC input after the bat tery pack capacity has been used up set the POWER switch to OFF after the DC power is applied Then switch ON again If the GY HD250 GY HD251 is left with the battery pack attached a small amount of power is consumed even if the POWER switch on the GY HD250 GY HD2351 is set to OFF
391. ue of the item press this dial When the setting value starts blinking turn this dial upward or downward to change the setting ts See Setting Menu Screens on page 72 IND FILTER ND filter switch Switches the built in ND filter OFF Turns the filter OFF FILTER OFF 1 Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1 4 1 4ND 2 Cuts the light intensity to approximately 1 16 1 16ND When you change this switch the type of the new ND filter is displayed in the LCD monitor or viewfinder CAUTION If you switch the ND filter while shooting is in progress the picture may be disturbed or noise may occur in the audio t See Camera Settings on page 54 STATUS Status Menu button Pressing this button in the normal screen mode condi tion in which the menu screen is not shown displays a status screen in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor The displayed status screen changes each time the but ton is pressed ts See Status Screens on page 22 Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the nor mal screen mode displays the menu screen in the view finder or on the LCD monitor Pressing this button while the menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor makes the menu screen disappear ts See Setting Menu Screens on page 72 IGAIN Sensitivity selector switch Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is insufficient illumination on the subject The boostin
392. uring HEADER REC 1 sec steps Settings OSEC 30SEC 99SEC PAGE BACK 94 The TC UB CLOCK menu screen returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed TIME DATE Menu Screen Item Function Setting bold characters indicate initial settings DISPLAY Sets whether the date and time are shown in the status display on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder OFF Not displayed ON Displayed When a tape with time and date not recorded is played back there will be no display of time and date even when this item is set to ON DISPLAY MODE In the Camera mode the date and time are displayed in accordance with the following settings The date and time recorded on a tape are displayed in accordance with the following settings BARS CAM Date and time are always displayed BARS Date and time are displayed when the color bars are output CAM Date and time are displayed when the camera images are output When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected DISPLAY STYLE Selects the style for the date and time display DATE TIME Date and time are displayed DATE Date only is displayed TIME Time only is displayed When the DISPLAY item is set to OFF is indicated and this item cannot be selected DATE STYLE Selects the style for the date display YY MM DD Displayed in the format of year month date MM DD YY Displayed in the format of m
393. using the TC DISPLAY switch in the LCD door Remaining tape time Remaining tape indication displayed in 1 minute steps This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen 1 See page 88 When inserting a brand new tape the remaining tape time is not indicated When the tape has been run the indication will appear The remaining tape indication is to be used only as a guide When this device is used at low temperatures it may take a while before the indication of the remaining tape time appears Event display Displays messages related to VTR operations 0 See pages 102 104 Audio sampling frequency in The audio sampling frequency used for the recording is displayed during playback dication 32 K 48 K 44 1 K Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen ts See page 88 Audio level meter indication Displays the audio level meters during playback Whether or not to display this item is set with the AUDIO item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen 1 See page 88 VTR mode indication Indicates the VTR operation status 28 STBY STOP PLAY REC FF REW FWD REV STL No tape loaded SLOW During variable play back in forward direction Displayed when using non linear editing software SLOW 1 About x0 1 speed SLOW 2
394. ut Composite 50i 25p REC menu item ut ut ut en is set to 14 i format video signal is output REC 1394 O EE Out oO 1 When HDV PB OUTPUT i NTSC 480 60i f ideo signal i HDV HD60P 720 60p va Pe E 480 601 2 When HDV PB OUTPUT is set to PAL 576 50i format video signal is output 5 HDV HD30P 720 30p lt 720 60p 480 60i MEMO HDV HDV HD50P 720 50p 576 50i Synchronize the setting for FRAME RATE on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen with the frame rate of the IEEE1394 input signal HDV HD25P 720 25p 720 50p 576 50i HDV HD24P 720 24p K 720 60p 480 60i DV 601 480 60i m When Recording Composite Images from the AUX IN Terminal U model only DV 24P 480 60i 24p om bm Recording Composite In P a Pa Component SDI Out EE Out RGB Out Y C Out compos DV DV 24PA 480 60i 24p ma p E modeio i DV 501 576 50i m HD model on jean ONY pv 25P 5765025 U model 480 60i cad e 10801 CAMERA Rec on IEEE Composite SD 7 menu em Frame rate Tape 1394 Out Component SDI Out RGB Out Y C Out Out E model 576 50i va p Pe Fs Pi p ON 60 30 N A N A 1080 60i N A N A 480 60i MEMO 50 25 N A N A 1080 50i N A N A 576 50i For the U model set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen to DV 60I For the E model set REC on the VIDEO FORMAT 1 2 menu screen to DV 501 Em In PLAY mode IEEE Component SDI Out 1 Playback 1394 HDV PB OUTPUT menu i
395. uter monitor etc You can set the following using the REC item on the VIDEO FORMAT menu screen This is fixed at EEI when in FULL AUTO mode REC Item Setting for STEP Setting for VARIABLE DV 60I 1 7 5 1115 1 30 1 60 1 100 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 30 03 1 10489 5 HDV HD60P_ 1 10000 HDV HD30P DV 501 116 25 1 12 5 1 25 1 50 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 25 04 1 10489 5 HDV HD50P 1 4000 1 10000 HDV HD25P DV 25P Initial value 1 25 DV 24P 1 6 1 12 1124 1 48 1 60 1 100 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 24 01 1 10489 5 DV 24PA 1 4000 1 10000 HDV HD24P Initial value 1 48 FAW Sets the positions to assign the FAW Full Auto White Balance function to the WHT BAL white balance selector switch on page 15 Fixed at FAW when in FULL AUTO mode NONE The FAW function is not assigned A Assigns FAW to the A position B Assigns FAW to the B position PRESET Assigns FAW to the PRESET position GAIN L Sets the gain value for each position on the GAIN sensitivity selector switch on page 15 GAIN M Setting OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB ALC Fixed at ALC in FULL AUTO mode GAIN H Initial values L 0dB M 9dB H 18dB USER1 You can assign one of the following menu functions to the USER1 2 3 buttons on page 14 to each button USER2 Set according to the shooting conditions This is only valid in CAMERA mode This does not function in VTR mode USER3 Setting Description NONE Does not fu
396. ution Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or mag netism for example near a radio or TV transmitter transformer motor etc the picture and the sound may be disturbed In such case please keep the apparatus away from the sources of the dis turbance Dear Customer This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European direc tives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety European representative of Victor Company of Japan Limited is JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH P O Box 10 05 52 61145 Friedberg Germany II Information for Users on Disposal of Old Equipment Attention This symbol is only valid in the European Union European Union This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic equip ment should not be disposed as general household waste at its end of life Instead the product should be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment for proper treatment recovery and recycling in accordance with your national legislation By disposing of this product correctly you will help to con serve natural resources and will help prevent potential nega tive effects on the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product For more information about collection point and recycling of this product please contact your local municipal office your hou
397. w all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accor dance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radia tors heat resisters stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety f the provided plug does not fit into your outlet con sult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete out et Protect the power cord from being walked on or inched particularly at plug convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod PORTABLE CART WARNING bracket or table specified by the 57 pod bv ETACI manufacturer or sold with the appa ratus lt When a cart is used use caution e SN when moving the cart apparatus ap combination to avoid injury tip over WE Unplug this apparatus during light ning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam aged in any way such as power supply cord or plug i
398. wer is nearly exhausted the following warnings will be generated m Viewfinder screen or LCD monitor When a Status screen is displayed excluding the STATUS 2 3 screen in the Camera mode Alarm indication LOW VOLTAGE displayed m FRONT and BACK TALLY lamp on camera Blinks m Monitoring loudspeaker and PHONES jack Alarm sound MEMO After the remaining battery power warnings appear this device automatically stops operation if the battery power operation is continued 38 When you use an Anton Bauer battery the remaining battery capacity or time can be displayed in the STA TUS 1 screen of the LCD screen or viewfinder Set BAT TERY INFO on the LCD VF 3 4 menu screen to CAPA or TIME to display the remaining battery When using the IDX Endura battery the remaining capacity can be displayed See page 88 Operating Time with Battery Pack When a fully charged battery pack is attached the approxi mate continuous operating time is as follows Battery Pack Continuous Operating Time at 25 C 77 F Dionic 90 Approx 3 2 hours U model Endura 7 Approx 2 5 hours E model Battery operating time may differ depending on the age of the battery pack charging conditions and the operating environment etc Use the values in the table on the above for approximate reference times Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environ ment Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens
399. y displ RET FOCUS ASSIST lays VTR mode indication date and time event display and alarm indications Whether or not date and time should be displayed and the display style are set on the TIME DATE menu screen ts See Displaying the Time and Date on the Screen on page 42 27 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS Indications on the LCD Monitor and in the Viewfinder Cont d Status Screen in VTR MODE ud HDV HD30P Boo 00 00 00 2 0nin ol ol P 4K Prav 01 02 03 MO 7 No Item Contents VIDEO FORMAT display Displays the video format recorded on the tape when in VTR mode Also displays the video format of the HDV DV input signal You can switch this display ON OFF using the VIDEO FORMAT item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen us See page 91 Time code TC and user s bits Displays the time code data being recorded hour minute second frame when in VTR mode UB display You can switch this display ON OFF using the TC UB item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu screen ts See page 91 You can select to display either the time code or the user s bits using the TC DISPLAY switch in the LCD door Remaining tape time Remaining tape indication displayed in 1 minute steps This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent to less than 3 minutes Whether or not to display this item is set with the TAPE REMAIN item on the LCD VF 1 2 menu sc
400. yed while the STA TUS 0 1 4 screen is shown in the Camera mode or a STA TUS screen is shown in the VTR mode If an alarm is generated while the STATUS 2 3 screen is shown the STATUS 0 screen returns to display the alarm uss See page 102 When an abnormality occurs in the VTR a warning message with an error code is displayed uss See pages 102 104 Auto White Balance Indication Camera mode only The AUTO WHITE indication and the result of the operation are dis played during the auto white balance adjustment operation uss See White Balance Adjustment on page 51 m 308 FAW 8D B 12 00 01 02 03 MO1 23 45 AUTO WHITE A OPERATION Alarm display area Menu Setting Screen Screen used for making various settings The Menu Setting Screen appears when the STATUS button is pressed for 1 second or more uss See Setting Menu Screens on page 72 MENU DVIDEO FORMAT CAMERA OPERATION CAMERA PROCESS SWITCH MODE AUDIO MIC LCD VF TC UB CLOCK OTHERS FILE MANAGE EXIT TOP MENU screen Camera mode Safety Zone Indication Camera mode only The indication of the following safety zone and center mark indications can be turned ON OFF with the SAFETY ZONE item and CEN TER MARK item on the LCD VF 1 4 menu screen t See page 86 In addition the safety zone display is on or off

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Nespresso  Multiquip GX340UT2QAP2 User's Manual  Desa CGB3924NR User's Manual  Sony PCG-C1XS User's Manual  User Manual  Samsung CW-29M064N User Manual  JVC VS-DT88V User's Manual  電解式ｵｿﾞﾝ水生成器 ( Handy Ozone Generater ) 取扱説明書 1/2 ﾍﾟｰｼﾞ  DWA-171 User Manual - D-Link  Emtec C410 32GB  

Copyright © All rights reserved.

• https://telegra.ph/Calculat-Wire-Area-From-Voltage-Drop-ea2e5ff0-11-16
• https://telegra.ph/DC-Voltage-Drop-Calculator-c0601877-11-16
• https://telegra.ph/Wall-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-5f8bb44f-11-17
• https://telegra.ph/Wall-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-1d468d37-11-13
• https://telegra.ph/Round-Slab-Concrete-Volume-Calculator-8082c569-11-13
• https://telegra.ph/L-profile-weight-calculator-17beeda1-11-07
• https://telegra.ph/hexagonal-steel-weight-calculator-96385d90-11-07
• https://telegra.ph/Calculate-Current-from-Voltage-Drop-51a7616b-11-17
• https://telegra.ph/Calculate-Current-from-Voltage-Drop-f26adf11-11-18
• https://telegra.ph/Calculate-Length-from-Voltage-Drop-3a804af9-11-18